null  null
Technical Specifications
FIRST OPTION
Sports center -Ramallah
Ramallah Municipality Project Name:
Ramallah Recreational Complex
Phase 1
Sports Center
Ramallah, Palestine
Volume VI
GENERAL AND PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
A- Architectural & Structural
SPORT HALL
Funded by: IBSA
INDIA BRAZIL SOUTH AFRICA
Through: United Nations Development Programme
Programme Assistance to the Palestinian people
Designed by
First Option- Amara
Architects, Engineers & Construction Managements
2009
1
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
SECTION: 24
DRAINAGE
1
Scope
This Specification deals with the installation of the materials, fittings and equipment, the design and
performance, the workmanship and the testing and commissioning of the below ground drainage.
This Specification is in addition to and will be read in conjunction with the Contract Drawings and
relevant parts of the Contract Documents.
2
General
Works shall be constructed in accordance with BS CP 301 : 1971 Building Drainage. The Contractor
shall notify the Engineer of discrepancies between BS CP 301 and the working drawings and
specifications.
Pipes and fittings shall be jointed and laid in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of discrepancies between the manufacturer's recommendations
and the design.
Unless otherwise stated, the provisions of the latest revised additions of relevant British Standards and
Codes of Practice shall be held to be incorporated in the specification of materials and workmanship.
Drains shall be accurately laid, true to line and grade from point to point. Manholes shall be provided
at changes of direction or gradient and at points of connection. Drain runs between manholes should be
absolutely straight. Lines and falls shall be accurately set as shown on Drawings or as directed on Site.
Pipe work materials shall be as stated in the Particular Conditions or on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall perform all necessary excavation for drains, manholes, septic tanks, soak ways etc.
, uphold sides , level or grade bottoms , return fill and ram and remove surplus spoil as directed .
The system shall be maintained in accordance with Clause 6 of CP 301 .
3
Pipe work
Excavation of any section of the work shall not start until a complete set of the pipes and components
for that section is available.
The trench shall be as narrow as practicable but not less than the pipe diameter plus 300mm from each
side to permit adequate compaction of side fill. Adequate working space shall be left for pipe jointers
and joint holes shall be formed where necessary.
The trench sides shall be kept vertical unless the approved use of a batter is unavoidable. In the latter
case the sides of the trench shall be kept vertical up to 300mm above the top of the pipe. If over width
excavation occurs at or below this level the trench shall be reformed using concrete to 300mm above the
level of the top of the pipe or the Engineer's approval shall be obtained for the proposed bedding for the
wider trench condition.
Bedding material shall be
(a)
Local korkar .
(b)
Sand to BS 882 Zones 1 - 4 .
Pipes and fittings shall be inspected before fixing, and defective items shall be rejected.
Pipes shall be laid with the socket ends against the flow and shall rest on a solid and even bearing for
the full length of the barrel.
Trenches shall be back-filled only after drains have been tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
98
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
Flexible pipes including pitch fiber pipes, PVC pipes, steel pipes and tubes and ductile iron pipes shall
be laid on a granular or sand bed. The trench shall be excavated below the invert level of the pipe to
depth that will allow a minimum thickness of 200mm of Sand as bedding material, which shall extend
to the full width of the trench.
In rocky ground a minimum of 200mm of granular or sand bed shall be used.
The bedding material shall be well tamped down on the trench bottom, which shall be free from hard,
or soft spots.
The finished bottom shall be true to line and gradient.
Rigid pipes including vitrified clayware, asbestos cement pipes, grey iron pipes and concrete pipes
shall either be laid on a granular or sand bed or on a concrete base in the trench bottom. The type of
base provided shall depend on the nature of the trench formation and the presence of ground water.
Where the nature of the ground is such as to allow the trench formation to be trimmed to provide a
uniform and solid bearing, pipes shall be laid upon the formation. Socket and joint holes shall be as
short as practicable and shall be scraped or cut into the formation.
Where because of the nature of the ground or the presence of ground water pipes cannot be laid directly
on the trench formation, the trench shall be excavated below the invert level of the pipe to a depth to
allow a minimum thickness of 200mm of granular bedding material, which shall extend the full width
of the trench. The bedding material, trench, etc., shall be as for flexible pipes.
Where pipes are to be laid with a concrete bed, bed and haunch or surrounds, the trench bottom shall be
prepared as for the laying of pipes on a granular bed but with a layer of concrete at least 50mm thick.
The pipes shall be supported clear of the trench bottom by blocks or cradles placed under the pipe and
immediately behind each socket for short small pipes with a second block near the spigot end for long
or large pipes.
The support should yield under load sufficiently to permit the barrel of the pipe to rest uniformly on its
bed after the normal setting shrinkage of the concrete has occurred. The clearance under the barrel
before placing the concrete should be not less than 100mm. The concrete bed or haunch should extend
to 150mm on each side of the pipe.
Concrete shall not be laid until the drain has been approved by the Engineer.
Where rigid pipes with flexible joints are employed with a concrete bed, haunch or surround a simple
constructional flexible joint shall be provided in the concrete and at the face of a pipe joint at intervals of
not more than 5 meters to reduce the natural rigidity of the concrete.
The first 300mm of filling above the top of pipes and the filling around the pipes shall be placed by
hand over the pipe and compacted by hand in finished layers of 150mm to a maximum of 300mm and
shall be selected material, well watered and carefully rammed around the pipes .The material shall be
distributed equally to both sides of the pipe to buttress it to the sides of the trench. Subsequent filling
shall be placed, rammed and watered if necessary in 300mm thick layers. Drains shall be kept free from
earth, sand, surplus mortar and other obstructions during laying. Adequate cover shall be provided
before using power compactors or heavy rollers.
Vitrified clay pipes and concrete pipes with more than 4.25 m of earth cover shall be laid on a 150mm
thick bench of concrete and be haunched with concrete 150mm thick to at least the horizontal diameter
of the pipe and above that level splayed tangentially to the extrados.
Where vitrified clay pipes and concrete pipes with more than 6 m of earth cover are used or where the
pipes are laid in a heading or the cover is less than 1.2m if the pipes are laid in roads or 0.90 m
elsewhere, the pipe shall be completely surrounded with concrete to a thickness of not less than 150mm.
The width of concrete beds shall be 150mm greater than the external diameter of the pipe on both sides.
99
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
Where drains run beneath buildings they shall be constructed of cast iron pipes and shall be encased in
concrete on bottom, top and both sides to a thickness of 150mm greater than the external diameter of the
pipe and adequate flexibility in the pipeline shall be allowed.
The Engineer shall be consulted if pipes are to be laid with less than 600mm of cover or within 150mm
of the underside of a concrete slab.
The head of every drainage system shall be ventilated and such ventilating pipes shall, where possible,
be fixed against the outside face of an external wall unless otherwise shown on the Drawings and
carried up to a height of 900mm above that part of the structure immediately adjacent to it. The
ventilating pipe shall be fitted with a galvanized or copper wire balloon at the top.
Except where branches or other fittings occur, the top length of each ventilating stack shall consist of a
complete length of pipe which shall be anchored 1.20 m from the top by means of wrought steel strap
fixed as described elsewhere and painted to match the pipe. Any short length required to make up the
length of the stack shall be fitted immediately below the top length.
4
UPVC Pipes and Fittings
UPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with BS 4660 .
All pipes and fittings on all soil, waste and vent pipes shall be in Unplasticised Polyvinyle Chloride,
with solvent weld cement joints, to pipes and fittings.
All branch waste and vent pipes from baseness and sinks to stacks, floor gullies, collection boxes and
manholes shall be in modified UPVC with seal ring joints suitable to receive high temperature water
discharge.
Fittings and coupling for use with UPVC pipes shall be jointed with solvent cement in accordance with
manufacturer recommendations.
Fittings and coupling for use with UPVC pipes on movement joints shall be jointed with an incorporate
synthetic rubber rings in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
Slip on cover plates shall be provided as a finish to pipe work, up to and including 50mm diameter,
emerging from a wall in occupied areas other than service voids. Samples shall be first submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
On pipe work up to and including 50mm diameter union type fittings shall be provided to make up to
outlets of basin, bath and sink wastes.
Access plates shall be fitted at the roof of each vertical stack at changes, to enable the complete disposal
system to be internally cleaned and rodded.
Soil, waste and vent stacks above their highest branches shall be continued upwords, at their full
diameter, above roof level.
5
Safety
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and uphold safety measures adequate for the particular hazards
of drainage works for all his employees. All safety measures taken by the Contractor should be
approved by the Engineer.
Such approval will not affect the full responsibility of the contractor toward the safety of all his
employees, the supervision staff and any other third party existing on site.
The Contractor shall ensure that all timbering, shuttering , staging, strutting , ladders etc. , used in
drain trenches and pits are adequate for the duty involved .
6
Manholes
Manhole dimensions shall be as shown on Drawings.
Manholes shall be constructed from approved precast concrete rings.
100
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
Manholes, chambers, Septic tanks, disintegration and settling tanks and percolating pits shall be
constructed in the positions and to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The method of execution of all work in connection with these shall be as elsewhere described
in the appropriate trades.
Manhole base slabs shall be according to drawings, and at least 150mm thick grade (A) concrete or as
directed and approved by the Engineer.
Manhole cover slabs shall be a minimum of 150mm thick suitably reinforced grade (A) concrete, where
also approved precast covers can be used.
Precast concrete manholes shall comply with BS 556 .
Manhole sections shall be jointed using a cement and sand mortar, 1: 2, and proprietary bituminous or
resin fillers. Where flexible fillers are used their shape, thickness and location in the joint shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The remainder of the joint shall be filled with a
cement and sand mortar 1: 2, to prevent settlement of the sections with possible point contact and
subsequent spalling of the concrete joint.
Precast concrete manholes used below water table level shall be surrounded with a minimum thickness
of 150mm concrete which shall be not less than a 1:2:4 mix.
Sulphate resisting cements shall be used in concrete and mortar, or accepted epoxy paint should be
made for all concrete and mortars facing the wastewater.
Cast iron manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497 except that the bituminous based
protective coating shall not flow or chip when exposed to temperatures in the range of 0OC to 76.7OC .
Manholes exceeding 1.00 meter deep internally shall have a minimum internal diameter of 80 cm.
Where required the channels in manhole bottoms shall be constructed of glazed earthenware channels
jointed in a similar manner to the pipes. Alternatively when so described the channels shall be formed
in fine concrete finished smooth. The channels shall be semi circular in section and the concrete shall
then be carried up vertically for a distance of 80mm at each side and sloped back at a minimum fall of 1
: 10 .
The benching shall be of fine concrete and shall be rendered over in cement and sand (1: 3) mix. Pipes
entering manholes shall not project beyond the face of the internal rendering. The invert of the pipes
and the channels shall be continuous. All benching surfaces should be painted by approved epoxy
paint.
Covers and frames shall comply with the following:
GRADE A: Heavy duty covers suitable for heavy fast moving wheeled traffic ( 25 tons ) .
GRADE B: Medium duty covers suitable where heavy commercial vehicles would be excepted ( 8 tons)
GRADE C: Light duty covers suitable for pedestrian traffic only (5 tons).
Manhole covers situated inside buildings or on verandahs shall be as follows:
Either (a) Double seal type cover and frame
or
(b) Frame with ground - fit air tight cover manufactured for use inside buildings .
Manhole frames shall be bedded and pointed with cement and sand mortar and the rebates sealed with
manhole grease.
Step irons shall be located and comply with BS CP 301 , Clause 3.12.5.1.
Channels and benching shall comply with BS CP 301 .
Where cast iron inspection chambers are shown on the Drawings these are to comply with BS 1130
using caulked joints and gasket sealed covers set in concrete block manholes benched to top of cover
level. The manhole cover required can be single seal in lieu of double seal .
101
Technical Specifications
7
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
Septic Tanks
Septic tanks shall be sized and constructed as shown on the Engineer's Drawings and shall be
constructed as stated in BS CP 302 unless otherwise stated.
Septic tanks shall be constructed with concrete floors and walls of block work or concrete.
External Walls of septic tanks shall be at least 300mm thick.
Where indicted on the drawings the Contractor shall provide an intercepting trap with cleaning arm
and lever-locking stopper to be set in cement mortar in the intercepting manhole adjacent to the septic
tank or inside the site boundary in the case of main drainage. The normal drop from inlet to outlet of
trap shall be preserved. A fresh air inlet shall be taken to the intercepting manhole with 100mm cast iron
drainpipes with an easy bend to a point just below ground level.
Septic tanks shall meet the requirements of the local Authority.
8
Soak ways
Soakaways shall be constructed in one of the following ways:
(a)
(b)
Precast concrete rings to BS 556 .
200mm (min) cast in situ concrete.
Cover and base slabs shall be at least 150mm thick Grade (A) reinforced concrete, or precast covers
according to Specification and as directed and approved by the Engineer.
Removable covers shall be as described for manhole covers.
Soak ways shall be of the sizes and in the positions shown on the Drawings or as directed on site by the
Engineer.
Soak ways constructed in cast in site concrete shall have walls of at least 200mm thicknesses.
Soak ways shall meet the requirements of the Local Authority.
9
Connections To Existing Manholes And Drains
When work is being undertaken on existing drains and manholes including the construction of new
manholes, building in pipes, cutting through manhole walls, cutting out and reforming benching,
completing pipe entries and making good the Contractor shall keep existing drains open to flow and
reasonably free form debris at all times during the progress of works .
On completion all work shall be in a watertight condition.
10
Cleaning, Protection and Testing Of Drains
The Contractor shall remove all silt and foreign matter from drains and manholes and leave the whole
in a clean and workable condition.
In the event of delay between the laying of a drain and the placing of the first 300mm of back filling
over the top of the pipe, precautions shall be taken to protect the pipes from damage arising from
differential exposure to sun or wind.
Lengths of drain, manholes and inspection chambers shall be capable of withstanding the test. The test
shall be applied after laying and before back filling or placing concrete surround and bedding concrete.
102
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
Leakage of the section under test, including sweating, which causes a drop in the test water level shall
be noted and the defective part of the work shall be rectified on the Contractor's own expenses.
The test shall be repeated after back filling and any faults in the bedding or support of the pipe,
inadequacies in design or accidental damage during, or subsequent to, back filling, shall be noted and
the defective part of the work shall be rectified on the Contractor's own expenses.
Whenever possible testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole.
Testing shall not be started until at least 48 hours after completion of the last joint.
Tests before back filling:
(1The section shall be filled with water and after about one hour test readings shall be taken.
(2) A test pressure of 1. 2m head of water shall be applied at the high end of the section (but not
Than 2.4m at the low end) . Steeply graded mains shall be tested in sections.
(3) The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes shall be measured by adding water from a measuring
Vessel at regular intervals of 10 minutes and noting the quantity required maintaining the original
Water level in the standpipe.
(4)The average quantity of water added shall not exceed 0.06 liters per hour per 100 linear meters per
millimeter of nominal bore of the drain.
(5) For sections of drain where the highest point is more than 1.2m below the water table the
Following infiltration test shall be undertaken.
(A) Inlets to the system shall be closed. Visual inspection at manholes or inspection chambers will
Reveal any flow the cause of which shall be investigated and the faults rectified.
(B) Tests for line, level and freedom from obstruction shall be applied by means of a mirror at one end
Of the drain and a lamp at the other.
(C) Final test:
The water test shall be repeated in accordance with the requirements of the Local Authority or the
Engineer.
103
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
SECTION : 25
ASPHALT WORKS
1
GENERAL
The Contractor shall construct the area to be paved in accordance with the applicable specifications
stipulated herein after, in conformity with the alignment, dimensions, and typical sections shown on the
Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
2
TYPE OF WORK
For the purpose of these specifications, the following type of asphalt works is designated:
- Preparing and leveling of existing base - coarse.
- Compacting of existing base - coarse.
- Prime coat.
- Single asphalt surface layer.
3
BASE - COARSE
General
The Contractor shall provide only an aggregate material for the base-coarse consisting of hard, durable,
crushed limestone or crushed wadi gravel, provided that the crushed aggregates retained on sieve No. 4
shall have 80% by weight of at least two fractured faces, which have to be crushed by approved
crushing plant and shall be free from any organic matter or any other deleterious substances and also
free from clay balls.
Base coarse aggregate shall conform to the following gradation:
Sieve Size
11/2 inch (38.10 mm)
1
inch (25.40 mm)
3/4 inch (19.10 mm)
1/2 inch (12.70 mm)
3/8 inch (09.52 mm)
No.4
(04.76 mm)
No.10
(02.00 mm)
No.40
(00.42 mm)
No.200 (00.075 mm)
Percent Passing
100
75-100
60-90
45-80
40-70
35-65
20-40
8-20
5-10
The fraction passing No. 200 sieve shall not be greater than 70% of the fraction passing No. 40 sieve.
Base - coarse aggregates shall confirm to the requirements of the following standard tests: Los Angeles Abrasion,
(AASHTO -T- 96) 35 max.
Liquid Limit
(AASHTO -T- 89) 25 max.
Plasticity Index
(AASHTO -T- 90) 2 min. 6 max.
Flaky & Elongated Particles
(B.S.812) 15% max. Each .
The base-coarse shall be compacted to not less than 100% of the density obtained at optimum moisture
content as determined by ASTM-DT 99C.
The following test shall also be performed:
a) Gradation tests shall be performed on samples of base-coarse taken after mixing with water and
spreading before compaction and shall have a maximum % passing sieve No. 200 of 10%.
b) Gradation tests shall be performed on samples of base - coarse taken after compaction and the
maximum material passing sieve No. 200 shall not exceed 10%.
104
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
The thickness of the compacted layer shall be measured and recorded when performing filed density
tests and sieve tests on samples taken from compacted layers in place.
Construction
Aggregate for base-coarse shall be delivered to the area to be paved as a uniform mixture and shall
spread in layers.
Segregation shall be avoided and the base-coarse shall be free from pockets of coarse or fine materials.
The base-coarse shall be spread by a grader or any other mechanical method, approved by the Engineer,
watered, shaped and compacted to the required grade and cross section.
The finished surface of the base-coarse shall not vary at any point by more than 1 cm below the grade
established by the Engineer, and the total thickness of the base-coarse shall not vary by more +0.50 cm .
In addition to level checking, longitudinally the surface shall be checked with a straight edge (4m long),
where irregularities in this direction shall not vary by more than 1cm.
A minimum of (4) levels of the base at the total longitudinal side shall be taken and if (2) or more of
these levels exceed the tolerance given the Contractor shall re-grade the entire length of the area. If one
of these levels exceeds the tolerance then the Contractor shall make good this point.
The aggregate base shall be compacted to not less than 100% of the maximum density determined in
accordance with the latest modified AASHTO T-191, T-205 or T-205 and T-239.
The base-coarse shall be maintained in a condition satisfactory to receive surfacing material. Aggregate
base-coarse, which does not conform to the above requirements, shall be reshaped or reworked,
watered and thoroughly re-compacted to conform to the specified requirements at the Contractors own
expense.
Method of Measurement
Base-coarse shall be measured per square meter in place, acceptably laid and compacted according to
the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
Method of Payment
Payment shall be made at the Contract unit rate for "compacted aggregate base-coarse" per square meter
. This price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including
watering, compacting, shaping and all labor, equipment, tools, supplies, tests, and incidentals necessary
to complete the work.
4
PRIMECOAT
General
Liquid asphalt for prime coat shall be medium curing grade MC70, in conformance with AASHTO
standard
or equivalent according to the manufacturer instructions and lab tests results.
The surface to be treated shall be smooth, compact and tight. It shall
section where dust shall be removed by booming.
be true to grade, and cross-
Equipment
The equipment used by the Contractor shall include a power broom or a power blower or both; a self propelled, pneumatic roller, or steel-wheeled tandem (5 tons) or both; mechanical or self-propelled
aggregate spreading equipment that can be adjusted to spread accurately the specified amounts per
square meter, a pressure distributor and equipment for heating the asphalt material. Pneumatic - tired
rollers shall have a total compacting width of not less than 120 cm and shall have minimum contact
pressures of 2.8 kg/cm2 or as specified by the Engineer. Other equipment is to be used in addition to, or
in lieu of the specified equipment when approved by the Engineer.
105
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
The pressure distributor shall be designed and operated to distribute the asphalt material in a uniform
spay with atomization, in the amount and between the limits of temperature specified. It shall be
equipped with a tachometer having a dial registering feet or meters of travel per minute. The dial shall
be visible to the truck driver so he can maintain the constant speed required for application at the
specified rate. The pump shall be equipped with a bitumetre having a dial registering liters, or gallons
per minute passing through the nozzles. The dial shall be readily visible to the operator.
Means for indicating accurately the temperature of the asphalt material at all times shall be provided.
The thermometer reservoir shall not be in contact with a heating tube.
The spray bar shall be adjustable to a reasonable width. A hose and spray nozzle attachment shall be
provided for applying asphalt material to paths and areas inaccessible to the spray bar.
The distributor shall be provided with heating attachments and the asphalt material shall be circulated
during the entire heating process.
Application of Prime coat
The Engineer will select the rate of application for the asphalt primer to be used. The Contractor shall
keep a record of the application rates selected. Tentatively an application rate of 1.0-1.5 Kg/m2 of MC 70
shall be used.
Application of the asphalt prime shall be made uniformly at this rate with the pressure distributor. The
asphalt prime shall be applied at the temperature specified by the Engineer. When heating is required,
precautions shall be taken to avoid fire hazard.
Application shall be made when the surface is dry or slightly damp and, unless otherwise permitted by
the Engineer, when the air temperature in the shade is not less than 10C. After application of the asphalt
prime, at least forty - eight (48) hours shall elapse before further applications are made.
Before beginning application, building paper shall be spread over the surface, from the joint back, for a
sufficient distance for the spray bar to begin spraying and be operating at full force when the surface to
be treated is reached. After the asphalt is applied the building paper shall be removed and destroyed.
The spray bar shall be shut off instantaneously at each construction joint to assure a straight line and the
full application of asphalt prime up to the joint. If necessary to prevent dripping, a drip pan shall be
inserted under the nozzle when application is stopped. A hand spray shall be used to apply primer
material necessary to touch up all spots unavoidably missed by the distributor.
Following the application, the primed surface shall be allowed to dry for a period of not less than 48
hours without being disturbed or for such an additional period of time as may be necessary to permit
the drying out of the prime until it will not be picked up.
The surface shall then be maintained by the Contractor until the surfacing has been placed and no traffic
(other than that necessary for the Contractor) shall be allowed on the primed surface before placing of
the surface treatment.
Method of Measurement
The quantities to be paid for shall be the total quantity in sq.m. of the primed surface area, actually
applied, and shall be based on the approved records of the application rates as selected by the Engineer
.
Method of Payment
Payment shall be based on the Contract unit rate for "Prime Coat" per sq.m.
5
HOT MIX ASPHALT SURFACING
Scope
Furnishing and mixing non-plastic aggregate crushed limestone and asphalt binder at a central mixing
plant, spreading and single layer surface coarse.
106
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
Construction shall be in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with lines, grades and
thickness as shown on drawings or established by the Engineer.
Composition of Mixes of Mixes
The paving mix shall be Composed of specified aggregates and asphalt cement within the limits of the
following table :
Standard Sieve Size
1 inch (25.40 mm) 100
3/4 inch (19.10 mm)
3/8 inch (90.52 mm)
No.4 (04.76 mm)
No.8 (02.00 mm)
No.50 (00.42 mm) 5-19
No.200 (00.075 mm)
Percent Passing Surface Course
90-100
56-80
35-65
23-49
2-8
Asphalt to be added by weight of total weight according to design .
The aggregate shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 35% in 500 revolutions as determined
by AASHTO T96. The sand equivalent shall be 50 minimums according to AASHTO T-176. Aggregate
shall in all respects comply with the relevant standards. Aggregate limestone to be used be fresh
mechanically crushed coarse aggregate. Materials on sieve No.4 shall have 90% by weight of at least two
fractured faces.
Filler Material
When the combined grading of the coarse and fine aggregate is deficient in material passing No. 200
sieve, a filler conforming to the requirements specified hereafter shall be added .
Mineral filler shall comply in all respects with AASHTO Standard Specification M17.
The amount of commercial filler to be added shall be only that amount necessary to make the combined
grading of the material comply with the grading requirements for the complete mixture.
In no case shall the amount of commercial filler added exceed three percent (3%), sample obtained form
hot bins , by weight of the combined aggregate , The material passing No. 200 sieve may consist of fine
particles of the aggregates or mineral filler, or both .It shall free from organic matter and clay particles .
Job Mix Formula
The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval a job mix formula within the limits of these
specifications.
The maximum permissible variation from the job mix formula within the specification limits, shall be as
follows:
Standard Sieve Size
3/8 inch and larger
No. 4 to No. 80
No. 200
Asphalt
Permissible Variation Percent by Weight of Total Mix
+ 5.00
+ 4.00
+ 1.00
+ 0.30
Mix Test Criteria
Test requirements and criteria for the paving mixes prepared these specifications shall be as follows:
Surfacing
No. of compactive blows
each end specimen
75
107
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
Minimum Stability (Kg)
900
Flow (1/100")
2-4
Percent air voids
3-5
V.M.A. using bulk S/Gr.
(Tolerance - 1%)
min.14%
V.F.B.
60-75 %
Loss of stability
(soaking 24 hours compared
with 30 min. at 60OC for
all specimens in water bath).
max.25
Plasticity Index for material
passing sieve No.40(from hot bins)
Stripping Test(ASTM D1664)
non plastic
uncoated
aggregate
FIRST OPTION
Laboratory test specimens of paving mixes, combined in the proportions of the job mix formula, shall be
prepared and tested in accordance with the procedures of the Marshall method of mix design as
detailed in the 'Asphalt Institute Manual - MS2' and ASTM method of Test D 1559 .
General Equipment Requirements
All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of this section and shall be
maintained in its best mechanical condition . Equipment shall be serviced and lubricated away form the
paving site; units drip fuel, oil, or grease shall be removed from the site until such leakage is corrected.
Elements for All Plants
Uniformity
The plants shall be designed, co-coordinated and operated to produce a uniform mix within the
specified job mix tolerances.
Job Mix Formula
The Engineer will make frequent gradation analyses of the hot aggregates and of the completed mix to
be certain that the materials being used and produced are within the tolerances of the job mix formula
and the specifications of the mix number being used.
If the mix is found to be outside the job mix formula tolerances or outside of the specification limits,
correction shall be made in quantities measured from the hot bins and adjustments made the cold bin
feeders and the Contractor shall submit a new mix design.
Sampling and Testing
Stockpiles and bins will be sampled for gradation analyses and examined for dust coating and for other
purposes, in compliance with stated requirements. Gradation analyses of each hot bin will be performed
and a combined analysis conducted at least twice a day once in the forenoon, and once in the afternoon.
If materials do not run uniform, more frequent tests will be made.
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide representative samples by taking
aggregate from each bin through the mixing chamber (without asphalt) into a truck or other receptacle
At least one sample shall be taken from each truck of the hot mix being delivered to the site. Samples
will be used to determine compliance with general and special requirements set forth in these
specifications.
108
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
Construction Method
Weather Limitations
When the moisture of the aggregate in the stockpile or from the dryer in the plant interferes with the
quality of mix production, or with normal plant operations, or when pools of water are observed on the
base, then mixing and placing of hot-mix asphalt will not be permitted.
The temperature of the surface on which the hot-mix asphalt is placed shall not be less than 5oC When
the surface temperature on which the material is to be placed falls below 10oC, precautions shall be
taken to compact the mix before it cools too much, to obtain the required density.
All truckloads shall be delivered continuously and immediately spread and compacted. In cold weather
and for shall be delivered at a temperature within 8oC of that temperature specified by the Engineers
Representative.
Preparation of Area
The area to be paved shall be true to line and grade, and have a dry and properly prepared surface prior
to the start of paving operations. It shall be free from all loose screenings, and other loose or foreign
material.
The surface shall be primed as specified. The surface of structures in actual contact with asphalt mixes
shall be painted with a thin, complete coating of asphalt material to provide a closely bonded water tight joint .
Proportioning and Mixing
To aid in determining the proper temperature of the completed batch, current viscosity data shall be
available at the plant at all times.
With information relative to the viscosity of the particular asphalt being used, the temperature of the
completed mix at the plant and at the paver shall be designated by the Engineer's Representative after
discussing with the Contractor the hauling and placing conditions.
The asphalt shall be heated so that it can be distributed uniformly throughout the batch. For mixing
applications, the specified temperature will generally be such that the asphalt viscosity is within the
range of 150-300 centistokes (75-150 seconds, Saybold Fuyol). The material shall be sufficiently fluid to
produce a complete coating on every particle of aggregate within the specified mixing time . The
temperature of the aggregates and asphalt immediately prior to mixing shall be approximately that of
the completed batch.
When the mix is produced in a batch type plant the aggregate shall be weighed accurately in the
designated proportions to provide the specified batch weight. The temperature of the aggregate at the
time of introduction into the mixer shall be as directed by the Engineer's Representative with a tolerance
of + 8OC.
In no case , however , shall temperature of the mixture exceed 165OC .
Transportation of Mix
The mix shall be transported to the job site in vehicles and painted, or sprayed, with a limewater, soap
or detergent solution, at least once a day or as often as required.
After this operation the truck bed shall elevated and thoroughly drained; no excess solution shall be
permitted. The dispatching of the vehicles shall be so scheduled that all material.
109
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
Delivery of material to the paver shall be at a uniform rate and in an amount well within the capacity of
the paving and compacting equipment.
Spreading and Finishing
Spreading and finishing shall be conducted in the following manner:
Mechanical Paver
The binder and surface courses shall be spread and struck-off with a mechanical paving machine
connected with an automatic sensor. The paving machine connected with an automatic sensor. The
paving machine shall be operated so that material dose not accumulate and remain along the sides of
the receiving hopper.
Equipment, which leaves tracks or indented areas which cannot be corrected in normal operation, or
which produces flushing or other permanent blemishes or fails to produce a satisfactory surface shall
not be used.
Lines for the paver to follow will be established by the Engineer's Representative parallel to the
centreline of the proposed roadway. The paver shall be positioned and operated to follow closely the
established lines.
In backing trucks against the paver , care shall be taken not to jar it out of its proper alignment .
As soon as the first load of material has been spread, the texture of the unrolled surface shall be checked
to determine its uniformity.
Segregation of materials shall not be permitted If suspended until the cause is determined and
corrected.
Transverse joints in succeeding courses shall be offset at least 60 cm.
Any irregularities in alignment left by the paver shall be corrected by trimming directly behind the
machine. Immediately after trimming, the edges of the course shall be thoroughly compacted by
tamping. Distortion of the pavement during this operation shall be avoided.
Edges against which additional pavement is to be placed shall be straight and immediately vertical. A
lute or covered rake shall be used immediately behind the paver when required to obtain a true line and
vertical edge. Any irregularities in the surface of the pavement course shall be corrected directly behind
the paver . Excess material forming high spots shall be removed by a shovel or lute. Indented areas shall
be filled with hot mix and smoothed with the back of a shovel being pulled over the surface.
Fanning of material over such areas shall not be permitted.
Hand Spreading
In small areas where the use of mechanical finishing equipment is not practical, the mix may be spread
and finished by hand, if so authorized by the Engineer's Representative. Wood or steel form, approved
by the Engineer's Representative, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross-section, may be
used. In such instances, measuring blocks and intermediate strips shall be used to aid in obtaining the
required cross-section. Placing by hand shall be performed carefully; the material shall be distributed
uniformly to avoid segregation of the coarse and fine aggregate
Broadcasting of material shall not be permitted. During the spreading operation, all materials shall be
thoroughly loosened and uniformly distributed by lutes or covered rakes. Material that has formed into
lumps and dose not break down readily shall be rejected.
Following placing and before rolling, the surface shall be checked with templates and straight edges and
all irregularities shall be corrected.
Heating equipment used for keeping hand tools free from asphalt shall be provided. Caution shall be
exercised to prevent high heating temperatures, which may burn the material. The temperature of the
110
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
tools when used shall not be greater than the temperature of the mix being placed. Heat only shall be
employed to clean hand tools; petroleum oils or solvents shall not be permitted.
Compaction General
General
Except for small jobs, such as driveways, at least two rollers shall be required at all times. As many
additional rollers shall be used as necessary to provide specified pavement density.
During rolling, the roller wheels shall be kept moist with only sufficient water to avoid picking up the
material.
After the edges have been compacted rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and gradually
progressing toward the centre of the pavement.
The rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed with the drive roll or wheel nearest the paver . The
speed shall not exceed 5 kph for steel-wheeled rollers or 8 kph for pneumatic - tired rollers.
The line of rolling shall not be changed suddenly. If rolling causes displacement of the material, the
affected areas shall be loosened at once with lutes or shovels and restored to the original grade of the
loose material before being re-rolled.
Heavy equipment or rollers should not be permitted to stand on the finished surface before it has been
compacted and has thoroughly cooled.
Rolling shall be in the following order: a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Transverse joints.
Outside edge
Initial or breakdown rolling, beginning on the low-side and progressing toward the high side
Second rolling, same procedure as (c)
Finish rolling.
The compaction temperature (laboratory) shall be (viscosity) of bitumen is 280+30 centistokes, as
follows :
148+3oC for 60/70 penetrations.
Transverse Joints
Transverse joints shall be held to a minimum and thoroughly compacted to provide a smooth riding
surface.
Joints shall be straight edges and string - lined to assure smoothness and true alignment. If a joint is
formed with a bulkhead, such as a board, to provide a straight line and vertical face, it shall be checked
with straight edges before fresh material is placed against it to complete the joint. If a bulkhead is not
used to form the joint and the roller is permitted to roll over the end of the new material, the line shall
be located back of the rounded edge a sufficient distance to provide a true surface and cross-section. If
the joint has been distorted by traffic or by other causes, it shall be trimmed to line.
In either case, the joint face shall face shall be painted with a thin coating of asphalt before fresh material
is placed against it.
To obtain through compaction of these joints, material placed against the joint shall be tightly crowded
against the vertical face of the joint.
111
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
To accomplish this, the paving machine shall be positioned so that the material shall overlap the edge of
the joint by 3 to 5 cm. The depth of the overlapped material shall be kept uniform.
The coarse aggregate in the overlapped material that was dislodged through raking or luting shall be
removed form the pavement surface and discarded.
A tandem roller shall be placed on the previously compacted material transversely so that no more 15
cm of the rear-rolling wheel rides on the edge of the joint.
The roller shall be operated to pinch and press the mix place at the transverse joint. The roller shall
continue to roll along this line, shifting its position gradually across the joint, in 15 to 20 cm P17
increments, until the joint has been rolled with the entire width of the roller wheel. Rolling joint is
obtained
Edges
Care shall be exercised in consolidating the coarse along the entire length of the edges. Before it is
compacted, the material along the unsupported edges shall be slightly elevated with a tamping tool or
lute.
This will permit the full weight of the roller wheel to bear on the material to the extreme edges of the
mat. In rolling pavement edges, roller wheels shall extend 5 cm to 10 cm beyond the pavement edge.
Breakdown Rolling
Breakdown rolling shall commence at a temperature of not less than 120OC and immediately follow the
rolling of the longitudinal joint and edge. Rollers shall be operated as close to the pavement as necessary
to obtain adequate density without undue displacement. The breakdown roller shall be operated with
the drive roll or wheel nearest the finishing machine. Exceptions may be made by the Engineer's
Representative when working on steep slopes.
When both three-wheeled rollers and tandem rollers are used, the three-wheeled rollers shall work
directly behind the paver following by the tandem rollers. Only experienced roller operators shall be
used for used this work.
Second Rolling
Pneumatic-tired rollers shall be used for the second rolling. The second rolling shall follow the
breakdown rolling, as closely as possible and while the paving mix is still of at a temperature that will
result in maximum density from this operation.
Pneumatic-tired rollers shall be continuous (at least three complete coverage) after the initial rolling
until all of the mix placed rollers on the hot paving mix which causes undue displacement will not be
permitted.
Finish Rolling
The finish rolling shall be accomplished with two-axle tandems or three-axle tandems while the
material is still warm enough for the removal of the rollers marks. If necessary to obtain the required
surface finish, the Engineer's Representative shall specify the use of pneumatic - tired rollers. All rolling
operations shall be conducted in close sequence.
In places inaccessible for the operation of standard rollers as specified, compaction shall be performed
by trench rollers or others. The trench roller shall be operated at the direction of the Engineer's
Representative until the course is thoroughly compacted. Hand tamping, manual or mechanical, may be
used in such areas if it proved to the Engineer's Representative that such operations will give the
desired density.
Shoulder
The shoulder material shall not be placed against the edges of the pavement until the rolling of the
surface course has been completed.
112
Technical Specifications
Sports Center -Ramallah
FIRST OPTION
Adequate precaution shall be taken to prevent distortion of the pavement edge from specified line and
grade.
When the rolling of the surface course has been completed and the edges have been thoroughly
compacted, shoulder material shall be immediately placed against the edges and rolled .
Density and Surface Requirements
The completed pavement shall have a relative compaction equal to or greater than 98% (from daily
Marshall) of a laboratory specimen prepared as specified in Section A, "Test Methods and Definitions”,
and made form plant mix conforming to the result of density from samples taken on site .
The final surface shall be of uniform texture and shall conform to line and grade shown on the plans.
Before final acceptance of the project, or during the progress of the work, the thickness of all coarses will
be determined by the Engineer's Representative.
All unsatisfactory work shall be repaired, replaced or corrected.
Both density and thickness shall be carefully controlled during construction and shall be in full
compliance with the plans and specifications. During compaction, preliminary tests as an aid for
controlling the thickness, shall be made by inserting a flat blade , correctly graduated, through the
material to the top of the previously placed base , or by other means approved by the Engineer's
Representative
In checking compacted depth, the cutting of the test holes, refilling with acceptable materials, and
proper compaction shall be done by the Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer's
Representative.
For the purpose of testing the surface on all courses, a 3- meter long aluminum straight edge at the
longitudinal direction shall be used.
Any irregularities which vary more than 0.5 cm in 3 meters shall be corrected. Irregularities, which vary,
may develop before the completion of rolling shall be remedied as may be required.
Should any irregularities or defects remain after the final compaction, the surface course shall be
removed promptly and sufficient new material laid to form a true and even surface. All minor surface
projections, joints, and minor honeycombed surfaces shall be ironed smooth to grade as may directed by
the Engineer's Representative.
Method of Measurement
Asphalt concrete shall be measured by square meters of the actual area paved and accepted in place
including the bitumen according to the dimensions shown on the Drawings.
Edge slopes shall be done but will not be measured for payment.
Basis of Payment
Payment shall be based on the Contract unit rate for "Asphalt mix surface thickness 0.05m" per square
meter, complete in place including bituminous material. No payment shall be made for extra width or
for extra thickness.
The required compacted thickness is the minimum acceptable and tolerance shall be on the plus side.
Payment may also be based on the unit linear meter of road excavation according to B.O.Q. where
thickness of asphalt mix shall remain as 0.05m , and the Contractor shall follow all above mentioned
specifications .
113
TECHNICAL
INFORMATION 1.3.1
Multi-function panel (MFP)
PC 2625-5 for glazing without transoms
10 years material guarantee*
PC
MFP
made of polycarbonate
UV co-extrusion on the outside
Product description
Technical data
PC 2625-5
Unit
The new multi-function panel (MFP) is an
on-going development of the well-known hollow
Structural width
chamber panes, but it has a moulded on coupling
Thickness
and does not need a transom system.
Made of polycarbonate, the MFP offers
mm
600
55/25
mm
Weight
3,40
approx. kg/qm
U-value
1,55
W/qm K
high and low temperatures.
E-module
2200
N/qmm
These properties are safeguarded by the
Expansion coefficient
0,065
mm/m °C
co-extruded UV protection layer on both sides.
Temperature resistance short
excellent weatherproof properties at
Also available with heat-reflecting
HEATBLOC surface.
constant
Transmission
In combination clear or opal anti-blind inside.
UV transmittance
panels can be clipped on safely and easily.
Fire behaviour
°C
115
°C
clear
62
approx. %
opal anti-blind
44
approx. %
HEATBLOC
a.A
Radius minimum
Thanks to the moulded-on coupling, the
130
6000
mm
0
B2
%
DIN 4102
The proven accessories and frame system
allows for versatile, safe and economical
installation. An additional transom profile
can drastically increase the span width.
Permitted spans*
Post-and-beam spacing in cm
with reinforcement
vertical
Normal areas
Edge
Application areas
0-8m
220
110
Thanks to the good U-value from the 5-shell design
8 - 20 m
120
60
Profile 2180
together with the coupling on the outside,
this panel is simply ideal for economic
Coupling always outside!
roof and facade glazing for
60 °
200
100
tennis and sports halls
45 - 60 °
160
80
cantilevered skylights without transoms (curved)
30 - 45 °
150
60
gable roof glazing
15 - 30 °
140
60
flat sloping roofs
5 - 15 °
130
60
warehouse units
Skylight strip, curved
agricultural and sales greenhouses
Normal range span up to 400 cm
600
Other permitted spans: please enquire
Guarantee according to our guarantee declaration,
*Values apply for closed buildings in normal area and edge
see also TECHNICAL INFORMATION PC
Subject to technical alterations
These details refer to our current state of know-how and do not claim to be complete.
Subject to technical alterations. Please check for yourself whether our products are suitable for your purpose.
1.3.1.07.05
Technical Specifications
FIRST OPTION
Sports center -Ramallah
Ramallah Municipality Project Name:
Ramallah Recreational Complex
Phase 1
Sports Center
Ramallah, Palestine
Volume VI
GENERAL AND PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
B- Electrical Specification
SPORT HALL
Funded by: IBSA
INDIA BRAZIL SOUTH AFRICA
Through: United Nations Development Programme
Programme Assistance to the Palestinian people
Designed by
First Option- Amara
Architects, Engineers & Construction Managements
2009
1
DIVISION 1
ELECTRICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section No.
Title
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
WIRES AND CABLES
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
WIRING DEVICES
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTIONS
SUPPORTING DEVICES
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
EARTHING SYSTEMS
PANEL BOARDS
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
MOTOR STARTERS
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
FIRE ALARM / LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
UPS
HAND DRAYERS
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SECTION 1
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
All general Provisions contained within this, or any other, section of the specification
shall be fully applicable to each and every other section.
B.
All work carried out on the installation shall be carried out in a neat, efficient and
workmanlike manner, to provide for proper operation, maintenance and repair. The work
shall be in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, and shall fulfill their
true intent and meaning. No deviations from these Specifications and/or Drawings shall
be made without written approval of the Engineer.
C.
These Specifications and associated drawings form a composite set of documents,
intended for the selection and installation of equipment having the general and specific
characteristics as detailed.
D.
Unless otherwise specifically stated, the installation shall be left complete, tested and
ready for operation in all respects and fully integrated and co-ordinated with all other
construction.
E.
The Contractor shall submit proof, if requested by the Engineer that the materials,
appliances, equipments or devices that he furnishes and installs under this contract, meet
the requirements of NEC, BS, NFPA as regards fire and casualty hazards.
1.02
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
The work under this division of the specifications shall include furnishing all labor,
materials. equipment and services to furnish and install the complete electrical system,
putting into operation, tested and commissioned as shown on the accompanied drawings
and specified herein. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following principal
systems and equipments:
- Power Distribution Systems
- Lighting Systems
- Low Current Systems
- Power requirements to all mechanical and special systems
1.03
A.
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
The Medium Voltage electrical supply from Electrical CO shall be:
3 phase, 11or 33 KV,Delta , 50 Hertz.
B.
The low Voltage electrical system shall be 3 phase, 4 wires, 400 volts, 50 Hertz earthed
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SEC.1
-1
neutral system.
1.04
SUPPLIER OF LOW CURRENT & SPECIAL SYSTEMS
A.
The contractor shall assign a specialist supplier/designer for all low current and special
systems.
B.
The suppliers of these systems shall check the design and submit their shop drawings and
materials based on the requirements of the construction documents and the related
international standards.
C.
The shop drawings and as-built drawings shall be stamped by the suppliers.
D.
The suppliers shall support their submittals with satisfactory calculations.
E.
The contractor shall bear the cost of any extra item found necessary to have a properly
functional system.
1.05
A.
CO-ORDINATION
The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the proper co-ordination of all phases
of the Work and timely delivery to the site of all equipment and materials for proper
execution of the Work.
It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to fully co-ordinate the Work with all or any
other disciplines and to ensure proper phasing of the Work to ensure continuity of all
works under this Contract. If it becomes necessary to remake any part of these Works or
that of any other discipline or trade as a result of poor or badly timed co-ordination, then
all costs associated with remaking those Works will be borne by the Contractor.
B.
The contractor shall co-ordinate with all supply Undertakings and Authorities and shall
include for attendance along with all costs involved in re-directing existing services.
C.
The Contractor shall take into consideration all statutory and local requirements issued by
the Electricity Local Authority, Central Government, Broadcasting Authority, Telephone
and Telecommunications Authorities, Civil Defence along with any other requirements to
be considered for the correct and legal operation of the electrical and telecommunication
installation or equipment connected to the installation as part of this Contract.
D.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the coordination with all electrical and
mechanical systems’ suppliers. He shall include in his cost all the electrical requirements
(even if they were not mentioned in the BoQ or drawings) to have a fully functional
system as specified and as recommended by the manufacturer and/or the international
standard.
1.06
A.
CLIMATE CONDITIONS
External to building and in non-air conditioned spaces, all apparatus shall be rated for an
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SEC.1
-2
ambient temperature maximum of 55oC, minimum of -0oC and a maximum humidity of
100% rh.
B.
In air conditioned buildings, all apparatus shall be rated for ambient temperature of 45°C
maximum; minimum of 0° C and a maximum humidity of 85% rh
C.
When equipment is installed in direct sunlight, it shall either be shielded from direct
radiation or suitably rated for additional solar gains.
D.
All apparatus shall be rated for continuous services twenty four hours a day, seven days a
week throughout its normal rated life, except for necessary routine maintenance.
1.07
A.
1.08
A.
1.09
ACCESSIBILITY
All work shall be so installed as to be accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
Deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, but no change shall be
made without written approval from the Engineer. Access door/panels locations shall be
approved by the Engineer before installation work is commenced.
STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
All material and equipment, fixed or unfixed, shall be protected against corrosion,
deterioration and ingress of foreign matter. All equipment shall be kept clear of the floor
or ground by means of wooden bearers or other means, and shall be protected against the
weather.
PREVENTION OF NOISE AND VIBRATION
A.
Provision shall be made to minimize noise and vibration. However, different
manufacturer's equipment will have varying sound and vibration characteristics. The
Contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that equipment installed does not
transmit unnecessary noise or vibration.
B.
All equipment installed in plant rooms and outside areas shall not be audible in the
occupied areas.
C.
Any vibration isolators, isolating bases, flexible connections, silencers, other acoustic
treatment or anti-vibration precautions necessary shall be included in the rates for the
equipment.
D.
The Contractor shall submit proof of the selected noise proofing measures to the Engineer
before commencement of work.
E.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the noise generation by the plant
selected so that structural soundproofing measures can be evaluated. This means either
data on the acoustic capacity level in relation to frequency, or the sound pressure level
measured at 1 meter from the plant at octave median frequencies from 63 Hz to 4000Hz.
Details of the spatial and operational conditions shall also be given.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SEC.1
-3
F.
All costs of noise sound level measurements and any repeat measurements, necessary if
acoustic requirements are not met, shall be allowed for by the Contractor.
1.10
GUARDS
A.
All moving parts of machinery shall be protected by strong guards to adequately protect
all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment. The guards shall be constructed
in such a manner that the movement of drive belts and rotation of shafts may be readily
observed without removal of the guard.
B.
All 'live' parts of electrical equipment shall be protected in such a way to adequately
protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment from injury.
C.
Wherever possible, all protective guards shall be supplied by the equipment manufacturer.
All guards shall be strongly attached to equipment and shall be designed to be easily
removed for access, servicing, adjustment and maintenance.
1.11
SIGNS AND NOTICES
A.
All signs and notices shall be provided for identification, warning, instructions, etc and as
required by the local authorities both in Arabic and English with the Arabic version being
above or to the right of the English version, and as directed by Engineer.
B.
A schedule of all signs and notices with proposed Arabic translations shall be approved
by the Engineer prior to manufacture.
1.12
A.
GOVERNING CONDITIONS
The entire electrical installation shall in all respects comply with the requirements of the
following.
1- International Electro technical Commission (IEC).
2- British Standards (BS).
3- American Standards (NFPA/ANSI/NEMA/NEC)
4- International Organization of Standardization (ISO).
5- European Committee for Electrical Standardization (CENELEC).
6- International Telegraph and Telephone Consultive committee (CCITT).
7- Telecommunications and Electronic Industry Association (TIA/EIA).
8- Requirements stated within this Specification.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SEC.1
-4
1.13
A.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, the following shall be mounting heights of
equipment centre lines above finished floor level;
Panel Board/MCC
Isolating Switch
Equipment Connection Units
Light Switch
Dimmer Switch
Push button station
Wall mounted telephone
Fire alarm manual call point
Fire alarm sounder
Fire alarm panels
Power Socket outlet
Telephone socket
Data Outlet
TV/Radio antenna socket
Remote Control Panel
Wall mounted video I/C unit
Wall mounted speaker
1800mm (Top of panel above FFL)
1300mm
1300mm
1300mm (100mm from door frame)
1300mm
1300mm
1300mm
1500mm
2200mm
1800mm (Top of panel above FFL)
600mm
600mm
600mm
600mm
1800mm
1600mm
1800mm
Where accessories with varying mounting heights (e.g. light switch and socket outlet) are
shown in approximately the same location, their centre lines shall be aligned vertically.
Any discrepancy found between these mounting heights and other disciplines e.g.
architectural drawings, shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer for final decision.
1.14
LABEL AND IDENTIFICATION
A.
Each item of the electrical installation including electrical switchgear, control gear etc.
shall be fitted with a non-corrodible label clearly indicating its function, circuit number
and phase.
B.
Each label shall be made of white plastic not less than 50mm x 12mm high suitably
engraved with black 5mm high letters and fixed by means of two brass set screws, nuts,
and shake proof washers.
C.
Warning labels made of red plastic with white letters at least 12mm high reading
"DANGER 220 VOLTS" as appropriate shall be fixed to the lids, covers or doors of any
equipment which contains terminals or conductors connected to more than one phase of a
low voltage supply. The method of fixing shall be as detailed above.
D.
Prior to final testing the Contractor shall confirm that all labeling is intact over the whole
site and that all cables have been fitted with circuit markers.
E.
All conductors shall have their outer covering colored to suit the phase to which they are
connected.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SEC.1
-5
F.
An instruction notice giving details of first aid treatment for electric shock shall be
positioned in an approved position in each switch room. Manufacturer's or Contractor's
names or trademarks shall not be exhibited anywhere through the installation without the
prior approval and permission of the Engineer with exception that the Contractor's name
and address may be fixed in an approved position on the main intake switchboard.
G.
All labels shall be in English and Arabic.
1.15
VERMIN PROOFING
A.
All items of electrical equipment shall be adequately vermin proofed.
B.
Where cables enter or leave the bottoms of switchboards, or pass through pipe ducts, they
shall be sealed by the use of hard wood plugs treated with vermin repellant and
surrounded by mastic sealant.
C.
All spare pipe ducts shall be similarly sealed by the use of solid hard wood plugs.
D.
Alternative methods of vermin sealing will be accepted, but the written comments of the
Engineer must be obtained prior to installation.
1.16
A.
1.17
A.
1.18
FIRE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The whole of the works shall be carried out with care and so arranged as to minimise the
risk of fire and the extent of damage resulting from any outbreak of fire.
CLEANING DOWN
The Contractor shall allow in his tender for the final cleaning down and painting of all
scratched or damaged electrical apparatus, panel boards, cubicle panels, distribution
boards and transformers.
MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
The Contractor shall submit samples and full relevant manufactures literature for all
material proposed for the project, in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
sections of this specification.
B.
No order shall be placed until the Contractor has obtained full written approval of the
relevant material submittal from the Engineer.
C.
The Contractor shall submit a sample of the exact make, model and finish proposed for
each material required.
D.
Manufacturer's performance data and certified factory drawings giving full information
pertinent to the adequacy of the relevant equipment shall be submitted for approval.
E.
Submittal shall be made in a manner to ensure complete information regarding what is
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SEC.1
-6
being offered and in a manner that facilitates easy filing and ready access to all data.
F.
Where data certified drawings or other required information is not available until after
orders have been placed, the Engineer may give provisional approval until all requested
drawings and information have been supplied to the Engineer and approved by him. It is
the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all necessary information is supplied to the
Engineer in accordance with the progress of work.
G.
Should the Engineer give provision approval due to lack of complete information, and
should the missing information not eventually meet with approval, the Engineer shall not
be held responsible for any delay of additional expense incurred. For equipment where
delivery from the manufacturer is likely to be prolonged, it is essential that the Contractor
provided the material submittal at the earliest possible date, so as to ensure approval and
orders in complete conformity with the progress of the works.
1.19
A.
1.20
SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer detailed construction drawings
before starting work. These drawings shall comply with and complement the Tender
Documents in showing physical layout of all equipment, exact location of all equipment,
lighting, columns, luminaries and cables routings including dimensioned locations of
underground cables, construction and installation details, wiring diagrams, etc. No work
shall be started on site until approval of the Drawings has been given in writing by the
Engineer. The scale of the shop drawings shall be 1:100.
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A.
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer 'As Built' drawings all in accordance with the
requirements for 'Shop Drawings' updated to show the exact manner in which equipment
is installed and shall be completely cross referenced to submittals and instruction
manuals, so that they form an integrated reference to details of equipment, method of
installation and maintenance.
B.
Upon completion of the installation, record drawings shall be submitted on each system
before final acceptance of the work. The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a set of
record drawings including system diagrams for each system.The record drawings masters
shall be on reproducible mylar film, uniformly sized as required for legibility and
reproduction and on high density floppy or compact disks.
1.21
A.
DOCUMENTS
Maintenance Literature: Prior to the final acceptance of the installation the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer manuals for all equipment supplied under the Contract. The
manuals shall be A4 size bound in loose leaf binders or booklets suitably enclosed and
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
Single line diagram of the complete network,
Control, protection and circuit diagrams for all equipment,
Setting up, commissioning and operating instructions,
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SEC.1
-7
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.22
A.
Trouble shooting procedures,
Maintenance instructions including schedules for preventative
maintenance,
Complete recommended spares list including manufacturers name and
catalog number.
Name of manufacturers' local authorized representatives and service agent.
SPECIAL TOOLS
The Contractor shall supply as part of this contract all special tools required for equipment
maintenance.
END OF SECTION 1
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
SEC.1
-8
SECTION 2
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The requirements of this section shall apply to all electrical raceways referred to on the
drawings and elsewhere within this Specification.
B.
The types of electrical raceways required shall comprise the following:1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.03
A.
B.
1.04
A.
1.05
A.
Steel Conduits.
Flexible Conduits.
PVC Conduits.
EMT Conduits.
Cable Trays.
Cable Trunkings (Metal).
Cable Trunkings (PVC).
Cable Ladders.
Underground Ducts
QUALITY STANDARDS
The manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical raceways of
the type and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
The raceways furnished under these specifications shall conform to all applicable
standards of SASO and B.S.
SUBMITTAL
The Contractor shall submit samples and manufacturer's data on all electrical raceway
system materials, together with samples of the proposed materials.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall provide color-coded thread protectors on the exposed threads of
metal conduit, handle raceways carefully to prevent end-damage and avoid scoring the
finishes. Where possible the raceways shall be stored indoors. If necessary to store
outdoors, the raceways shall be elevated well above ground and enclosed with durable
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -1
waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
METAL CONDUITS
A.
All metal conduits shall be heavy gauge welded steel complying with BS 4568, not less
than 20mm diameter and finished with hot dipped galvanising providing heavy protection
(Class 4) both inside and outside. All conduit and fittings shall be free from rust or other
defects.
B.
All conduit fittings shall be malleable iron manufacture complying with BS 4568.
C.
All fittings shall have a hot dipped galvanized finish.
D.
All bushes shall be hexagonal headed, heavy duty, long threaded brass bushes complete
with serrated tempered shakeproof washers. All bends shall be cold set. All tees shall be
made using circular tee conduit boxes.
E.
All saddles shall be of the spacer bar type and of the same finish as that of the conduit
which they are being used to secure.
F.
A tapped earth connection facility shall be provided in every box.
G.
All accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final leveling of
accessory.
2.02
FLEXIBLE CONDUITS
A.
Flexible conduits, not less than 20 mm diameter, shall only to be used for final connection
to items of fixed equipment subject to vibration.
B.
Flexible conduit and adaptors shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 731 Part 1.
C.
Brass adaptors shall be provided for connection at either end of the flexible conduit and
should be of the compression type.
D.
Flexible conduit shall be of the weather proof liquid-tight type having an overall PVC
sheath. No length shorter than 500mm of flexible conduit shall be used unless specified
elsewhere in this specification.
2.03
PVC CONDUITS
A.
All PVC conduits shall be U.P.V.C. Rigid Conduits complying with BS 6099-2-2/614-2-2
I.E.C. heavy gauge in all respects, and may be used where ambient temperatures do not
exceed 75oC.
B.
All conduit fittings shall confirm to BS 6099-2-2/IEC 614-2-2 standards and BS 4607
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -2
Part 5.
C.
No conduit shall be less than 20mm diameter.
D.
Conduit boxes shall be of the B.E.E.S.A. circular pattern with appropriate spout entries
and 50.8mm accessory fixing centres.
All connections and terminations shall be by means of a manufacturer's standard adaptor.
F.
All boxes shall have brass thread inserts for the fixing of accessories or covers.
E.
However care must be taken in the support of totally enclosed lighting fittings. Where
excessive temperatures are likely to occur special insulated boxes shall be used, i.e. of a
pattern specifically designed by the manufacturer to improve weight-loading
characteristics at high temperatures.
G.
All tees shall be made using conduit tee boxes. Tangential entry boxes shall be used
where appropriate. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large U.P.V.C. adaptable
boxes for junctions.
H.
All saddles shall be of the spacer bar type and from the same manufacturer as that of the
conduit which they are being used to secure.
I.
A tapped earth terminal shall be provided in every conduit box.
J.
All wall mounted accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final
levelling of accessories.
K.
In order to facilitates interchangeability and to eliminate problems of differential
manufacturing tolerances, it is essential that all PVC conduit and appropriate accessories
covered by this specification shall be obtained from the same manufacturer.
2.04
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
EMT conduits shall be made of galvanized steel.
B.
EMT conduits shall comply with ANSI/NEMA standards.
C.
EMT fittings and accessories shall be made of galvanized steel.
D.
Compression type connectors shall be used.
2.05
CABLE TRAYS
A.
All cable trays shall be of heavy duty perforated type with return flange.
B.
All cable trays shall be manufactured from hot-dip zinc coated steel to BS 2989 with a
standard heavy duty galvanizing coating of 350g/m2 and Z2 bending grade.
C.
All bends, tees, cross units and angles shall be of the same specification as that of the
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -3
cable tray finish and shall be standard products from the same manufacturer as the cable
tray. Site fabrication shall not be permitted.
D.
Cable trays and accessories shall be of a thickness of not less than:
1.5mm up to 305mm width.
2.0mm above 305mm width.
E.
All fixing brackets, nuts and bolts shall be finished by hot dip galvanizing.
F.
Tinned copper earth continuity straps shall be provided at every joint.
G.
Where cable tray crosses building expansion joints, the tray shall be installed as shown in
the typical drawing details.
H.
Where cable tray carries 13.8kV cable a tray lid shall be installed.
2.06
CABLE TRUNKING (METAL)
A.
Metal cable trunking shall comply with BS 4678 Part 1: Class 3 and shall be
manufactured from galvanized steel sheet to BS 2989.
B.
Only purposed made fittings, connectors, covers and accessories by the same
manufacturer as the trunking shall be used and finished in hot dipped galvanized steel to
BS 2989. Site fabrication shall not be permitted.
C.
Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint.
D.
Covers shall be of the overlapping type and secured to the trunking by either an approved
clip or screws.
E.
In areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, e.g. chlorine, all trunking shall be painted with
chlorinated rubber paint.
F.
Cable trunking shall be used wherever possible to replace multiple conduit runs as shown
on drawing and as approved by Engineer.
2.07
CABLE TRUNKING (PVC)
A.
Heavy Duty U.P.V.C. trunking with clip on lid (all insulated) shall be used wherever
possible to replace multiple conduit runs. Where applicable, trunking shall comply with
the requirements contained in BS 4678 Part 4. Any non-standard trunking accessories
shall be fabricated by the manufacturer, no site fabrication shall be allowed.
B.
In order to facilitate interchangeability and to eliminate problems of differential
manufacturing tolerances, it is essential that all PVC cable trunking and appropriate
accessories covered by this specification shall be obtained from the same manufacturer.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -4
2.08
CABLE LADDERS
A.
All cable ladders shall be heavy (2mm) gauge, manufactured from hot-dip galvanized
sheet steel to BS 2989;G350 coating weight (350g/m2) and Z2 bending grade.
B.
All couplers, bends, tees etc shall be by the same manufacturer as the ladder.
C.
Ladder system supports shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's
structural information to ensure undue stress or bending does not occur.
D.
In areas subject to corrosive atmosphere, eg. chlorine, the ladders shall have a PVC finish.
E.
Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint.
2.09
A.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS
Underground duct banks shall be of individual UPVC rigid conduits complying with BS
6099-2-2/614-2-2 I.E.C. heavy gauge.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
METAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.
Where conduits are to be cast in concrete, they shall be secured using crumpets, clips or
saddles as approved by the Engineer.
B.
All ends of conduits shall be reamed to remove all traces of burrs.
C.
Conduit threads shall be of sufficient length to allow conduits to butt together within
couplers.
D.
Oil and grease shall be removed from all threads.
E.
Conduits shall be supported at intervals of 1.5 m in isolated positions or 1 m in accessible
situations.
F.
Conduit shall not be permitted to be installed closer than 75 mm to pipes of other
services.
G.
All conduit boxes not to be fitted with accessories shall have metal cover plates which
shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used.
H.
'Draw in' boxes shall be provided in conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length. 'Draw in' boxes
shall be at maximum 12 m spacing and readily accessible at all times. Adaptable junction
boxes shall also be accessible at all times for inspection and maintenance.
J.
Inspection elbows, bends or tees shall not be permitted for flush installation.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -5
K.
Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt and debris from entering the conduit system.
L.
Extension rings shall be used where boxes are found not to be flush with the finished
surface.
M.
Conduits and conduit accessories shall be protected from rust and mechanical damage.
Exposed conduit threads and damaged or rusty areas shall be painted, using an oxide
undercoat and aluminum paint, after being cleaned to bare metal.
N.
Conduits installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres shall be painted with
chlorinated rubber paint after the installation is complete.
O.
Under no circumstances shall metal conduit be used as a circuit protective conductor
(CPC). Every final sub-circuit shall incorporate its own separate Cu/PVC CPC.
P.
Spacing or fill factors shall be applied to all conduits in accordance with chapter 522-08
of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
Q.
EMT conduit shall be used above false ceiling installation.
R.
Rigid steel conduits shall be used for exposed installation.
S.
Under no circumstances, any conduit shall be allowed to run in the floor screed of toilets,
bathrooms or any other wet area.
3.02
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.
Flexible conduits shall only be used in short lengths, of less than 1m, in cases where a
final connection is required to be made to a fixed item of equipment which is subject to
vibration.
B.
Flexible conduits shall be 1.25 x L, L being the direct distance between connection unit
and fixed appliance, up to maximum length of 1m.
C.
Purpose made glands shall be used on the ends of all lengths of flexible conduit.
D.
A separate Cu/PVC circuit protective conductor shall be included in all lengths of flexible
conduits.
E.
Conduits shall be installed so as not to incur undue mechanical strain, damage or
excessive temperatures.
3.03
A.
PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION
Where conduit boxes are not to be fitted with accessories, they shall be fitted with cover
plates which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -6
B.
Conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilizing the following appropriate components
as supplied by the conduit manufacturer:
1.
Purposed made adaptors and accessories.
2.
Permanent adhesive - Solvent cement to produce a rigid watertight joint
when used with standard couplers and accessories.
3.
Flexible adhesive - A non-hardening adhesive to be used where expansion
facilities are required in long conduit runs, in conjunction with expansion
coupler.
C.
Conduits up to 25 mm diameter may be bent cold with the use of the appropriate bending
spring obtained from the conduit manufacturer. For larger size conduits, it is necessary to
use heat or appropriate manufacturer's standard ready made bends.
D.
Adequate allowance shall be made for linear expansion and contraction of the conduits
under normal working temperature variations, as follows:
1.
Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight runs of conduit exceeding
6 meters in length.
2.
Conduit shall be free to slide within saddles.
3.
Allowance for expansion in cast in-situ installation is normally only
required to effect structural movement at building expansion joints.
E.
Conduit shall be supported at intervals of 1.5 meters in isolated positions or 1 meter in
accessible situations. Where working temperatures tend to be high, this spacing shall be
reduced accordingly.
F.
Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large PVC adaptable boxes for junctions,
which shall be readily accessible at all times.
G.
Care shall be taken in the support of totally enclosed lighting fittings. Where excessive
temperature are likely to occur special heat resistant boxes shall be used, i.e. of a pattern
specifically designed to improve weight loading characteristics.
H.
Spacing or fill factors shall be applied to all conduit in accordance with chapter 522-08 of
the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
J.
Conduits shall not be installed closer than 75 mm to pipes of other services.
K.
"Draw-in" boxes shall be installed in all conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length at a
maximum 12 m spacing and shall be readily accessible at all times.
L.
Inspection elbows, bend or tees shall not be permitted for flush installation.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -7
M.
Extension rings shall be used where boxes are found to be not flush with the finished
surface. Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt, dust or debris from entering the conduit
system.
N.
PVC conduits shall be used for embedded installation only.
O.
Under no circumstances, any conduit shall be allowed to run in the floor screed of toilets,
bathrooms or any other wet area.
3.04
CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A.
Where practical cable tray shall be run horizontally and flat or vertically and shall be
supported at distances not exceeding 1.5 m to the building structure using mild steel
brackets. These brackets shall be secured to the building structure using expanded bolts
and washers or built into the building structure during construction.
B.
Where cable tray is suspended, 2 No. drop rods shall be used at each suspension point to
an angle iron or channel support to which the cable tray is bolted. The spacing of
suspension points shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's structural
information such that undue stress or deflection does not occur.
C.
Where cable tray is cut, the open ends shall be painted using an oxide undercoat and an
aluminium top coat. Where the finish is PVC a top coat of liquid PVC solution shall be
applied after the completion of the cable tray installation.
D.
Cable trays run parallel with walls shall not be mounted closer than 75mm to the wall.
E.
All cables shall be secured to the cable tray at distances in accordance with table 4A of the
IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition, using suitable clips.
F.
Bare copper cables shall not be run on cable tray.
G.
Earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted across
each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for expansion joints.
3.05
CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION
A.
Cable trunking shall be fixed securely to the building structure at intervals not exceeding
1.5 m.
B.
Where vertical runs of trunking exceed 3 m in length, pin racks shall be fitted by the
Contractor.
C.
Spacing or fill factors shall be applied to all cable trunking in accordance with chapter
522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
D.
For metal trunking installations, earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned
copper earth straps bolted across each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -8
expansion joints.
E.
Metal trunking cut during installation shall have the cut ends painted with an oxide
undercoat and an aluminium top coat.
F.
Where metal trunking is installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, the complete
trunking installation shall be painted with a chlorinated rubber paint after the installation
is complete.
G.
Expansion joints with gaps shall be incorporated in all PVC trunking runs in excess of 6
metres in length. External couplings shall have elongated slots and fixing holes shall be
drilled oversize to give freedom of linear movement. Internal couplings shall be securely
fixed at one end by use of thiscotrophic adhesive leaving the other end free for linear
movement.
H.
Bare copper or aluminium cables shall not be run in metal trunking.
3.06
CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION
A.
Where practical, cable ladders shall be run horizontally and flat or vertically and shall be
supported at distances not exceeding 1.5 m to the building structure using mild steel
brackets. These brackets shall be secured to the building structure using expanded bolts
and washers or built into the building structures during construction.
B.
Where cable ladder is suspended, 2 No. drop rods shall be used at each suspension point
to an angle iron or channel support to which the cable ladder is bolted. The spacing of
suspension points shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's structural
information such that undue stress of defection does not occur.
C.
Where cable ladder is cut, the open ends shall be painted using an oxide undercoat and an
aluminium top coat. Where the finish is PVC, a top coat of liquid PVC solution shall be
applied after the completion of the cable ladder installation.
D.
Cable ladders run parallel with walls shall not be mounted closer than 75 mm to the wall.
E.
All cables shall be secured to the cable ladder with suitable clips at distances in
accordance with chapters 521-03 and 522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition,
a maximum number of 4 cables may be secured by one clip.
F.
Bare copper cables shall not be run on cable ladder.
G.
Earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted across
each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for expansion joints.
3.07
A.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES
Multiple conduit runs or banks shall be supported on preformed non-metallic separators.
Spacing between separators shall be close enough to prevent sagging of conduits and
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -9
breaking of couplings and water tight seals. Separators shall be secured with cords where
necessary and not tie wires.
B.
Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downwards away from building. Trenches shall
be excavated along straight lines so the elevation can be adjusted if necessary to avoid
unseen obstructions.
C.
During construction, partially completed duct lines shall be protected from the entrance of
debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As each section of
duct line is completed a test mandrel not less than 300 mm long with a diameter 6 mm
less than the size of the conduit shall be drawn through each conduit, after which a brush
with stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear or all particles of earth,
sand or gravel; conduit plugs shall then be immediately installed.
END OF SECTION 2
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL RACEWAY
SEC .2 -10
SECTION 3
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The requirements of this section shall apply to all multicore and single core cables,
referred to on the drawings and elsewhere within this Specification.
B.
The types of cables shall have copper conductors and comprise the following:-
1.03
1.
Single core PVC insulated wires and cables.
2.
Flexible multi-core cables.
3.
XLPE/SWA/PVC cables or XLPE/PVC cables.
QUALITY STANDARDS
A.
Cables shall only be purchased from manufactures specializing in the manufacture or the
type of cable mentioned.
B.
Cables shall generally be manufacturer's standard construction and materials. Where this
contradicts any part of this Specification, the contractor shall state so at the time of tender.
C.
Manufacturer's shall provide proof of supply of similar types of cables to known users for
a period not less than 5 years.
D.
All equipment furnished under this specification shall conform to applicable standards of
SASO and BS.
1.04
SUBMITTAL
A.
The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of cable they are offering.
B.
For all cables the Contractor shall submit the following manufacturers’ details:
Dimensions
Weights
Construction
Current rating
Manner of installation
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 1
Maximum conductor operating temperature
Volt drop/amp/metre
Impedance: Separate resistance and reactance values of single and multicore
cables
Resistance of armouring in ohms/1000 metres length of cable
Characteristic curves for short circuit rating
Minimum bending radius
1.05
DELIVERY AND HANDLING OF CABLES
A.
End of cables shall be sealed to prevent ingress of moisture.
B.
Where cables are transported on drums, these shall have adequate circumference for the
cables.
C.
After winding on drums, the cables shall be protected by being completely enclosed.
D.
Care shall be taken during transit to avoid damage to cable and drums. Before acceptance
on site, cable drums and cables shall be inspected for:
1.
2.
3.
Damage
Compliance with specification
Quantity
E.
Cable, wire and accessories shall be stored in factory installed coverings in a clean, dry
indoor space which provides protection against the weather.
F.
Each distribution cable shall be supplied in one continuous length, no joints shall be
permitted.
G.
Cables shall be handled with care and every effort made to avoid damage to the cable, to
other services and to building fabric. Recommendations or instructions available from the
cable manufacturers concerning the installation of cables shall be taken into account; in
particular co-axial cables shall not be bent in radius less than six times the overall
diameter. Any damage shall be reported immediately to the Engineer.
H.
Cable drums shall be unloaded carefully by means of either a crane or ramp and impact
with the ground shall be avoided. They shall be supported on axles and axle stands while
the cable is being pulled; twisting and abrasion of the cable serving or over sheath shall be
avoided.
I.
Cables shall be pulled over cable rollers adequately spaced to prevent the cable being
dragged over ground or other surfaces. For cables pulled into thrust boring or cable ducts
and for all cables exceeding 10 m length, cable stockings shall be used for hauling.
Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is taken on the cable cores as well as the
sheath and excessive stain shall be avoided.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
SINGLE CORE PVC INSULATED CABLES
A.
Single core cables for lighting and small power shall be of high conductivity copper
stranded wire insulated with PVC 850C, minimum.
B.
Cables shall comply with BS 6004 and shall be of 450/750V grade.
C.
Cables shall be coloured in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Wiring Regulations,
16th Edition, and BS 3858.
2.02
FLEXIBLE CABLES
A.
All flexible cables used for pendant lighting fittings or for final connections to fixed or
portable equipment shall be of 300/500 volt grade and comply with BS 6500.
B.
Flexible cables shall be of annealed copper conductors insulated with heat resisting PVC,
sheathed with heat resisting PVC and shall be of circular construction.
C.
Cable cores shall be colored in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Wiring
Regulations, 16th Edition, and BS 3858.
2.03 CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATED UNARMOURED OR
STEEL WIRE ARMORED AND PVC SHEATHED CABLES
A.
All low voltage multi-core distribution cables shall be 600/1000 volt grade cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE) insulated copper conductor, unarmoured or steel wire armoured and
PVC sheathed cables complying with BS 5467.
B.
Cable conductors shall be of high conductivity copper wire insulated with cross-linked
polyethylene. The armouring shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wire and the
cable shall be sheathed overall with PVC.
C.
Steel wire cable armoring shall be securely bonded to earth at each termination by means
of an adequately sized metallic bond which shall be as short and straight as it is
practicable.
D.
Cable cores shall be colored in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Wiring
Regulations, 16th Editions, and BS 3858.
E.
Joints shall not be allowed in any cable unless approved by the Engineer prior to
execution.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01
INSPECTION
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 3
A.
3.02
A.
1).
The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which the cables are to be
installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. The Contractor shall not proceed with the work until all
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING - LIGHTING
Lighting installation wiring will take the following forms:
Single core PVC insulated cables in trunking/conduit for internal wiring.
2).
Multi-core XLPE/PVC insulated cables in cable tray, ladder or conduit for internal
wiring.
3).
Multi-core XLPE/SWA/PVC in conduit, duct banks or direct buried for external
wiring.
B.
The types of lighting luminaries required are detailed on the drawings, and the types of
lighting installations and accessories are detailed elsewhere in this specification and on the
drawings.
C.
No conductor smaller than 2.5 sq mm shall be used.
D.
All lighting circuit wiring shall be carried out using the "loop-in" system, where
applicable.
E.
Each lighting circuit shall be wired as shown on the drawings and in accordance with this
Specification.
F.
Each lighting circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor throughout to each
light and switch point.
G.
Where a lighting circuit is to be installed in trunking or conduit together with any other
circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the circuit conductor must be derated for grouping in
accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition. This will normally result in the
need to increase the conductor sizes as shown in the schedule.
H.
Normal and emergency circuit wiring or cables shall run in separate conduits or in separate
compartments of metal trunking or on separate cable tray/ladder in accordance with IEE
wiring regulations, 16th edition.
3.03
A.
1.
SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING -SMALL POWER
Small power installation wiring will take the following forms:
Single core PVC insulated cables in trunking/conduit for internal wiring.
2.
Multi-core XLPE/PVC insulated cables in cable tray, ladder or conduit for internal
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 4
wiring.
3.
Multi-core XLPE/SWA/PVC in conduit, duct banks or direct buried for external
wiring.
B.
The types of small power installations and accessories required are detailed elsewhere in
this Specification and on the drawings.
C.
The small power installations shall be wired using the radial system as described on the
drawings.
D.
No conductor smaller than 4.0 sq mm shall be used.
E.
Each small power circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor throughout to
each outlet.
F.
Where a small power circuit it to be installed in trunking or conduit together with any
other circuit(s), deviating from drawings, the circuit conductors must be derated for
grouping in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulation, 16th Edition. This will normally
result in the need to increase the conductor sizes as shown on the drawings.
G.
Normal and emergency circuit wiring or cables shall run in separate conduits or in separate
compartments of metal trunking or on separate cable tray/ladder in accordance with IEE
wiring regulations, 16th edition.
3.04
A.
MAIN-CIRCUIT WIRING - POWER (SINGLE AND 3 PHASE)
Power installation wiring will take the form of one of the following:
1.
Single core PVC insulated cables in trunking/conduit.
2.
Multi-core or single core XLPE/PVC cables in cable tray, ladder or conduit for
internal wiring.
3.
Multi-core XLPE/SWA/PVC in conduit, duct bank or direct buried for external
wiring.
B.
The types of power installations required for this project are detailed elsewhere in this
Specification and on the drawings.
C.
Power installations will generally be wired on a single circuit basis as described on the
drawings and will serve fixed items of equipment.
D.
No conductor small than 4.0 sq. mm shall be used.
E.
Each power circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor.
F.
When a power circuit is to be installed in trunking or conduit together with any other
circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the circuit conductors must be derated for grouping in
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 5
accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition. This will normally result in the
need to increase the conductor sizes.
G.
3.05
Normal and emergency circuit wiring or cables shall run in separate conduits or in separate
compartments of metal trunking or on separate cable tray/ladder in accordance with IEE
wiring regulations, 16th edition.
FLEXIBLE CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Flexible cables shall not be concealed in any part of the installation.
B.
Where flexible cables are subject to heat they shall be constructed containing a minimum
of three cores.
C.
All flexible cables are to be of circular construction containing a minimum of three cores.
D.
Where portable appliances exceed 200 watt rating, the flexible cable shall not be smaller
than 32/0.20 sq. mm.
E.
Flexible cables exceeding 1.8 m in length shall not be allowed, with pride approval of the
Engineer hard wiring shall be taken to within 1.8 m of all equipment or apparatus to be
supplied with prior approval of the Engineer.
3.06
INTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Where cables enclosed in conduits are run vertically in excess of 5 m the cables shall be
clamped after passing out of the conduit, so as to relieve strain on the cables, using suitable
approved clamps.
B.
Where cables are run in trunking the cables of each circuit or groups of circuits shall be
clipped together using nylon straps or other suitable straps or clips. Vertical runs of
trunking exceeding 5 m shall be supplied with pin racks to relieve the strain on cables.
C.
Suitable precautions shall be taken during multiple circuit wiring follows a common route
then the wiring shall be installed in trunking rather than multiple conduits.
D.
To ease future maintenance and modifications, where multiple circuit wiring follows a
common route then the wiring shall be installed in trunking rather than multiple conduits.
E.
All cable runs shall be continuous, no joints will be permitted.
F.
Saddle and clips used for fixing cables shall be from the same manufacturer as the cable
which they are being used to fix and shall be constructed of the same material as that of the
cable sheath with an overall covering of PVC to the same colour as that of the PVC
covering of the cable. All saddles and clips shall be secured using brass round head
screws. Where cables are supported on cable tray or cable ladders they shall be fixed to the
cable tray using suitable approved straps of clips. Ties shall be spaced at not grater than
600 mm intervals along each cable, and within 100 mm of end bend or set.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 6
G.
Cable shall not be run exposed to direct sunlight. Covers or other equivalent means shall
be provided for protection.
H.
Bends in cables shall not be of a smaller radius recommended by manufacturer but not less
than twice the overall diameter of the cable whichever is more.
J.
Each gland shall be from the same manufacturer as the cable on which it is used and shall
be stamped describing the size and number of conductors. PVC shrouds shall be used to
protect every gland.
K.
Where cables are laid on cable trays or ladder in mechanical or electrical technical rooms
or prone to damage elsewhere on the project, they shall be mechanically protected by a
cover to a height not less than 2 m from the finished floor level.
L.
When installing cables, care shall be taken to ensure that electrolytic action does not take
place between the cable and any other material.
M.
Power and lighting cables can be installed on one cable tray, and low current system cables
can be installed on another cable tray with fire alarm cables separated by suitable
mechanical separators if required.
3.07
EXTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
No work shall commence until the contractor has investigated the site satisfactorily, and
ascertained that the area is free drains or other underground services.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, excavations within 600 mm of existing services shall be by
hand digging. All services uncovered, whether expected or not, shall be reported
immediately to the Engineer; they shall be supported by slings or other suitable means and
protected. Any damage to services, however minor, shall be reported immediately to the
Engineer; no repairs or replacement shall be done unless the Engineer gives his approval.
C.
When cable trenches are opened all cables shall be laid as quickly as possible. The
Engineer approval shall be obtained before a trench is backfill, generally backfilling shall
be commenced within 24 hours of cable laying and the work completed speedily.
D.
Excavations shall be kept free of water and protected against damage or collapse. The
safety of persons and the protection of structures, buildings, roads and services from
damage shall be ensured.
E.
Before cables are laid the bottom of the trench shall be graded evenly, cleaned of loose
stones and then covered for the full width of the trench with a 150 mm layer of earth
which has passed through a sieve with a maximum mesh of 12 mm or with sieved sand.
Where the level of the trench bottom has to change the slope shall not be greater than 1 in
12.
F.
After cables have been laid a further layer of earth or sieved sand shall be added over the
full width of the trench and tamped to provide finally not less than 50 mm cover over the
cables. The earth shall have passed through a sieve with a maximum mesh of 12 mm.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 7
G.
Trenches shall be backfield in layers and each layer shall be rammed. The first two layers
shall be 100 mm deep and rammed by hand; the ramming may be used. Warning tapes and
covers shall be provided.
H.
Warning tapes shall be of polythene not less than 150 mm wide and 0.1 mm thick. They
shall be yellow in colour and bear the continuously repeated legend "CAUTION
ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW" or similar in English and Arabic, in black letters not less
than 30 mm high.
J.
Warning covers shall be provided, and comply with regulation and codes of practice, for
M.V. cables. Covers shall be laid directly on tamped sieved earth or sand that covers the
cables.
K.
Cables laid in trenches shall cross other cables only at junctions; clearances between the
cables shall be maintained at cross overs. Cables shall not be laid one above the other
except where indicated.
L.
If more than one cable is to be drawn in a duct, the cables shall be bunched together and
pulled in one operation, wherever possible.
M.
Where cables run under roadways, concrete or paved areas, they shall be installed in PVC
ducts, encased in concrete. The ducts shall extend for a minimum distance of 1 m on each
side of each roadway, concrete or paved area wherever possible and at least one spare duct
shall always be provided.
N.
Where cables enter ducts beneath ground to buildings, these ducts shall be sealed to
prevent the ingress of water by means of sealing fittings which will be filled with sealing
compound. At least one spare duct shall be installed at each building entry point.
O.
Details and routes of external cables are shown on the drawings.
P.
Cables shall be installed to the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition
and all current amendments.
Q.
Cables shall only be terminated using the correct size and type of gland with earth tag and
shroud from the same manufacturer as the cable. All gland shall be dustproof and for
external applications the glands shall be fully weatherproof.
R.
Cable armouring shall be bonded to earth at each termination by means of a green/yellow
Cu/PVC earth conductor, sized in accordance with chapter 54 of IEE Wiring Regulations
16th Editions, connecting the cable gland earth tag to the local earth terminal. The
apparatus gland plate shall be cleaned to bare metal around the cable gland earth tag bolted
connection to ensure a sound electrical connection.
S.
Where cables pass through walls or floors, they shall be protected by PVC or mild steel
sleeves cast in to the building fabric. If the walls or floors are fire divisions, then the
sleeves shall be fire stopped after installation of the Cables(s) to the same rating as the
walls or floors through which they pass.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 8
T.
Before any tradesman is allowed to terminate an armoured cable on the permanent works,
he shall make a demonstration termination in the presence of the Engineers and obtain the
approval of the Engineer.
U.
Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, the Contractor shall seal
the ends of the ducts or sleeves using a suitable approved stopper after installation of
cable.
3.08
MARKING OF CABLE
A.
Buried cables shall be permanently identified by concrete slab and marker. The markers
shall be 600 mm square by 100 mm thick with impressed character; they shall be made of
grade 20 concrete, as defined in BS, with 10 mm aggregate. The impressed characters shall
be in English and Arabic and worded "M.V. CABLE" or "L.V.CABLE" as appropriate
together with circuit details as indicated; in addition the work "JOINT" shall be added
where appropriate.
B.
Cables markers shall be located at every point where cable enters a building, sub-station,
or distribution pillars, at each joint, change of direction, road and pathway crossing, and
along the route of the cable at the interval not exceeding 45 m.
C.
Except where cables are buried, located in switchrooms, in ducts and spaces designated
solely for electrical services, or have orange oversheaths, they shall be identified by
adhesive bands coloured orange, complying with standards and codes of practice
mentioned elsewhere in this specification. The bands shall be not less than 100 mm long,
located at least once within each separate compartment through which cables pass and at
intervals not exceeding 12 m.
D.
Except where cables are buried, or enclosed in conduit, trunking or ducting they shall be
permanently identified by discs. The discs shall be of laminated plastic materials with
black character on white; character shall be not less than 3 mm high. The inscription shall
indicate the nominal voltage, the designation of the load, the number and cross sectional
area of cores and the rated voltage of the cable.
E.
Cables identification discs shall be attached to the cables with ties. Disc shall be located
within 500 mm of terminations and joints, at least once within each separate compartment
through which the cable pass, and at intervals not exceeding 24 m, they shall coincide with
the colour bands.
3.09
JOINTING AND TERMINATING CABLES
A.
The Engineer shall be informed whenever cables are to be jointed.
B.
The Engineer shall be given evidence that the joint or termination manufacturer has stated
that materials to be employed are suitable for the type of cable to be jointed or terminated.
C.
A cable shall not be cut until the jointing or terminating commences and the work shall
proceed continuously until it is completed. All necessary precautions shall be taken to
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 9
prevent damage and ingress of moisture and impurities, cables ends shall be free from
moisture before jointing commences. Where circumstances prevent completion the cable
ends shall be sealed.
D.
The Contractor shall employ for this work staff who are fully qualified and competent for
the types of joints and terminations to be made.
E.
For joints in armored cables, bonding conductors shall be connected across the armouring.
A split ferrule shall be place under the armouring to prevent deformation of the cable by
the clamp.
F.
At terminations, armouring and metal sheaths shall be connected directly to the external
earthing terminal of the equipment by a bonding conductor. For L.V. cables the bonding
conductor shall have cross sectional area in accordance with regulations mentioned
elsewhere in this specification and for M.V. cables it shall be as indicated.
G.
At terminations, cable tails shall be formed by separating and bringing out the cores. Each
tail shall be long enough to be connected to the terminals of the equipment.
H.
Core identification at terminations shall be by coloured or numbered plastic stretch or
shrink ferrules.
J.
Continuity of spare cores shall be maintained at joints, and at terminations the cores shall
be connected to spare terminals.
K.
Compression connectors and associated dies for the compression tool shall be the correct
type and size. The tool shall be so designed that the correct compression must be applied
before it can be released.
M.
Tools for manipulation and termination of cables shall be of a design approved by the
cable manufacturer. Corrugation of the metal sheath or damage to outer coverings will not
be accepted. A wood block or wooden faced tool shall be used to finally dress the cable
into position.
N.
Repairs to a cable sheath, regardless of the extent of the damage, will not be accepted,
straight through joints only are permitted.
P.
Terminations and joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Only clean, dry plastic filling compound shall be used.
Q.
Marking of cables shall comply with relevant regulation and codes of practice mentioned
elsewhere in this specification and requirements of the Section.
R.
All H.V. electrical cable 13.8 kv shall be terminated, spliced with pre-molded,
manufactured apparatus elbows, splices, and they shall be installed in strict accordance
with manufacturer's recommendation. All parts shall be of one manufacturer to assure
inter-changeability. Taping or epoxy-formed terminations or other field applied methods
shall not be permitted except with written approval.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 10
S.
All pre-molded rubber parts shall be 100% production tested at the factory with industry
standard applied potential and corona extinction tests. The factory shall certify in writing
that these tests have been performed. No soldering shall be permitted on drain wires or
shielding tapes except with written approval of the Engineer.
T.
All electrical cables entering the high voltage compartments of electrical equipment shall
be terminated by means of "deadfront" equipment wherever possible.
3.10
SLEEVES, TAPES AND SEALING COMPOUND
A.
Sleeves shall be of the shrink type, applied cold by a mechanical device or by the use of
heat. They shall provide a sufficient thickness of insulation to suit the particular
application.
B.
Insulation tape used in joints and terminations shall be compatible with, and have a
temperature rating and insulating property not less than the cable insulation. They shall
comply in general with the regulations and standards mentioned elsewhere.
3.11
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
After completion of the installation of wires and cables including clamping, end
preparation, jointing, etc., but before termination on either end, the insulation resistance
test (meggar test) shall be carried out for all types of wires and cables with 500V or 1000V
meggar as applicable according to the rated voltage of the cable insulation and as per the
IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
END OF SECTION 3
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRES AND CABLES
SEC.3 - 11
SECTION 4
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated on drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:
Outlet boxes
Junction boxes
Pull boxes
Floor boxes (under floor and flush floor)
Conduit bodies
Bushings
Locknuts
Knockout closures.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and fittings, of
types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Qualification with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on
projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for project.
C.
I.E.E. Compliance: Comply with I.E.E. as applicable to construction and installation of
electrical wiring boxes and fittings.
D.
British Standards Compliance: Comply with British Standards as applicable to sheet-steel
outlet boxes, device boxes, and cover and box supports.
1.04
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical boxes and fittings.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
SEC.4
-1
B.
Samples: The Contractor shall submit sample of each type of proposed boxes and fitting
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
FABRICATED MATERIALS
A.
Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized flat, rolled sheet steel interior outlet wiring
boxes, of types, shapes and sizes including box depths, to suit each respective location
and installation, construct threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for
securing box covers and wiring devices. Terminal with screw shall be provided inside the
box for grounding connection of all metallic outlet boxes with appropriate earth mark.
B.
Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each
installation, including mounted brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixtures
studs, grounding connection, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes,
which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of
individual wiring situations.
C.
Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet
wiring boxes, of types shapes and sizes including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit
ends, terminal with screw for ground connection, cast metal face plates with springhinged waterproof caps suitable configures for each application, including face plate
gaskets and corrosion resistant fasteners.
D.
Junction and Pull Boxes: Provided galvanized code gauge sheet steel junction and pull
boxes or with screw on covers, of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location
and installation with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws
and washers.
E.
Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies, or types, shapes and sizes
to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded, corrosion-resistant
screws.
F.
Bushings, knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel
box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset
connectors, of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirement of I.E.E. and BS's "Standard
of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products fulfill requirements.
B.
Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fitting with wire/cable and raceway
installation work.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
SEC.4
-2
C.
Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or
moisture or where shown on drawings.
D.
Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been
removed.
E.
Install boxes and conduit bodies locations to ensure ready accessibility of electrical
wiring.
F.
Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would
result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on
rounded surface.
G.
Fasten boxes rigidly to substrate or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly
embedded electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
H.
Provide electrical and earth connections for installed boxes.
END OF SECTION 4
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
SEC.4
-3
SECTION 5
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of electrical connections for equipment is as indicated by drawings and schedules.
Electric connections are hereby defined to include, but not limited to, connections for
providing electrical power without exception to all equipment which needs electrical
power.
B.
Types of electrical power connections covered in this section shall include but not limited
to the following:
-
To all A.H.U's control panels and BMS equipment/panels.
-
To all motor control centres (MCC).
-
To all socket outlets.
-
To all isolators.
-
To motors (if not specified elsewhere)
-
To motor starters (if not specified elsewhere)
-
To all heaters and A/C equipment (if not specified elsewhere)
-
From motor starters to motors (if not specified elsewhere)
-
To all lighting fixtures and switches.
-
To converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, UPS and similar current
adjustment features of equipment.
-
To master units of communication, signal, alarm, etc. and to all secondary units
where required.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
SEC.5
- 1
-
To earth all equipment.
C.
See Sections 16481 and 16482 for Motors Control Centers and Motor Starters furnished
integrally with equipment, which is not work of this section.
D.
See Division - 15 sections for control systems wiring, which is not work of this section.
E.
See all the notes on electrical drawings for detail of scope of work included under this
section.
1.03
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND
SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this
Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of connectors and terminals, or
types, and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical
insulating tape, electrical flux, and cable ties, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.
C.
BS Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of BS as to type products used and
installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction boxes,
motor starters, and disconnect switches.
1.05
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical connectors, terminals and
materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of
materials, including but not necessary limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs),
electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable
insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
SEC.5
- 2
needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated.
B.
Metal and Heavy Gauge PVC Conduit, Tubing and Fitting: Provide heavy gauge PVC
and metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and fittings of types, sizes
and weights (wall thickness), indicated for each type service. Where types and grades are
not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring
raceways. Provide products complying with Section 16110 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS,
and in accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and fittings.
-
PVC external coated rigid steel conduit (external area and plant rooms).
-
Rigid metal conduit fittings
-
Electrical metallic tubing
-
Flexible metal conduit
-
Flexible metal conduit fittings
-
Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit
-
Liquid-tight flexible conduit fittings
C.
Wire, Cable and Connectors: Provide electrical connectors and terminals as recommended
by connector and terminal manufacturer for intended applications.
D.
Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable
insulating tubing and boots, solder, electrical soldering flux, wire nuts and cable ties as
recommended for use by the accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A.
Install electrical connection as indicated; in accordance with connector manufacturer's
written instructions and with recognised industry practices, and complying with
requirement of the I.E.E. Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition, "Standard of Installation" to
ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B.
Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible,
mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between
electrical power supplies and installed equipment.
C.
Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with installation work.
D.
Splices insulated by wound tape shall not be acceptable. Protective earthing conductors
must be free of splices.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
SEC.5
- 3
E.
Prepare cables and wires, by cutting stripping covering armour, jacket, and insulation
properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated.
F.
Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection
testing and maintenance.
G.
Tighten wire-binding connector screws firmly.
H.
Provide PVC-coated conduit and fittings where indicated for highly-corrosive atmosphere
and outdoor installation.
I.
Provide flexible conduit for all motor connections, and for other electrical equipment
connections where subject to one or more of the following:
-
Exterior location
-
Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate
(showers, baths, toilet, etc.)
-
Corrosive atmosphere
-
Subjected to water spray
-
Subjected to dripping oil, grease or water.
K.
Provide heat - shrinkable termination for all cables having the size of 300 mm2 and above.
L.
Refer to basic electrical requirements section for identification of electrical power supply
conductor terminations with markers approved as to types, colors, letters and markers
sizes, by Engineer. Affix markers to each point of termination as close as possible to each
point of connection.
M.
Where a conduit enters a box or other fitting a bushing or grommet shall be provided to
protect the wire from abrasion unless the design of the box or fitting is such as to afford
equivalent protection.
END OF SECTION 5
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
SEC.5
- 4
SECTION 6
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
A.
This Specification applies to wiring devices used as accessories for the electrical
installations as indicated on the drawings or schedule and elsewhere within this
specification.
B.
Types of electrical wiring devices required for the installation in this project include:
1.03
A.
1.
Lighting switches.
2.
External lighting switches.
3.
16A socket outlets (220V).
4.
Single phase isolators and switch fuses.
5.
Multi phase isolators and switch fuses
6.
Time switches
7.
Connections to fixed appliances.
8.
Industrial socket outlet
9.
Telephone, data and TV outlets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Standards
The equipment and installation shall comply with the standards and codes of practice
listed in Section 16010 or their approved equivalents. In the event of the discrepancy
between this specification and any relevant standard or code of practice, the specification
shall be followed and the Engineer informed.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRING DEVICES
SEC.6
-1
B.
Manufacturers
Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices, of types and ratings required,
and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5
years.
C.
Source Quality Control
Before installation, wiring devices shall be tested in accordance with standards mentioned
elsewhere and have relevant listing or certificates of approval.
D.
Workmanship
All work undertaken in part or whole shall be carried out and completed to the standards
mentioned elsewhere and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Any defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of wiring devices to the
building or building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.04
A.
SUBMITTAL
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer complete and detailed manufacturer's data
relating to the wiring devices offered. Refer Section 16010
For approval submissions shall include the following:
B.
1.05
A.
1.
Name of the manufacturer.
2.
Country of origin.
3.
Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts
sufficient for a 2 years period.
4.
Technical performance of the equipment selected.
5.
Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance.
6.
Delivery time from the date of orders.
7.
Submit copies of test reports or certificates.
8.
Control schematic and wiring.
The Contractor shall provide samples of proposed wiring devices together with the above
submittal.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Box crate or otherwise completely enclose and protect all equipment from dirt,
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRING DEVICES
SEC.6
-2
construction debris, traffic and operation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Switch plates, socket-outlet plates and similar items shall be of metal or plastic material
as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
B.
Decorative finishes of metal plates shall comply with appropriate standards, as mentioned
elsewhere. The finish and/or color shall be standard throughout the installation unless
otherwise indicated or as directed by the Engineer.
C.
Switches shall comply with standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification and be
suitable for use on inductive and resistive loads. They shall be single pole, unless
otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer, and where mounted adjacent one to
another they shall be grouped in a single enclosure and share a common switch plate.
D.
Where indicated, switches with pilot lamps shall be provided. This lamp shall be a neon
lamp with resistor and red colored lens unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Socket outlets for different systems and voltages shall have different configurations to
avoid engagement of plugs dedicated for other system voltages.
2.02
LIGHTING SWITCHES
A.
Lighting switches for interior use shall be one way or two way, single or multi gang, grid
type. All suitable for 220 volts A.C., minimum 10A and mounted on adjustable grid
enclosed in metal box. The switches shall be of the quick make, slow break type and shall
comply with standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
B.
Where switches are to be flush type they shall be supplied with overlapping cover plates
finished flush with the sides of the metal box.
2.03
EXTERNAL LIGHTING SWITCHES
A.
All external lighting switches shall be one way, two way or multigang arrangements and
be complete with a gasket forming splash proof and dustproof enclosures. The switches
shall also comply with standards and regulations mentioned elsewhere.
B.
A suitable drain hole must be provided.
2.04
16 AMPERES SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS
A.
16 Amperes, 220 volts, switch socket outlets shall be provided as indicated on drawings,
and shall have two-pole and earthing pin to NEC standards.
B.
Switch socket outlets shall comply with NEC standards and other codes of practice
mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRING DEVICES
SEC.6
-3
C.
Weatherproof socket outlets shall be provided with push-on cap retaining ring without
switch.
D.
All wall mounted switch socket outlets with the exception of those mounted in services or
plant rooms shall be 3-pin shuttered pattern, flush mounting type with front plates as
indicated elsewhere. Socket outlets shall be mounted in flush metal box. Where surface
mounted socket outlets are required, they shall be of the flush pattern, mounted on
suitable adaptor boxes.
E.
All 3PH surface mounted sockets shall be provided with a 16 to 32 A, breakable plug top
complete with fuse. Each twin socket shall be counted as Two sockets.
F.
Plugs shall be provided with all socket-outlets, and handed over to the Employer/Client.
G.
Socket outlets provided in services plant rooms shall be metal clad type, surface or flush
mounted as indicated elsewhere.
2.05
16 AMPERES SOCKET OUTLETS
A.
Socket outlets must comply with NEC standards and other Codes of Practice and
regulations mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
B.
All wall mounted socket outlets with exception of those mounted in services or plant
rooms shall be 3 pin, flush mounting type with front plates as indicated elsewhere. Socket
outlets shall be mounted in flush metal boxes complete with an earthing terminal and
earth tag. Where surface mounted socket outlets are required, they shall be similar to that
of the flush pattern, mounted on suitable adaptor boxes.
C.
Socket outlets provided in services or plant rooms shall be metal clad type, surface or
flush mounted as indicated elsewhere.
2.06
SINGLE PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES
A.
These shall be of the double pole single throw type, complying with regulations and
standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
B.
Finishes shall be either of plastic for flush isolators or rust proof metal for surface
isolators and switch fuses.
C.
All fuses shall be of HRC type as described elsewhere in this specification. These items
are meant to be used for the isolation of single phase items of fixed equipment fed by an
individual circuit.
D.
Types of equipment to be fed are described elsewhere in this specification and on
drawings.
2.07
A.
MULTI-PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES
Multiphase isolators and switch fuses shall be used for the isolation of multiphase items
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRING DEVICES
SEC.6
-4
of fixed equipment fed by an individual circuit.
B.
Switches shall be of multiple, single throw operation and must comply with standards
mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
C.
Types of equipment to be fed are described elsewhere in this specification and on
drawings.
D.
These items are to be manufactured from rust proofed, metal-clad material.
E.
All fuses shall be of HRC type, as described elsewhere in this specification.
2.08
TIME SWITCHES
A.
Time switches shall be of the self-starting, self-winding, synchronous-motor driven type.
B.
The rated voltages and rated current shall be as indicated on the drawings.
C.
Time switches shall, unless otherwise indicated or as directed by the Engineer,
incorporate the following:
2.09
A.
1.
A 150 hours spring reserve to drive the mechanism during electricity supply
interruptions.
2.
An easily replaceable cartridge fuse-link, complying with codes mentioned
elsewhere, inserted in the motor circuit.
3.
An ON-OFF manual switch to enable the circuit to be controlled at will without
affecting normal dial operation.
CONNECTIONS TO FIXED APPLIANCES
Final connections to fix of equipment shall be carried out by using either an insulated
copper sheathed cable or a flexible metallic conduit with heat resisting cables run through
the conduit.
Supply and install a suitable isolator adjacent to each fixed appliance. Conduit for kitchen
equipment shall not be run in the floor screed.
B.
Flexible Conduit
Final connections made using flexible conduit are to comprise a metallic flexible conduit
covered with continuous PVC sheath and shall comply with Section 16110 'Flexible
Conduit and Fittings of this specification.
Sufficient length shall be allowed for vibration and movement of the equipment. A
separate circuit protective conductor wire must be run inside the conduit.
2.10
INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRING DEVICES
SEC.6
-5
A.
Industrial socket outlets shall be single or multi phase types and rating as indicated on
drawings.
B.
Socket outlets shall have an enclosure of IP44 or IP67 integrated with switch or without
it.
C.
Socket outlets shall be single phase with two poles and earthing pin or three phase with
three poles, earthing pin with or without neutral pin.
D.
Socket outlet shall be integrated with 30 mA (RCD) residual current device as earth
leakage protective.
2.11
FOR LOW CURRENT SYSTEMS
A.
All outlet plates for low current systems such as telephone, data, TV, music, etc. shall be
of similar style and finished to that specified for the associated lighting switches and
socket outlets and shall be suitable for mounting recessed or flush.
B.
Refer to the low current specifications for details.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
INSPECTION
The Contractor must examine areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be
installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to proper and timely
completion of the work. He shall not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES
A.
Install wiring devices where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirement of BS, IEE, and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to ensure that products serve their intended function.
B.
Programmed installation of devices after wiring is completed and tested for satisfactory
insulation resistance.
C.
Install devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess building
materials, debris, etc.
D.
In walls or ceilings of concrete, tile or other noncombustible material, boxes and fittings
shall be so installed that the front edge of the box or fitting will not be set back from the
finished surface more than 5 mm. In walls and ceilings constructed of wood or other
combustible material, outlet boxes and fittings shall be flush with the finished surface or
project therefrom.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRING DEVICES
SEC.6
-6
E.
Plaster surfaces that are broken or incomplete shall be repaired so that there will be no
gaps or open spaces at the edge of the box or fittings.
F.
In making an exposed surface extension from an existing outlet of concealed wiring, a
box or an extension ring shall be mounted over the original box and electrically and
mechanically secured to it.
G.
All wiring devices shall be fixed independently of the system of wiring. All fixing screws
or bolts shall be of steel and where the appropriate apparatus has a protective coating of
zinc or is mounted outside, an electro-galvanised finish shall be used complying with
relevant standards and codes of practice.
END OF SECTION 6
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
WIRING DEVICES
SEC.6
-7
SECTION 7
CIRCUIT AND MOTORS DISCONNECTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other Sections and the Specifications for requirements which affect work of
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This Specification is for extent of motor and circuit disconnects switch work as indicated
by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of motor and circuit disconnect switches in this section include the following:
Equipment disconnects.
Appliance disconnects.
Motor-circuit disconnects.
Push buttons stations.
1.03
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND
SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this
Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motor and circuit disconnect
switches of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CIRCUIT AND MOTORS DISCONNECTIONS
SEC.7
-1
C.
IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to construction and installation of
electrical motor and circuit disconnect switches.
D.
BS Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable requirements or of BS standard
publications.
1.05
A.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, schematic and
dimensions drawings installation instructions and general recommendations for each type
of motor and circuit disconnect switch required.
STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
A.
Pack accessories for protection during transportation and storage.
B.
Store in a dry, clean location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
FABRICATED SWITCHES
General Duty Disconnect Isolator Switches: Provide surface mounted, general duty type,
sheet steel enclosed switches, of types, sizes, and electric characteristics indicated, rated
as specified on the drawings with required number of poles, incorporating spring assisted,
quick-make, quick-break switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible
in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of
enclosure base and whose position is easily recognizable, and is capable of being
padlocked in OFF position. Construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper,
with silver-tungsten type switch contacts, and stamped enclosure knockouts.
PUSH BUTTONS STATIONS
A.
All push buttons shall be made of non-hygroscopic materials, non-swelling and fitted to
avoid any possibility of sticking. Non-retaining type shall generally be used except for
emergency stop push buttons which shall stay down when operated and be fitted with
mushroom type heads.
B.
The contacts of all push buttons shall be strong and have a positive wiping action when
operated.
C.
All push buttons stations shall be provided with labels.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CIRCUIT AND MOTORS DISCONNECTIONS
SEC.7
-2
A.
Install circuit and motor disconnect switches where indicated, complying with
manufacturer's written instruction, applicable requirements of IEE and BS "Standard of
Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products
fulfill requirements.
B.
Coordinate circuit and motor disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway
and cable work, as necessary for proper interface.
C.
Install disconnects switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and
controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 7
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CIRCUIT AND MOTORS DISCONNECTIONS
SEC.7
-3
SECTION 8
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Conduit and equipment supports.
B.
Anchors and fasteners.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.
B.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit details under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and
starting of Product.
1.04
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.
B.
Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of
equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
C.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1.
Concrete Structural Elements:
anchors and preset inserts.
Use precast insert system, expansion
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
SUPPORTING DEVICES
SEC.8 - 1
2.
Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps.
3.
Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors.
4.
Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts
and hollow wall fasteners.
5.
Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts.
6.
Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7.
Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NEC "Standard of
Installation".
C.
Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D.
Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.
E.
Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
G.
Do not drill or cut structural members.
H.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use
hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use
spring lock washers under all nuts.
I.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panel boards with minimum of four anchors.
J.
In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panel boards
one inch (25 mm) off wall.
K.
Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panel boards
recessed in hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION 8
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
SUPPORTING DEVICES
SEC.8 - 2
SECTION 9
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
A.
Nameplates and labels.
B.
Wire and cable markers.
C.
Conduit markers.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
1.04
RELATED SECTIONS
- Painting.
REFERENCES
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of
Product.
1.05
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and shown.
1.06
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish under provisions .
B.
Provide two sets of each type of material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SEC.9 - 1
A.
Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background in
Arabic and English.
B.
Locations:
C.
D.
2.02
1.
Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
2.
Communication cabinets.
Letter Size:
1.
Use 3mm letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2.
Use 6mm letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 5mm white letters on black background. Use only
for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, and control device stations.
WIRE MARKERS
A.
Description: Split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.
B.
Locations: Each conductor at panel board gutters , pull boxes , outlet and junction boxes,
and each load connection.
C.
Legend:
1.
2.
2.03
A.
B.
Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on
drawings.
Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings.
CONDUIT MARKERS
Location: Furnish markers for each expressed conduit.
Spacing: 6m on center.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01
A.
PREPARATION
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
APPLICATION
Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive.
Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panel board that is recessed in finished
locations.
E.
Provide colored band on each exposed conduit. Different colors shall be used for each
type of service (i.e. lighting, power, tel, data, fire alarm, etc.).
END OF SECTION 9
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SEC.9 - 2
SECTION 10
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work
of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The requirements of this section shall apply to all underground electric services,
referred to on the drawings and elsewhere within this specification.
B.
The types of underground electric services comprise the following:
1.
Trenching and backfilling
2.
Duct banks
3.
Manholes, hand holes and earth rod pits.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work
of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The requirements of this section shall apply to all underground electric services,
referred to on the drawings and elsewhere within this specification.
B.
The types of underground electric services comprise the following:
1.03
1.
Trenching and backfilling
2.
Duct banks
3.
Manholes, hand holes and earth rod pits.
4.
Concrete pads and stub-ups.
5.
Cable warning signs and warning tape.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
SEC.10
- 1
A.
Underground electric services shall generally be manufacturer's standard
construction and materials. Where this contradicts any part of these specifications,
the Contractor shall state so at the time of tender.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide proof of supply of similar types of underground
electric services to known users for a period not less than 5 years.
1.04
A.
SUBMITTAL
The Contractor shall submit samples of underground electric services they are
offering.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
A.
GENERAL
The underground raceway system for power, lighting, low voltage and control
cables shall consist of manholes and hand holes interconnected via concrete
encased PVC conduits, direct buried PVC conduits or cable trenching, all as
shown on the drawings.
DUCT BANKS
PVC Conduit:
Schedule 40 PVC conduits shall be used for encasing in concrete and underground
duct systems, PVC conduits and fittings shall comply with the requirement of
Section 2.00.
The PVC conduit shall have a temperature range of 4 C to 90 C. The conduits
within the duct bank shall be supported on plastic interlocking spacers, at intervals
of approximately 2.4 meters. A 25mm separation, edge to edge, shall be
maintained, both horizontally and vertically, between the ducts.
All duct banks shall have a 75mm concrete cover on the top, sides, and bottom of
the PVC ducts. Anchorage shall be used to hold the ducts in place while pouring
the concrete encasement.
Where the duct bank enters a building underground the conduit shall terminate in
an appropriate fitting. An end bell shall be used on conduits entering manholes.
A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends.
Bends in conduit shall be made without reducing the internal diameter of the
conduit. The inside radius of the conduit bends shall not be less than one meter.
Matching end bells and plugs shall be provided, constructed of high impact plastic.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
SEC.10
- 2
Each length of conduit shall be provided with one standard coupling. Couplings
shall have a centre step to ensure proper seething. Joints shall be made with
solvent cement.
All duct banks shall have a 75mm concrete cover on the top, sides, and bottom of
the PVC ducts. Anchorage shall be used to hold the ducts in place while pouring
the concrete encasement.
Where the duct bank enters a building underground the conduit shall terminate in
an appropriate fitting. An end bell shall be used on conduits entering manholes.
A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends.
Bends in conduit shall be made without reducing the internal diameter of the
conduit. The inside radius of the conduit bends shall not be less than one metre.
Matching end bells and plugs shall be provided, constructed of high impact plastic.
Each length of conduit shall be provided with one standard coupling. Couplings
shall have a centre step to ensure proper seething. Joints shall be made with
solvent cement.
B.
Concrete Encasement:
Encasement shall be 20 MPa concrete with 13mm maximum size aggregate for all
duct banks. For warning purposes, a red dye shall be trowelled into the top surface
after pouring the concrete.
C.
Expansion and Construction Joints:
An expansion joint of 55mm per 100 meters maximum shall be provided in the
duct bank. Additionally, a construction joint shall be installed if pouring of
concrete is commenced anytime after initial set of adjacent concrete. Neither
expansion nor construction joints shall be installed under a roadway.
D.
Duct Bank Cleaning:
Upon completing a duct run, a test mandrel and wire brush cleaner shall be pulled
through each duct. The test mandrel shall be 6mm less in diameter than the
nominal inside diameter of the duct while the wire brush shall be slightly larger
than the duct. The testing and cleaning of a concrete encased duct bank should be
done the day after the concrete has been poured to eliminate any concrete which
may have seeped into the ducts. A nylon pull line shall be installed in each duct
after cleaning and the conduit shall be capped.
E.
Foundation Requirements:
For duct banks in stable soils, the soil below the duct bank shall be compacted to
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
SEC.10
- 3
90 percent of maximum density to a minimum depth of 300mm. A dewatering
system shall be used to lower the water table below the final excavation depth to
eliminate disturbance of an in situ soil densities.
2.03
STUB-UPS
A.
Stub-up shall consist of either 100mm or 150mm diameter rigid steel hot doubledipped galvanized conduits entirely encased in accordance.
B.
Stub-up bend shall be 90 degrees. Radius shall be 1200mm.
C.
Each steel conduit bend shall be provided with a PVC steel coupling on one end
and a thread protector on the other end.
2.04
MANHOLES
A.
A sump pit shall be built into the base slab directly beneath the manhole opening
to collect and retain any water present in the manhole. Periodic maintenance may
be required since sump pumps will not be permanently installed.
B.
The duct bank manhole interface shall include an expansion joint to take up
longitudinal movement due to expansion and construction of the duct bank. This
joint will also act as water stop to prevent water for seeping inside the manhole.
C.
The exterior of the manhole shall be waterproofed with a bituminous coating
having a minimum dry film thickness of 0.30mm.
D.
Each manhole shall have two cable pulling irons opposite each duct bank entrance.
E.
Access to deep manholes will be through a chimney. Permanent ladders shall not
be installed.
F.
Manholes shall be provided with earth-rods and cable supports as required.
2.05
HANDHOLES
Handholes may be formed either monolithically or built up to designed sizes by
combining several concrete sections cast in various shapes and sizes. Handholes
shall be provided with cast iron covers, sumps and ground-rods. Section joints
shall be grouted. Handhole size shall be as shown on drawings.
2.06
A.
2.07
A.
EARTH ROD PITS
Earth rod pits shall be precast of either square or round section with cover.
CONCRETE PADS
Concrete pads shall be 150mm high, unless otherwise indicated completed with
steel reinforcing and necessary bolts, anchors etc.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
SEC.10
- 4
2.08
A.
2.09
CASTINGS
All handhole and ground rod box frames and covers shall be heavy duty, cast iron,
round with solid type gasket lids, and countersunk locking devices. Covers shall
seal tightly and not rock.
CABLE WARNING SIGNS
A.
Where cables are directly buries, warning signs shall be installed in an attempt to
prevent damage into the cables by excavation. These signs shall be suitable for
demounting on a riser pole, substation fence or separate stakes to suit the
installations.
B.
Sign posts should be placed as close to the cable as practical, but no closer than
900mm horizontally from the cable.
2.10
CABLE WARNING TAPE
Warning marker tape shall be laid at least 300mm above the buried cable. The tape
shall be 300mm to 400mm wide, preferably with a metallic core.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
EXCAVATION
A.
The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever
substances encountered, to the depths specified. During excavation, material
suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner at sufficient distance
from the bank of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins.
All excavated materials not required or suitable for back-filling shall be removed.
Such grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water from
flowing into trenches or other excavation and any water accumulating therein shall
be removed by pumping or by other approved methods. Such sheeting and shoring
shall be done as may be necessary for the protection of the work of adjacent duct,
pipework or structure and for the safety of personnel. Unless otherwise indicated,
excavation shall be by open cut except that short sections of a trench may be
tunneled if the cables or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can
be properly tamped in such tunnel sections. Trenches shall be of necessary width
for the proper laying of the cables and the banks shall be as nearly vertical as
practicable. The bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded.
B.
The trenches in which concrete encased duct work is to be placed shall, in general
not be wider than necessary for proper shall, in general not be wider than necessary
for proper placing of such work. However, the banks of such trenches need not be
kept vertical but may be sloped or widened to such limits as will not interfere with
other utilities. Over excavating and backfilling with suitable selected material
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
SEC.10
- 5
where rock is encountered will not be required except for a gradual cushioning
towards point of abrupt drop-off of the rock to levels considerably below the grade
of the duct.
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
3.04
BACKFILLING
The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed, checked,
accepted and approved in writing. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with
the excavated materials approved for backfilling. The selected material shall be
free from large clods of earth or stones larger than 5mm in any dimension. Any
trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to
the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled, graded and compacted
mounted over and smoothed off. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to
be paved shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the entire depth of
trench shall be backfilled in 150mm layers, thoroughly tamped and compacted.
Minimum degree of compaction shall be 90% density at optimum moisture so that
paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along
all other portions of the trenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable
uniformity and the surface over the trenches left in a uniform and neat conditions.
CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
Manholes and handholes shall be constructed of precast or cast-in situ concrete to
sizes shown on the Contract Drawings. Horizontal concrete surfaces of floors
shall have a smooth steel trowel finish. Frames and covers shall be watertight and
covers shall fit the frames without undue play. Steel and iron shall be formed to
shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings shall be free from warp and
blow holes that may impair their strength of appearance. Exposed metal shall have
a smooth finish of appearance. Exposed metal shall have a smooth finish and
sharp lines and arises. Provide all necessary lugs, and brackets. Set pulling-in
irons and other built-in items in place before depositing concrete.
INSTALLATION OF DUCT BANKS
A.
General: Duct banks shall consist of individual conduits encased or unencased in
concrete as shown on drawings. Top of duct banks shall be installed 600mm
minimum below finished grade and shall connect manholes and handholes as
shown on the Contract Drawings. Where a duct bank connects to a building, the
Contractor shall adapt the duct bank, at one meter beyond the building exterior
wall, to the building conduit with the required couplings.
B.
Encasement: The concrete encasement surrounding the duct bank shall be
rectangular in cross-section, having a minimum concrete thickness of 75mm
beyond any surface of the conduit. Interlocking spacers shall be used to secure a
uniform spacing between conduits of not less than 75mm.
C.
Installation: Trenches and duct banks shall be graded so that conduits will have a
fall of at least 75mm per 30m towards the lower manholes or from the high point
of the section towards the manholes or from the building towards a manhole.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
SEC.10
- 6
Changes in direction of runs shall be accomplished by using special couplings
limited to 5 degrees and/or 45 degrees bends having a 1m radius sweep with
straight sections of ducts between changes of direction and `S' sweep sections
having a minimum of 500m offset.
3.05
1.
Where the system enters building construction the underground conduit shall be
heavy-wall PVC and shall be terminated in appropriate fittings.
2.
Where duct lines enter manholes, the conduits shall terminate in end bells.
Clean-conduit thoroughly before laying. During construction and after the duct
line is completed, plug ends of conduits to prevent water washing mud into the
conduits. Take particular care to keep the conduits clean of concrete or any other
substance during the course of construction.
3.
Ducts shall be securely anchored and braced with intermediate and base plastic
spacers to prevent movement during the pavement of concrete.
4.
After the duct line has been completed, a mandrel not less than 300mm long,
having a cross-section of approximately 6mm less than the inside cross-section
of the conduit shall be pulled through each conduit, after which a brush with stiff
bristles shall be pulled through to make certain than no particles of earth, sand or
gravel have been left in the line.
5.
Install a nylon rope in each conduit.
6.
All duct banks shall enter manholes through rectangular openings of suitable
dimensions provided in walls. Such holes shall be sized to properly receive the
duct, but shall not be too large for proper caulking. The space between duct
banks and manhole walls shall be caulked tight with lead wool.
EARTHING
A.
Provide a 1.5M earth rod external to each manhole and handhole.
B.
Provide a earth cable in each manhole and handhole affixed to the wall above the
duct bank box-outs. Connect to earth rod using 35mm²; bare copper conductor.
C.
Bond earth conductors associated with each power conductor at each manhole.
D.
Test earth system in accordance with Section 16350
3.06
CABLE SIGNS
A.
Warning signs shall mark all direct buried splices and shall be placed at intervals
not exceeding 30 metres along the cable route.
B.
The direct buried cable shall be installed with market tape laid 300mm directly
above cable throughout the entire cable route.
CABLE INSTALLATION
3.07
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
SEC.10
- 7
A.
Install power cables in duct banks in accordance with Section 16150
END OF SECTION 10
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES
SEC.10
- 8
SECTION 11
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect
work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this
section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work
under the Contract.
1.02
A.
1.03
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This Specification is for extent of power distribution boards including all types
of main or sub-main distribution boards and load centers referred to the
drawings, schedules and elsewhere within this Specification. These will also be
applicable to main switchboards where shown/designated on the drawings.
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND
CONDITIONS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and
warranties for work under this Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this
section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all
other liabilities which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by
other provisions of the Contract Documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of distribution boards
and enclosure, of types and sizes and rating required, whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on
projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.
C.
Special Use-Markings: Provide distribution boards constructed for special use,
with British Standards marks indicating that special type usage.
D.
Comply with applicable BS safety standards pertaining to distribution board and
accessories, and enclosures.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SEC.11 - 1
E.
IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to installation of power
distribution board, cabinets, and cutout boxes.
F.
BS Compliance: Comply with BS Standards Publications for Electrical
Equipment.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including schematic drawings, layout
of enclosure and distribution of protective devices, technical specification,
installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of
distribution board required. Include data and sizes substantiating that units
comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
Handle distribution boards carefully to prevent breakage denting or scoring the
finish. Store distribution boards inside and protect from weather. When
necessary to store outdoors, elevate well above ground and enclose durable,
waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A.
Cubicle pattern main or sub-main power distribution boards shall be supplied by
the approved manufacturer and shall comply with Part 1 (IEC 439).
B.
The power distribution board enclosures shall be either pressed or fabricated
from sheet steel having a minimum thickness of 1.7 mm. The steel shall be
electro zinc plated, (Zintec) and shall have a minimum of priming coat,
undercoat and finishing coat of paint. The undercoat and finished coat shall be
stove enamelled.
C.
The power distribution board shall house the main circuit breaker, feeder circuit
breakers, instrumentation service entrance of incoming cables or bus-duct and
manual transfer switch.
D.
The power distribution board shall be dead front type, completely enclosed, self
supporting structure approximately 2.25 meter high, independent of wall
supports.
E.
The power distribution board construction shall be of the universal frame type
using die-formed members bolted and braced. The sides, top and rear shall be
covered with removable screw-on plates having formed edges all around.
F.
The power distribution board shall consist of the required number of vertical
sections bolted together to form one rigid distribution board incorporating
switching and protective devices of the number, ratings and type noted here in
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SEC.11 - 2
or shown on the drawings with all necessary interconnections, instrumentation
and control wiring.
G.
The power distribution board shall incorporate bus-bars which shall be of hard
drawn high conductivity copper. These bars shall be TPN + E of the size
required. In all cases the bus-bars shall be rated at not more than 1 ampere per
square mm or a minimum 50% of the full rated estimate total of MCCBs
connected to them. All bus-bar shall be supported on porcelain insulators, or on
laminated bakelite carriers to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short
circuit conditions when directly connected to a power source having the
indicated available short circuit current.
H.
Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the distribution
board shall be furnished when required. All groups of control wires leaving the
distribution board shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable
numbering strips.
I.
An earthing bus and lugs shall be furnished firmly screwed to each vertical
section structure and shall extend the entire length of the distribution board.
J.
The distribution board shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall
be capable of being rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly
to the floor without the used of floor sills.
K.
The distribution board shall contain a glanding plate at top and/or bottom of the
board to allow easy terminating of cable glands with room to install and connect
cable trays etc.
L.
The Construction shall allow easy access to all terminations, main device
connections, current transformers, other devices and all main bus bolted
connections for installation and maintenance of cables and the power
distribution boards without requiring access from rear.
2.02
A.
2.03
MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
The main circuit breaker shall be a fixed mounted front removable or
withdrawable air type as indicated on the drawings and specified in section
12.00 Protective Devices.
FEEDER BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
The feeder protective devices shall be moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) as
shown on the drawings and described in Section 16130 Protective Devices and
as shown on drawings.
B.
Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and
protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with
each other. Large, permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each
breaker in a uniform position and equip each breaker with a circuit card holder
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SEC.11 - 3
and neatly printed card identifying the circuit. Tripped indication shall be
clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF.
Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors
will be required to add breakers.
C.
2.04
A.
The feeder or branch devices shall be removable from the front and shall be
individually mounted with the necessary device line and load connections front
accessible.
METERING AND INSTRUMENTATION
All power distribution boards shall be provided with the following digital
instruments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Three current transformers
One volt meter 0 - 250 volts, 1% accuracy with 4 position selector
switch.
Three ammeters, 1% accuracy
One power factor meter
One kWh meter (only for main distribution boards).
The current transformers and the ammeter shall be rated for the distribution
board capacity.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power distribution boards, including electrical connections, in accordance
with the Manufacturer's written instruction, applicable with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.
B.
Co-ordinate installation of power distribution boards with cable and raceway
installation work.
C.
Install only in permanently dry locations away from all mechanical and public
health services.
D.
Anchor enclosures firmly to structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently mechanically secured.
E.
Check ratings of all circuit protection devices.
F.
Provide electrical connection within enclosures.
G.
Fill out power distribution boards directory card upon completion of installation
work.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SEC.11 - 4
A.
Prior to energisation of circuitry, check all accessible connections to
manufacturer's torque specifications.
B.
Prior to energisation of power distribution boards, check phase-to-phase and
phase-to-neutral/ earth insulation resistance levels to ensure the minimum
requirements are fulfilled.
C.
Prior to energisation, check power distribution boards for electrical continuity of
circuits, and for short circuits.
D.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energise power distribution boards and
demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 11
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SEC.11 - 5
SECTION 12
LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
C.
All MCCB and MCB's shall be of the same manufacturer.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of protective device work is indicated on drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of protective devices in this section include the following:-
1.03
1.
Air circuit breakers
2.
Moulded case circuit breakers
3.
Miniature circuit breakers
4.
Residual current circuit breaker
5.
Cartridge fuses
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND
SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this
Contractor.
B.
Manufactures shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
1.04
A.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of protective devices of types,
sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 10 years.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SEC.12
-1
with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.
C.
IEE Compliance: Comply IEE requirements as applicable to construction and installation
of protective devices.
D.
BS Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of the BS Standards publications
for moulded case miniature and power type circuit breakers.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on protective devices, including catalogue cuts,
time current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements.
B.
Maintenance Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses,
amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than one unit of each.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
A.
The air circuit breakers shall comply with BS 4752 (IEC 157.1) for ratings 1600 A and
above.
B.
The air circuit breaker shall be front removable or withdrawable type with current monitor
and solid state sensor for phase and earth sensing protection. The static sensor shall have
adjustable settings for each of the following tripping characteristics:1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.02
Long - delay pick up point
Long - delay tripping time
Short - delay pick up point (Instantaneous protection)
Earth point pick up
Earth tripping time
Extra facilities may be required such as shunt trips, undervoltage release, auxiliary
switches, self and remote indications monitor, motorized for remote control, load
monitoring, measurement of phase currents, maximum current and fault currents.
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB's) shall comply with BS 3871: Part 2 for ratings up
to 100A and BS 4752 (IEC 157.1) for ratings above 100A. They shall be of the quickmake, quick-break, trip-free, thermal magnetic adjustable releases or with solid state trip
units complete with De-ion arc grids, alloys contacts and inter-pole contacts. All units
shall incorporate a visual indication of open or closed contacts.
B.
Extra facilities may be required, such as shunt trips, under-voltage release, auxiliary
switches, remote indications or tripping, residual current protection or special calibrations.
Such extra facilities shall be specified elsewhere in this specification or on the drawings.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SEC.12
-2
C.
2.03
The Contractor shall supply 1 no. spare MCCB of every current rating and type used on
the Project. These spare MCCB's shall be handed over to the Employer/Client, and signed
for upon practical completion of the works.
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)
A.
Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall be plastic moulded units incorporating thermal
magnetic protection against overloads and short circuits, and shall comply with BS 3871
Part 1. The tripping mechanism shall be designed to provide delays operation on overload
and instantaneous operation under fault condition. Breakers shall have positive ON/OFF
indication, be "trip free" and shall trip to the full off position under overload and/or short
circuits. Triple pole units shall be used for three phase circuits. All multiple breakers shall
have an integral common trip bar as standard.
B.
The circuit breakers shall be grouped and mounted on removable cradles. Each group
shall be connected to a common bus bar of the appropriate phase.
C.
Where the fault level of the system is such that the use of MCBs is not acceptable, then
moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) as specified elsewhere shall be utilised.
D.
5 Nos. BMCs of each type and rating.
E.
The Contractor shall supply 1 no. spare RCCB of every current rating, sensitivity and type
used on the project. These spare RCCB shall be handed over to the Employer/Client, and
signed for, upon practical completion of the works.
2.04
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER
A.
Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) shall comply with BS 4293 and BS 3871 - Part 1
and shall generally comprise a solid state sensing device, trip coil/mechanism, contact
system/switching mechanism.
B.
The sensitivity of the breaker shall be 300, 30, 10 or 5 mA maximum tripping time of 30
ms.
C.
Each breaker shall incorporate a test circuit with a test button to simulate fault conditions.
D.
The combined units shall be compatible with other MCBs installed within distribution
boards.
E.
The Contractor shall supply 1 no. spare RCCB of every current rating, sensitivity and type
used on the project. These spare RCCB shall be handed over to the Employer/Client, and
signed for, upon practical completion of the works.
2.05
A.
CARTRIDGE FUSE
Cartridge fuse links shall be of the high rupturing capacity (HRC) type and shall comply
with BS 88 Part 2 (IEC 269 - 2).
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SEC.12
-3
B.
Each HRC fuse link shall be ASTA certified for its claimed breaking capacity and shall be
so mounted that the current rating on each fuse link is clearly visible.
C.
The Contractor shall supply 5 No. spare HRC cartridge fuse links of every current rating
and type used on the project. These spare fuses shall be handed over to the
Employer/Client, and signed for, upon practical completion of the works.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and with recognised industry practices to ensure compliance with IEE and BS
Standards for installation of protective devices.
B.
Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work as necessary to interface
installation of protective devices with other work.
C.
Fasten circuit breakers without mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being
exerted by clamps, supports or cable.
D.
Set field-adjustable circuit breakers for trip settings as indicated, subsequent to installation
of devices.
E.
Install fuses, if any, in fused circuit breakers.
F.
Inspect circuit-breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary,
adjust units for free mechanical movement.
3.02
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prior to energisation of over current protective devices, test devices for continuity of
circuitry and for short-circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate
compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 12
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SEC.12
-4
SECTION 13
EARTHING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The extent of the earthing system is indicated on the Drawings and by the requirements of
this section.
B.
The earthing system shall take the form of TN-S.
1.03
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS and
SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this
Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract
documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of earthing equipments,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 15 years.
B.
Standards: All equipment furnished under these specifications shall conform to IEE and
BS.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturers data, illustrated leaflets of products, dimensions, fixing details, description
of products.
B.
Submit Master Equipment List in compliance with General Terms and Conditions and
Special Conditions.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EARTHING SYSTEM
SEC.13 - 1
1.06
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
All products shall be carefully packed to avoid damage during transit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
All earthing materials required shall be furnished new and undamaged in accordance with
the following requirements.
B.
Earth rods shall be of a diameter as shown on drawings and to BS standard.
C.
Earth rods of copper alloy or the 'copper weld' (copper clad rods constructed with a thick
copper exterior sleeve inseparably and permanently molten-welded to a central high
tensile steel core for rigidity) type shall be used to provide a reliable earthing system with
good corrosion resistance and high electrical conductivity with soft drawn bare stranded
copper wire earth cable used to form the earth grids or mats. PVC insulated copper
conductors shall be used for final connections from earth grids/mats to structures,
equipment etc. All copper to copper underground connections, splices, taps etc. should be
made by the exothermic weld process and the joint epoxy resin encapsulated before
burial.
D.
Cable shall be as follows:
1.
Bare:
Soft drawn copper, Class B stranding.
2.
Insulated:
Soft drawn copper, Class B stranding with green/yellow coloured
polyvinyl chloride insulation.
E.
Connections shall be made by exothermic welding process or equivalent. The earth
conductor in the conduit run shall be continued through the conduit run and bushing earth
connection and terminated on the panel board earthing.
F.
An earth electrode shall have an interconnected resistance to earth of not more than 5
ohms. Where this value is exceeded it shall be augmented by additional electrodes
connected in parallel spaced at approximately 4 metres apart until this value is reached.
G.
1.
Generator and generator equipment and emergency power distribution boards
shall be connected to mian earthing system.
2.
The Neutral of the Low Voltage winding of the transformer shall be connected to
earth bar in sub-station.
3.
Earthing bar of the main power distribution boards and L.V. cable armour shall be
connected to the main earth bar.
4.
The Low Voltage neutral shall be earthed at the source substation.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EARTHING SYSTEM
SEC.13 - 2
H.
I.
1.
The steel conduit systems, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic lighting
fixtures, cable trays, all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical systems, and
any other equipment or system components required by the latest BS code and
IEE regulations shall be earthed and the connection shall be made at the panel
boards bus and shall be extended to earth electrodes as hereinafter specified.
2.
The conduit system shall not be considered as continuous for earthing purposes. A
separate earth conductor shall be installed in the same conduit with the phase and
neutral conductors. The separate earth conductors shall be sized according to the
BS Code and IEE requirements. No earthing conductors shall be smaller than 2.5
mm2 unless this is part of a multicore cable. Where flexible connections are made
to equipment, earthing jumpers shall be provided. All connections of heavy gauge
steel conduit system shall be checked for good electrical continuity.
1.
All electrical equipment shall be connected to the earth grid with copper earth
conductor. The term "electrical equipment" shall include all metal enclosures
containing electrical connections or bare conductors excepts that individual
devices such as solenoids, pressure switches, and limit switches shall be exempt
from this requirement unless the device requires earthing for proper operation.
Large equipment such as power distribution board or motor control centers shall
be furnished with an earthing bus which the Contractor shall connect to the earth
grid. All earth connection surfaces shall be cleaned immediately prior to
connection. The Contractor shall provide all earthing material required but not
furnished with the equipment.
2.
Where earth grid extension conductors are indicated on the Drawings to be
provided for connection to electrical equipment, the Contractor shall connect the
bare earthing conductor to the equipment, earth bus, pad or lug. In addition to the
earth grid extension conductors, an earth cable to each end of the earth bus in each
assembly of power distribution board or panel boards. Where an earth conductor
is included with the phase conductors of power circuits, the earth conductor shall
be connected to the equipment earthing facilities and to the source earth bus.
Where an earth conductor is not included with the phase conductors, the
equipment shall be earthed by connecting a separate earth cable to the equipment
earthing facilities and to the tray earthing cable or source earth bus. Except where
otherwise indicated on the Drawings, integral parts of a cable assembly shall be
sized in accordance with the requirements of the IEE. All earth conductors
installed in conduit shall be insulated.
J.
Earthing bars shall be high conductivity, soft copper, cross section not less than 3 mm
thick by 25 mm wide.
K.
Exothermic welds shall comprise moulds, cartridges, materials, and accessories as
recommended by the manufacturer of the moulds for the items to be welded.
L.
Clamps, connectors, bolts, washers, nuts and other hardware used with the earthing
system shall be of copper.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EARTHING SYSTEM
SEC.13 - 3
3.01
A.
3.02
INSPECTION
The Contractor shall examine the area and conditions under which the earthing systems is
to be installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the timely and
proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until the conditions are
satisfactory in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
INSTALLATION
A.
Earth Rods: Where the ground conditions make it possible, earth rods shall be the
preferred earth. All earth rods shall be located in suitable locations and installed to the
depth requires to achieve stated resistance. Where the required earth rod length exceeds
2.5 metres, standard sections shall be welded together to provide an extended rod with
open true center line and a minimum of joint resistance. During welding, the earth rod
sections that have been welded shall be supported by a guide.
B.
CONDUCTORS:
1.
Exposed conductors shall be installed inconspicuously in vertical or horizontal
positions on supporting structures in close coordination with architectural layouts.
In all aesthetically important locations, the earthing conductor shall be covered, if
required with prior approval of the Engineer and as permissible by the standards.
When located on irregular supporting surfaces or equipment, the conductors shall
run parallel to or normal to the dominant surface.
2.
Conductors routed over concrete, steel or equipment surfaces shall be kept in
close contact with those surfaces by using fasteners located at intervals not
exceeding 1 meter.
3.
Standard sizes of stranded copper conductor used for earth continuity shall be
according to IEE wiring regulations.
4.
Suitable earthing facilities, acceptable to the Engineer, shall be furnished on
electrical equipment consist of compression type terminal connectors bolted to the
equipment frame or enclosure and providing a minimum of joint resistance.
C.
All earth rods shall have inspection pits as shown on drawings. The pit shall be
constructed from precast concrete. All connections to the earth rod shall exposed when
the cover is raised. Attach a "DANGER - ELECTRICITY" sign to the wall of the
inspection pit. Use English and Arabic white letters on red background. Inspection pit
cover shall be constructed from cast iron.
D.
Earthing conductors shall be installed in 50 mm PVC duct at entry points into building.
Duct route shall be from 1 m outside the building to concrete cable trench within building.
Conductors shall be clipped to side or base of trench.
E.
All connections between rods and earthing tape or cables shall be made by the exothermic
process which produces a fused joint. Bolted connections may be used for connection to
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EARTHING SYSTEM
SEC.13 - 4
removable items of equipment only.
Joints in copper tape shall be made by either welding or brazing.
Earth rods shall be driven with a cap driving stud. Earth conductors shall be buried to a
minimum depth of 800mm below finished grade.
Exposed earthing tape and conductors shall be securely fastened to the mounting surface
using copper or brass straps.
3.03
A.
3.04
EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE
The completed earthing system shall have sufficiently low impedance to limit the voltage
to earth and to facilitate the operation of the current protective devices in the circuit in
accordance with BS/IEE Wiring Regulation.
EARTH RESISTANCE
A.
Prior to connection of earth rods to the earthing system, the Contractor shall measure
earth resistance of individual earth rods, witnessed by the Engineer.
B.
After connection of earth rods to the earthing system, the Contractor shall measure earth
resistance from the earthing test point witnessed by the Engineer.
C.
The earth resistance measurement from the earthing system electrodes shall be done in the
hot season (end of August) or as acceptable to the Engineer. The earth resistance shall be
less than 1 Ohm.
3.05
COMMUNICATION & DATA EARTHING
A.
Low current system shall have an independent earthing system, adequate to ensure
satisfactory functioning of each system in accordance with the standards and equipment
manufacturers.
B.
The main earthing for low current systems shall be connected to a suitable size earth bar
to which all the low current systems shall be connected.
C.
1.
PABXs shall have an independent earthing system also meeting STC
requirements. Earthing cable inside building shall be 50 sq mm wire with
moisture and heat resistance PVC insulation to earth bus in telephone equipment
room.
2.
Provide one 35 sq.mm wire with moisture and heat resistant PVC insulation to
telephone service conduit.
3.
Provide one 4 sq.mm wire with moisture and heat resistant PVC insulation to
conduits termination at backboard/telephone terminal cabinets.
B.
Fire Alarm and Detection: Provide one 10 sq.mm wire with moisture and heat resistant
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EARTHING SYSTEM
SEC.13 - 5
PVC insulation in 1/2 in conduit to nearest earth bus.
C.
3.06
A.
3.07
Public Address, Sound and Call Systems: Provide one 10 sq.mm with moisture and heat
resistant PVC insulation in 20 mm conduit to nearest earth lug in equipment rack.
SUB-STATION EARTHING
All exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of all the installations shall be effectively
earthed in accordance with the "Regulations". The earthing of the distribution system shall
be made at the neutral point of the transformers at the sub-stations. The earthing of
substation shall be in accordance with electrical authority requirements.
SUPPLEMENTARY AND EQUI-POTENTIAL BONDING
A.
In accordance with chapter 547 of the IEE Regulations bonding conductors shall be
installed in appropriate locations to ensure all simultaneously accessible exposed or
extraneous conductive parts are at equal potential. The Contractor shall undertake such
tests and install such supplementary bonding conductors that are necessary to ensure
compliance with these requirements.
B.
Supplementary bonding conductors shall conform to the requirements of chapter 547-03
of the IEE Regulations and shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of 2.5 sq.mm
where mechanically protected and 4 sq.mm where not so protected.
C.
Main equi-potential bonding conductors shall conform to the requirements of Section
547-2 of the IEE Regulations and shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of 6 sq.mm.
3.08
A.
3.09
A.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
For lightning protection system earthing requirements see section 22.00.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Earth resistance tests shall be carried out after installation of the individual earthing
systems in accordance with the specification. The earth resistance tests shall be carried out
in accordance with chapter 713 of the IEE Regulations 16th Edition and readings obtained
officially recorded by all witnessing parties.
END OF SECTION 13
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EARTHING SYSTEM
SEC.13 - 6
SECTION 14
PANEL BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
A.
1.03
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This Specification is for extent of all types of lighting and power panel boards including
cabinets cut out boxes, as indicated by drawings, schedules and elsewhere within the
Specifications.
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND
SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this
Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their guarantees for work under this section. However, such
guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of panelboards and enclosure, of
types and sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
with electrical installation work similar to that requirement for the project.
C.
Special Use-Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special use, with British
Standards marks indicating that special type usage.
D.
Comply with applicable BS safety standards pertaining to panelboard and accessories, and
enclosures.
E.
IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets,
and cutout boxes. Comply with IEE articles pertaining to installation of wiring and
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
PANEL BOARDS
SEC.14 - 1
equipment in hazardous locations.
F.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
BS Compliance: Comply with BS Standards Publications for Electrical Equipment.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including and schematic drawings layout
enclosure and all accessories inside panelboards specifications, installation instruction and
general recommendations for each type of panelboard required. Include data
substantiating that units comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLE OF MATERIALS
Handle panelboards and enclosure carefully to prevent breakage, denting or scoring the
finish. Store panelboards and enclosure inside and protect from weather. When necessary
to store outdoors, elevate well above ground enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01
PANELBOARD CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide galvanised sheet cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and types as required. Construct
with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable indicating trim
clamps, and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with
concealed door hinges and door swings as indicated. Equip with interior circuit-directory
frame and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked grey enamel finish over a rust
inhibitor. Design enclosure for recessed or surface mounting as required by drawings.
Provide enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, and which mate
properly with panelboards to be enclosed.
B.
Bus bar connections for single-phase, three-wire panelboards bussing shall be such that
any two adjacent single pole breakers are connected to opposite polarities in such a
manner that two-pole breakers can be installed in any location. Three-phase, four-wire
bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually
connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three pole
breakers can be installed at any location. All current carrying parts of the bus assembly
shall be high drawn conductivity copper.
C.
Provide an insulated neutral bus for each panel for connection of both feeder and branch
circuit neutral wires. The neutral bus shall be of the proper size to accommodate the
number of circuits to be connected thereto.
D.
The components for the panelboards shall conform to the relevant details described in
other sections of these specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
PANEL BOARDS
SEC.14 - 2
A.
Install panelboards and enclosures, including electrical connections, in accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of the IEE Wiring
Regulations 16th Edition and in accordance with recognised industry practices to ensure
that products serve the intended function.
B.
Co-ordinate installation of panelboards and enclosure with cable and raceway installation
work.
C.
Install only in permanently dry locations away from all mechanical and public health
services.
D.
Anchor enclosure firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently mechanically secured.
E.
Check ratings of all circuit protection devices.
F.
Provide electrical connections within enclosures.
G.
Fill out panelboard's directory card upon completion installation works.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prior to energisation of circuiting, check all accessible connections to manufacturers
torque Specifications.
B.
Prior to energisation of panelboard, check phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral/earth
insulation resistance levels to ensure the minimum requirements are fulfilled.
C.
Prior to energisation, check panelboard for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short
circuits.
D.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energise panelboards and demonstrate
functioning in accordance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 14
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
PANEL BOARDS
SEC.14 - 3
SECTION 15
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
A.
1.03
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This Specification is for extent of motor control center including all types referred to the
drawings, schedules and elsewhere within this Specification. For controls and
instrumentation of HVAC equipment refer to Division 15 of this specification.
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND
SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this
Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motor control centers, of types
and sizes and rating required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
with electrical, and mechanical installation work similar to that required for the project.
C.
Special Use-Markings: Provide motor control center constructed for special use, with
British Standards marks indicating that special type usage.
D.
Comply with applicable BS safety standards pertaining to motor control center and
starters, and enclosures.
E.
IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to installation of motor control center,
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
SEC.15 - 1
cabinets, and cutout boxes. Comply with IEE articles pertaining to installation of wiring
and equipment in hazardous locations.
F.
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
BS Compliance: Comply with BS Standards Publications for Electrical Equipment.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including schematic drawings, layout of
enclosure and distribution of protective devices, and starters specification, installation
instructions and general recommendations for each type of motor control center required.
Include data substantiating that units comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
Handle motor control center carefully to prevent breakage denting or scoring the finish.
Store motor control center inside and protect from weather. When necessary to store
outdoors, elevate will above ground and enclose durable, waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01
CUBICLE CONSTRUCTION
A.
Cubicle pattern motor control centers (MCC) shall be supplied by the approval of
manufacturer and shall comply with BS 5486: Part 1 (IEC 439).
B.
The MCC enclosures shall be either pressed or fabricated from sheet steel having a
minimum thickness of 1.7 mm. The steel shall be electro zinc plated, (Zintec) and shall
have a minimum of priming coat, undercoat and finishing coat of paint. The undercoat
and finished coat shall be stove enamelled.
C.
The MCC shall house the main circuit breaker or switch, instrumentation and control
equipments, motor starter and protective devices.
D.
The MCC shall be multi cubicle type assembly self supporting structure approximately
2.25 meter high, independent of wall supports.
E.
The MCC construction shall be of the universal frame type using die-formed members
bolted and braced. The sides, top and rear shall be covered with removable screw-on
plates having formed edges all around.
F.
The MCC shall consist of the required number of vertical and horizontal sections bolted
together to form one rigid MCC incorporating switching, motor starters, control elements,
and protective devices of the number, ratings and type noted here in or shown on the
drawings with all necessary interconnections, instrumentation and control wiring.
G.
The MCC shall incorporate bus-bars which shall be of hard drawn high conductivity
copper. These bars shall be TPN + E of the size required. In all cases the bus-bars shall be
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
SEC.15 - 2
noted at not more than 1 ampere per square mm of a minimum 50% of the full rated
estimate total of MCCBs connected to them. All bus-bar shall be supported on porcelain
insulators, or on laminated bakelite carriers to withstand mechanical forces exerted during
short circuit conditions when directly connected to a power source having the indicated
available short circuit current.
H.
Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the MCC shall be
furnished when required. All groups of control wires leaving the motor control center
shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips.
I.
An earthing bus and lugs shall be furnished firmly screwed to each vertical section
structure and shall extend the entire length of the motor control center.
J.
The MCC shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being
rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the used
of floor sills.
K.
The MCC shall contain a glanding plate at top and/or bottom of the board to allow easy
terminating of cable glands with room to install and connect cable trays etc.
2.02
A.
2.03
MAIN INCOMING
The main incoming shall be a fixed mounted front removable or withdrawable type of air
moulded case type circuit breaker as indicated on the drawings.
MOTOR STARTERS AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
The motor starter shall be a fixed mounted on supporting structure. The units shall be as
described in section 16482 and as shown on drawings.
B.
The protective devices shall be of moulded case circuit breaker with short circuit
protective or cartridge fuse as described in section 16426 with special peculiarities to take
the in rush current and frequency starting.
2.04
A.
2.05
A.
RELAY AND CONTROL COMPARTMENT
The relay and control compartment shall be of one or more module of the motor control
center. It should equip all the automatic or servo devices include electromagnetic, logic
and static relays, and programmable controllers as described elsewhere in this
specification.
METERING AND INSTRUMENTATION
All MCCs shall be provided with the following instruments for monitoring of main
incoming supply:
1.
Three current transformers
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
SEC.15 - 3
2.
3.
4.
One volt meter 0 - 250 volts, 1% accuracy with 4 position selector switch.
Three ammeters, 1% accuracy
One power factor meter
The current transformers and the ammeter shall be rated for the MCC capacity.
B.
All outgoing feeders of the MCCs shall be provided with indication lamps, push buttons,
selector switches, hour counter meters, ammeters, relays, starters and other meters and
instruments as described is section 15171 and elsewhere in this specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install MCC, including electrical connections, in accordance with the Manufacturer's
written instruction, applicable with recognized industry practices to ensure that products
serve the intended function.
B.
Co-ordinate installation of MCC with cable, raceway installation work and mechanical
works.
C.
Install only in permanently dry locations away from all mechanical and public health
services.
D.
Anchor enclosures firmly to structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently
mechanically secured.
E.
Check ratings of all circuit protection devices.
F.
Provide electrical connection within enclosures.
G.
Fill out MCC directory card upon completion of installation work.
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prior to energisation of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's
torque specifications.
B.
Prior to energisation of MCC, check phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral/earth insulation
resistance levels to ensure the minimum requirements are fulfilled.
C.
Prior to energisation, check MCC for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short
circuits.
D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energise MCC and demonstrate functioning and
complete operations in accordance with requirements up to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 15
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
SEC.15 - 4
SECTION 16
MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This specification is for extent of motor starter work as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Types of motor starters in this section include the following:
1.03
1.
Direct-on-line (below 7.5 HP)
2.
Wye-Delta (7.5 HP and over)
3.
Auto Transformer (if specified by manufacturer)
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND
SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this
Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture motor starters, of types, ratings
and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.
C.
IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to construction and installation of motor
starters.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
MOTOR STARTERS
SEC.16 - 1
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on motor starters.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of motor starters showing accurately
scaled equipment layouts and spatial relationship to associated motors, and connections to
electrical power panels and feeds.
C.
Maintenance Stock, Fuses and Circuit Breakers: For types and ratings required, furnish
additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than 5
units of each.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
STARTERS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components
which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in
accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation.
B.
AC Fractional HP Manual Starters: Provide manual single-phase fractional HP motor
starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equipped with thermal
overload relay with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10% variation of nominal
overload rating, for protection of 220V motors of less than 1/2 HP. Provide starters with
quick-make quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms, green pilot lights, selector switches
for local lo remote control, start-stop push buttons, a manual reset push button; and with
toggle operated handle with handle lock-off.
C.
Direct-on-Line Starters: Direct-on-line starters to be used on motors below (7.5)
horsepower. All in accordance with BS requirements and having voltage ratings as
required and/or indicated on drawings/schedules.
D.
Star-Delta Starters: Provide Star-delta starters, of types, sizes, ratings, electrical
characteristics and BS sizes indicated. Construct starters with resistor-type closed-circuit
transition wiring, including three 3-pole contactors, adjustable electronic timer, and 3-pole
overload protection relay. Equip with START-STOP push button for control. Voltage
220V phase to phase as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS
A.
Install motor starters as indicated in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements for IEE standards, and BS "Standard of Installation", and in
accordance with recognised industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
B.
Coordinate with other work, motor and electrical wiring/cabling work, as necessary to
interface installation of motor starters with other work.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
MOTOR STARTERS
SEC.16 - 2
C.
Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any.
D.
Adjust the overload thermal relays and other adjustable components in MCC or motor
starter to match installed motor characteristics and other equipment.
3.02
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and where necessary, adjust units for
free mechanical movement.
B.
Touch-up scratched or marred surface to match original finish.
3.03
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energise motor starters and demonstrate functioning
and complete operations of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary
correct malfunctioning units.
END OF SECTION 16
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
MOTOR STARTERS
SEC.16 - 3
SECTION 17
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This specification is for extent of enclosed contactors as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Types of enclosed contactors in this section include the following:
1.03
1.
General purpose contactors.
2.
Lighting contactors.
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and
warranties for work under this Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers” Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motor starter, of types, ratings
and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.
C.
IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to construction and
installation of enclosed contactors.
1.05
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on enclosed contactors.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
SEC17 - 1
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of enclosed contactors showing
accurately scaled equipment layouts and spatial relationship to associated panels and
feeds.
C.
Maintenance Stock, Enclosed Contactors: For types and ratings required, furnish
additional conactors, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than 5
units of each.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS
A.
Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor.
B.
Coil Voltage: As indicated.
C.
Poles: As indicated.
2.02
LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A.
Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.
B.
Configuration: Mechanically & Electrically held.
C.
Coil Voltage: As indicated.
D.
Poles: As indicated.
E.
Contact Rating: As indicated.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A.
Pushbuttons and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, general duty type.
B.
Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2, push-to-test type.
C.
Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Class A300.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosed contactors as indicated in compliance with manufacturer’s written
instructions, applicable requirements for IEE standards, and BS “Standard of Installation”
and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
B.
Coordinate with other work, motor and electrical wiring/cabling work, as necessary to
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
SEC17 - 2
interface installation of enclosed contactors with other work.
3.02
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energise enclosed contactors and demonstrate
functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary correct
malfunctioning units.
END OF SECTION 17
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
SEC17 - 3
SECTION 18
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This specification is for extent of enclosed transfer switches as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Types of enclosed transfer switches in this section include the following:
1.
1.03
Automatic transfer switch
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and
warranties for work under this Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture motor starters, of types, ratings
and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects
with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.
C.
IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to construction and
installation of motor starters.
1.05
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, switch size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, operating logic, short circuit ratings,
dimensions, and enclosure details.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH
SEC.18 - 1
B.
1.06
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of Product.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Operation Data: Include instructions for operating equipment. Include instructions for
operating equipment under emergency conditions (when engine generator is running).
B.
Maintenance Data: Include routine preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule.
List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts.
1.07
A.
1.08
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The enclosed transfer switches shall comply with the application standards of UL, CSA,
ANSI, NFPA, IEEE, NEMA and IEC 947-6-1.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B.
Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs
provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components,
enclosure and finish.
1.09
A.
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Furnish service and maintenance of transfer switch for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
Provide two of each special tool required for maintenance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
Description:
equipment).
NEMA / 3R, automatic transfer switch (suitable for use as service
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH
SEC.18 - 2
B.
2.02
Configuration: Electrically operated, mechanically held transfer switch.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.
Service Conditions: NEMA 3R.
B.
Temperature: 50°C
C.
Altitude: 600m
2.03
RATINGS
A.
Voltage: 220 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 Hz.
B.
Switched Poles: 4
C.
Load Inrush Rating: Resistive load.
D.
Continuous Rating: As required.
E.
Interrupting Capacity: 150 percent of continuous rating.
F.
Withstand Current Rating: As required.
2.04
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES
A.
Indicating Lights: Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCE
AVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, SWITCH POSITION.
B.
Test Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source.
C.
Return to Normal Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to initiate manual transfer from
alternate to normal source.
D.
Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: normally open, normally closed.
E.
Normal Source Monitor: Monitor each line of normal source voltage and frequency;
initiate transfer when voltage drops below 85 percent or frequency varies more than 3
percent from rated nominal value.
F.
Alternate Source Monitor: Monitor alternative source voltage and frequency; inhibit
transfer when voltage is below 85 percent or frequency varies more than 3 percent from
rated nominal value.
G.
In-Phase Monitor: Inhibit transfer until source and load are within 15 electrical degrees.
H.
Switched Neutral: Overlapping contacts.
2.05
AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH
SEC.18 - 3
A.
Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: Upon initiation by
normal source monitor.
B.
Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engineer Generator: 0 to 6 seconds, adjustable.
C.
Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon initiation by normal source monitor and
permission by alternate source monitor.
D.
Time Delay Before Transfer to Alternate Power Source: 0 to 6 seconds, adjustable.
E.
Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source monitor.
F.
Time Delay Before Transfer to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source
monitor.
G.
Time Delay Before Engine Shut Down:
operation.
H.
Engine Exerciser: Start engine every 7 days; run for 30 minutes before shutting down.
Bypass exerciser control if normal source fails during exercising period.
I.
Alternate System Exerciser: Transfer load to alternate source during engine exercising
period.
2.06
0 to 30 minutes, adjustable, of unloaded
ENCLOSURE
A.
Enclosure: NEMA 3R.
B.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey enamel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
B.
3.03
A.
3.04
A.
EXAMINATION
Verify that surface is suitable for transfer switch installation.
INSTALLATION
Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 9.00.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
Prepare and start systems.
DEMONSTRATION
Provide systems demonstration.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH
SEC.18 - 4
B.
Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in bypass, normal and emergency modes.
END OF SECTION 18
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH
SEC.18 - 5
SECTION 19
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
This specification is for extent of interior and exterior lighting fixture work as indicated
by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of interior and exterior lighting fixtures in this section include the following:
1.03
1.
Incandescent & Spotlights
2.
Fluorescent & Compact Fluorescent luminaires
3.
Discharge Lamp Luminaires
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND
SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this
Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting fixtures of types and
ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 10 years.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation and experience on
projects with interior lighting fixtures similar to that required for this project.
IEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements as applicable to construction of
interior building for this project.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SEC.19 -1
D.
BS Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of BS standard publication
pertaining to lighting equipment.
E.
CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lamp ballast which comply with Certified Ballast
Manufacturers Association Standards and carry the CBM Label.
1.05
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data
1.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
1.06
A.
Submit manufacturer's data on interior and exterior lighting fixtures.
Submit dimensioned drawings of lighting fixture installations, including but not
necessary limited to, layout, relation to associated panelboards, and connections to
panelboards. Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for
each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order, with proposed
fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
Luminaries, lamps, and accessories shall be delivered to the job site wrapped in protective
covering and stored in a dry location free from dust or water, and in such a manner to
permit easy access for inspection and handling. Luminaries, lamps, and accessories shall
be handled carefully to prevent damage. Damaged items shall be replaced at no additional
cost.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
INCANDESCENT AND SPOTLIGHTS
A.
All lighting fittings shall be furnished complete with internal wiring, lamps and lamp
holders, leads, trim, rings, frames, hangers and reflectors.
B.
Lighting fittings shall be of sizes, types and ratings as indicated on drawings and
schedules.
C.
All wiring within the lighting fittings shall be suitable for the voltage, current and
temperature to which insulation will be subjected.
2.02
FLUORESCENT AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
A.
All luminaire control gear components and wiring shall be enclosed in a steel canopy,
protected from corrosion.
B.
Recessed, surface and suspended mounted luminaries shall be designed for use with
control gear having maximum case temperatures, installed in ambient temperatures and
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SEC.19 -2
conditions stated in BS standard.
C.
All luminaries shall be labelled where visible with the voltage, frequency, current rating to
include control gear and lamp(s), manufacturer's name and fixture type.
D.
All ballasts shall be of the electronic, quickstart dry type for the offices and switch start
ballasts (Deos starter) for other areas.
E.
Where reflector and white louvre assembly is specified, the reflector shall be constructed
from highly polished aluminum.
F.
All wiring within the luminaires shall be suitable for the voltage, current and temperature
to which insulation will be subjected.
G.
All luminaires shall be fitted with dry type high power factor capacitors correcting to 0.9
lagging and low noise features; type 1 class P; sound rated A, and with internal thermal
protection.
H.
The metal canopy shall be finished with a white high gloss stove enamelled paint.
I.
All luminaires shall be fitted with radio interference suppression.
2.03
DISCHARGE LAMP LUMINAIRE
A.
Discharge lamp luminaires shall be of a type as specified on the Drawings and schedule.
B.
They shall generally be of a type suitable for use with mercury vapour, sodium vapour or
metal halide type lamps and shall have integral control gear unless otherwise specified.
C.
Where control gear is to be separately mounted, it shall be completely enclosed in a metal
clad type enclosure complete with conduit entry facilities and fixing accessories.
D.
Power factor correction capacitors shall be supplied of adequate rating to provide an
overall circuit power factor not less than 0.85 lagging.
E.
Luminaire enclosures for internal use shall be fabricated from sheet steel,finished in a
corrosion and abrasion resistant paint finish or shall be of cast alloy similarly resistant to
corrosion or abrasion. All enclosures shall be complete with conduit or glanded cable
entry and all necessary support and fixing accessories.
F.
High Bay type luminaires shall be complete with a visor and/or wire guard to prevent a
displaced or fractured lamp falling to the surface below. Such visors and protective guards
together with the luminaire enclosure shall be provided with a safety chain in addition to
the normal suspension or fixing.
G.
Luminaires to be flush mounted in suspended ceilings shall be suitable for the ceiling
module.
H.
All wiring within the luminaires shall be suitable for the voltage, current, temperature to
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SEC.19 -3
which insulation will be subjected.
2.04
PROTECTION CLASSIFICATION
A.
All lighting fixtures enclosures shall be classified in accordance with BS 5490 using the
IP systems and two digit number code.
B.
All lighting fixtures for outdoor use shall be dustproof and weatherproof as classification
IP 54 minimum.
C.
All lighting fixtures used in wet areas shall be of classification IP44 minimum.
D
All lighting fixtures for use in hazardous areas shall conform to the requirements of BS
5345 and BS 5501 and be appropriate to the classification of the hazard.
2.05
A.
LAMPS
Every incandescent lighting point shall be complete with the number and size of lamps
required and each lamp shall be suitable for the mains voltage.
Unless otherwise indicted lamps shall be coiled coil, pearl finish of British Manufacture
to BS 161, BS 555 and BS 1853 Parts 1 & 2. Up to and including 150 watts, lamps shall
have bayonet caps, larger sizes shall be fitted with the appropriate ES cap for general
service.
Special purpose high output lamps shall consist of a tungsten filament housed in a
halogen filled quartz tube giving a light output of 17-22 lumens/watt and a life expectancy
of 2000 hours.
B.
Tubular fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements of BS 1853 and shall be of
the bi-pin type. They shall be of 26mm diameter T8 - tri-phosphor krypton filled type
according to the design of luminaire in which they are to be mounted.
The standard colour shall be as selected by the Architect/Engineer.
C.
High pressure mercury vapour discharge lamps shall generally conform to BS 3677 and
shall be MBF style in ratings 50W to 125W to MBFI style in ratings 250W to 1000W.
The lamps shall be suitable for operation in cap position as denoted in the luminaire in
which they are intended to be used.
D.
High pressure sodium vapour discharge lamps shall be of high pressure type (SON).
Lamps shall be suitable for operation in the cap position required in the luminaire in
which they are intended to be used.
E.
Compact fluorescent lamps shall be of the types as indicated on drawings.
Lamps shall be suitable for operation in the cap position as denoted in the luminaire in
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SEC.19 -4
which they are intended to be used.
F.
Metal halide discharge lamps shall be suitable for operation in cap position as denoted in
the luminaire in which they are intended to be used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
INSPECTION
The Contractor must examine the areas and conditions in which the luminaires will be
installed and correct or bring to the attention of the Engineer any unsatisfactory conditions
before installation commences.
GENERAL
A.
Install lighting fixtures at locations as indicated in accordance with fixture manufacturer's
written instructions, applicable requirements of IEE and BS "Standard of Installation",
and with recognised industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.
B.
The attention of the Contractor is directed to the various types of ceiling finishes e.g.,
exposed tee, concealed spline, plaster, etc. Perusal of the ceiling finish schedule is
mandatory.
C.
All fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps. Permanent lighting fixtures shall be
installed after completion of all masonry and structural work and shall not be used for
lighting purposes during construction. The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting as
herein before specified.
D.
Mounting heights of fixture are, in most cases, indicated on the drawings. Where job
conditions require mounting heights different from those specified or shown to avoid
equipment or structural features, etc., such changes in mounting heights shall be as
directed by the Engineer.
E.
Lighting fixtures shall be set plumb, square, level and in alignment and shall be secured in
accordance with manufacturer's directions and approved shop drawings.
F.
The Contractor executing the work under this section of the Specifications shall examine
the architectural, mechanical and structural drawings to acquaint himself with the
structural features of the building and the location of pipes, ducts, etc., which would alter
the location or spacing of outlets to the Engineer for a decision as to the proper location.
This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper reinforcement of any ductwork
necessary to carry the added weight of lighting fixtures where same must be mounted on
the bottom of such ductwork.
G.
All conductor installation shall be suitable for the maximum temperatures they will be
subjected to, in luminaire canopies and outlet boxes, etc. Cables shall be kept clear from
the surface if the temperature can reach 90°C.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SEC.19 -5
3.03
A.
3.04
INTERNAL LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION
Luminaires shall be arranged for surface, recess or pendant mounting as required by the
general structure and decor of the building. Where a suspended ceiling is provided, recess
mounted luminaires shall be fitted unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings.
SURFACE MOUNTED LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION
A.
All surface mounted luminaires shall be fixed to a surface or flush mounted metal conduit
box. Direct surface mounted luminaires shall be spaced a distance of 12mm from the
mounting surface by using extension rings.
B.
The connection between the permanent wiring and the luminaire shall be made using heat
resistant flexible sheathed cable as per BS6141. The cable shall be connected using a
porcelain or heat resistant connector block housed in the conduit box.
3.05
RECESS MOUNTED LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION
A.
All recess mounted luminaires shall preferably be suspended independently of the ceiling
in which they are fitted. Where such an arrangement is not possible or practical, the
luminaires shall be fitted in and supported by the ceiling. The Contractor shall ensure that
the suspended ceiling is suitably strengthened to carry the additional weight.
B.
The connection between the permanent wiring and the luminaire shall be made using a
heat resistant flexible cable inside flexible metal conduit.
C.
The flexible cable shall be three core type, one core being used as the circuit protective
and earth bonding conductor. Where the cable forms the connection to a tungsten lamp
luminaire it shall be heat resistant flexible sheathed cable as per BS6141.
3.06
PENDANT MOUNTED INSTALLATION
A.
Tube pendants shall be mounted from a ball and socket type swivel dome cover plate
fitted to a ceiling mounted metal conduit box and metal conduit of minimum diameter
20mm. The conduit entry to the luminaire shall be fitted with a lock nut and a flexible
copper bond shall be provided from the fixed conduit installation to the pendant tube.
B.
Proprietary type pendant luminaires, whether single or multi-lamp units shall be bonded
and provided with suitable terminations to ensure reliable earth continuity throughout all
exposed metalwork.
C.
Plain pendants shall consist of a multi-terminal ceiling rose conforming to BS 67, a
flexible cord of heat resistant cable and a heat resistant lampholder.
D.
Luminaires shall not be suspended by means of flexible cables with the exception of
certain lightweight domestic and commercial types of luminaires, which shall be agreed
with the Engineer.
E.
Suspended luminaires shall be supported by means of purpose manufactured metal
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SEC.19 -6
supports.
F.
3.07
White break joint rings shall be provided between the fittings and conduit box to mask the
joints as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.
3.08
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been
energised, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with
retesting.
B.
At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are
observed to be noticeably dimmed after contractor's use and tested.
C.
All luminaires shall be functionally tested to prove that they operate satisfactorily.
D.
Check and record illumination levels in accordance with design requirements.
3.09
EARTHING
A.
Provide equipment earthing connections for all lighting fixtures.
B.
Separate earthing wire should be used between any fixture and panel board. Minimum
size 2.5mm2.
END OF SECTION 19
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SEC.19 -7
SECTION 20
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other section of the specifications for requirements which affect work of this
section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
C.
Comply with the requirements of NFPA standards and life safety codes for the location of
emergency and exit lights.
1.02
A.
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This section applied to exit lighting units will be provided to facilitate orientation within,
and escape from, the building upon failure of the normal lighting system. Dependent on
their location within the building the units will be powered from standby generator set and
by individual self-contained batteries as indicated in the drawings.
1.03
A.
GUARANTEES
Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND
SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this
Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.
1.04
A.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCES
Equipment shall be purchased only from manufacturers specializing in the equipment
described herein.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's illustrated leaflets, drawings, technical data covering the equipment
required.
B.
Submit Equipment and spare parts lists.
C.
Operation and Maintenance: Comply with the relevant section for the provision of
Operation and Maintenance manuals.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SEC.20 - 1
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
A.
Pack equipment for protection during transportation and storage.
B.
Store in dry, clean location.
1.07
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Self-contained Emergency Lighting Fittings shall be installed along corridors, staircases,
etc. leading to exits from the buildings.
B.
In the event of main and essential power failures to the areas served by the emergency
lighting, emergency lighting shall switch on automatically and independently of the on/off
mode of the normal light switch.
C.
Selected lighting fittings designated emergency lighting fittings shall be complete with
batteries, charging units and inverter unit as appropriate or standby generator system as
shown on Drawings.
D.
On restoration of the normal supply, the fitting shall return to operating mode prior to the
power interruption.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
EQUIPMENT
A.
All equipment shall be standard supplied by a single manufacturer.
B.
The battery shall be a self-contained sealed nickel cadmium pack of 12 volt 4 Ah capacity
or for (3) hours continuous operation of the lamp without any deration, whichever is
more.
C.
The charger/inverter module shall be capable of the following from a completely
discharged condition:
1.
2.
3.
Full capacity charge in 24 hours or less
60% capacity charge in 12 hours or less
30% capacity charge in 6 hours or less
D.
LED to indicate power 'supply' on.
E.
Provide fuses in the unswitched power supply and in the battery supply.
F.
The changeover voltage from normal power supply to emergency shall be between 60% 85% of nominal normal voltage.
G.
A 3 position test key shall provide the following facilities:
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SEC.20 - 2
H.
2.02
1.
Normal:
Operation as described earlier
Key removable
2.
Test:
Isolates unswitched normal supply, energizing fluorescent tube
from battery supply circuit.
Key trapped.
3.
Isolate:
Isolates normal switched and unswitched power supply. The
fluorescent will be energised from the battery/inverter.
Key trapped.
The batteries/inverter and all circuit accessories shall be enclosed in a steel box.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS - SELF CONTAINED
A.
Unless otherwise specified in the particular specifications, all self contained emergency
light fittings shall be of the maintained type. Lamps shall be fluorescent and shall operate
in the emergency mode for a period not less than 3 hours.
B.
Each unit shall contain within its enclosure the lamp, emergency batteries, constant
voltage charging units, automatic changeover and an LED to show that the charging
circuit and the DC system are in good order.
C.
All units shall have fire resisting diffusers, complying with the relevant standards and
Codes of Practice mentioned elsewhere in this specification.
D.
Type of emergency lighting to be used is specified either in this specification or indicated
on the drawings.
E.
Every unit shall be connected to a permanently live supply of the LOCAL lighting circuit.
A switch shall be installed in the permanent live supply so that regular testing can be
carried out.
F.
Where required for exit and emergency escape routes, lights shall be provided with sign
plate as approved by Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
3.02
A.
INSPECTION
The Contractor must examine the areas and conditions in which the luminaires will be
installed and correct or bring to the attention of the Engineer any unsatisfactory conditions
before installation commences.
INSTALLATION
Install lighting fixtures at locations as indicated in accordance with fixture manufacturer's
written instructions, applicable requirements of IEE and BS "Standard of Installation",
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SEC.20 - 3
and with recognised industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.
B.
All fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps. Emergency lighting fixtures shall be
installed after completion of all masonry and structural work and shall not be used for
lighting purpose during construction.
C.
Mounting heights of fixture are, in most cases, indicated on the drawings. Where job
conditions require mounting heights different from those specified or shown to avoid
equipment or structural features, etc., such changes in mounting heights shall be as
directed by the Engineer.
D.
Lighting fixtures shall be set plumb, square, level and in alignment and shall be secured in
accordance with manufacturer's directions and approved shop drawings.
E.
The Contractor executing the work under this section of the Specifications shall examine
the architectural, mechanical and structural drawings to acquaint himself with the
structural features of the building and the location of pipes, ducts, etc., which would alter
the locations or spacing of outlets to the Engineer for a decision as to the proper location.
This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper reinforcement of any ductwork
necessary to carry the added weight of lighting fixtures where same must be mounted on
the bottom of such ductwork.
F.
All conductor installation shall be suitable for the maximum temperatures they will be
subjected to, in luminaire canopies and outlet boxes, etc. Cables shall be kept clear from
the surface of the temperature can reach 90°C.
3.03
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Upon completion of installation of emergency lighting fixtures, and after building
circuitry has been energised, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and
compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and
proceed with retesting.
B.
At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are
observed to be noticeably dimmed after contractor's use and tested.
C.
All emergency lights shall be functionally tested to prove that they operate satisfactorily
for the purpose and give required illumination level as per standards at the end of 3 hours
continuous operation.
Check and record illumination levels in accordance with design requirements.
D.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SEC.20 - 4
3.05
A.
B.
EARTHING
Provide equipment earthing connections for all emergency lights.
Separate earthing wire should be used between any fixture and panel board. Minimum
size 2.5mm2.
END OF SECTION 20
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SEC.20 - 5
SECTION 21
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other sections of the specifications for requirements which affect work of this
section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The work under section covers the requirements for the design, testing, fabrication and
furnishing of complete and operated diesel electric generating system including all
devices and equipment shown on the drawings and specified herein or as required for the
satisfactory operation and service.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Standards:
All electrical work shall comply with all government rules and regulations and shall be
carried out in accordance with the relevant standards and specifications issued by the
appropriate authority, and in addition to the British & American Standards.
B.
Regulations:
All electrical installations shall be designed in accordance with the following regulations:
1.04
A.
1.
I.E.E. Regulations for Electrical Installations 16th Edition, as published by the
Institution of Electrical Engineers, London.
2.
NFPA requirements.
3.
International Electro technical Commission (IEC).
EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
General:
The Emergency Power Diesel Generators shall be skid mounted and located in an
acoustically treated space to reduce noise level and annoyance to residents within the
locations.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 1
B.
Design Criteria:
The diesel generator shall incorporate the following basic design criteria:
Output power rating
-
As shown on the drawings. The generator shall
have this standby power rating of standard module
size for continuous duty after taking into account
all relevant derating factors and power consumed in
auxiliaries.
Nominal Output Voltage
-
As shown on the drawings.
Frequency
-
50 Hertz
Speed
-
1500 or 1800 r.p.m.
Automatic Voltage Regulation-
± 1.5% (from no-load to 100% load and from 0.8
p.f. lagging to unity p.f.)
Total Harmonic Distortion
AC Waveform
-
Less than 4% at full load
Overload Capability
-
10% for 1 hour in 12 hours
Noise Criteria
-
80 dbA at 7.5 m in any direction
Maximum Starting Time
-
10 seconds
In addition full account shall be taken of the nature of the loads particularly motor loads
such as air conditioning, fans, pumps, etc. that are likely to be connected to the generator.
1.05
GUARANTEES
A.
Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and
warranties for work under this Contract.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Accept engine generator set and accessories on site in crates and verify damage.
B.
Protect equipment form dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy plastic.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 2
A.
Submit shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection
point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and
combustion air requirements, and electrical diagrams including schematic and
interconnection diagrams.
B.
Submit product data showing dimensions, weights, ratings interconnection points, and
internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery
charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, fuel tank, sound attenuation, sand filter,
radiator, and remote enunciator.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions inside container.
D.
Submit operation and maintenance data include instructions for normal operation, routine
maintenance requirements, service manuals for engine and fuel tank, oil sampling and
analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures.
1.08
A.
SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall furnish the spare parts normally provided with engine generator set
for a period of two years as recommended by the manufacturer, plus the following:
1.
One set of spark plugs, ignition points and condenser as applicable.
2.
Two filters for all services (fuel, oil and air)
3.
Two spare injectors or equivalent
4.
One fuel injection pump complete
5.
Three fuses for each rating.
B.
Spare parts shall be packed in suitable containers or boxes bearing labels clearly
designating the contents and the piece of equipment for which they are intended.
C.
Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator set.
Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
GENERAL
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of standby generating set and ancillary
equipment including fuel day tanks, fuel transfer equipment, interconnecting cabling and
pipe work necessary for the proper functioning of the installation, both mechanically and
electrically, to meet the following requirements listed below.
RATING
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 3
A.
2.03
The set shall be continuously rated taking into consideration the site conditions (altitude,
temperature, etc.). The rating of the generator shown on the drawings is minimum and
subject to the submission and approval of the final load calculations considering the
approved electrical and mechanical equipment fed from the emergency supply to justify
the rating of the generator. 20% spare capacity shall be allowed for future expansion.
MECHANICAL DETAILS
A.
Lifting eyes are required on all items of equipment over 25kg in weight which may need
removal.
B.
No critical speed of the complete shaft assembly shall be within 15% of rated speed. All
moving live parts are to be adequately guarded to prevent injury to personnel.
2.04
ALTERNATOR
A.
The alternator shall be to BS 4999 and BS 5000, Class `F' insulation, screen protected,
drip proof, rotating field, brushless type, driven through a solid half coupling and bolted
direct to the engine flywheel or driving motor as applicable.
B.
The AC exciter and rotating rectifier unit shall be overhung on the non-driven end of the
alternator.
C.
The alternator shall be capable of giving a continuous output at 0.80 power factor lagging
at the system rated voltage specified earlier.
D.
Steady state voltage shall be maintained to ± 2.5% under any condition from cold start to
maximum working temperature, from zero load to 10% overload, and from unity p.f. to
0.8 p.f. lagging.
E.
After a load change from 0 to 35% rated load the voltage shall not change by more than ±
15% and shall recover to 94% of rated value within 15 seconds.
F.
Harmonics distortion shall not exceed 5%.
G.
The windings shall be connected in "star". The ends of the windings and neutral shall be
brought out to a suitable terminal box.
H.
The machine shall be of the two bearing type, generously rated, grease lubricated and
efficiently sealed.
I.
The automatic voltage regulator shall be provided with an adjustment for setting the level
of the controlled voltage to within ± 5% of the normal voltage and shall be capable of
maintaining its adjustment for long periods without attention once the set is running.
J.
The alternator shall be capable of withstanding a short circuit current of 300% F.L.C. for
3 seconds.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 4
K.
The alternator shall be capable of carrying a 50 percent overload current, with the field set
for normal excitation, for one minute and a 10 percent over load for one hour at rated
power factor without being subject to damage.
L.
The alternator shall have a main circuit breaker with all required accessories, furnished as
an integral part of the unit and installed as close as possible to the main terminals of the
alternator.
2.05
ENGINE
A.
Engine may be naturally aspirated or turbo charged but must be capable of accepting full
load within the required time limitation of 15 seconds.
B.
The operating speed shall not exceed 1800 r.p.m.
C.
Governing shall be in accordance with B.S. 5514 to Class A2 except that speed drop shall
be limited to ± 2%.
D.
Manual adjustment shall be provided for ± 5% rated speed.
E.
Steady load speed band shall not exceed 1% of rated speed.
F.
Engine shall be 4 stroke, direct injection, radiator cooled and with forced lubrication from
wet sump with automatic oil make-up system. Full flow oil filters shall be supplied with
differential pressure alarm and gauge.
G.
Sufficient reserve shall be allowed in the lubrication system to allow 36 hours running
without replenishment. Oil cooling shall be by heat exchanger. Simple oil drainage
facilities shall be provided.
H.
Thermostatically controlled jacket water heaters shall be provided. The nominal
temperature setting shall be 45oC but the control should be adjustable between 30oC and
50oC. Vee type engines shall be provided with a heater in each bank to ensure uniform
heating.
Valve seats shall be replaceable.
I.
Fuel available conforms to B.S. 2869 Class A2.
Five micron dual fuel filters shall be supplied in the fuel line complete with on line
changeover facilities.
Induction shall be via heavy duty oil bath air filters or suitably rated disposable paper
element type.
J.
A fail-safe mechanical overspeed trip facility shall be provided, set at 115% rated speed.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 5
Suitable means shall be provided for turning the crankshaft and the associated generator
by hand.
K.
The following dial or digital type engine instruments shall be provided:1.
Engine speed indicating tachometer, reading rev/min
2.
Lubricating oil pressure, reading k Pa
3.
Cooling water temperature, reading degrees C
4.
Service Hours counter
5.
Fuel pressure, reading k Pa
These instruments shall be mounted on a suitable panel fixed to the engine.
2.06
FLYWHEEL
The flywheel shall be dynamically balanced and shall be capable of being rotated at 125%
and 95% of rated speed during normal running.
2.07
GOVERNOR
A.
The engine shall incorporate an adjustable isochronous electronic or hydraulic governor.
B.
The governor shall be controlled manually at the engine control panel, from the associated
generator switchgear equipment by the governor control switch or automatically.
C.
The governor shall provide adjustable speed settings from 58 to 62 Hz, adjustable speed
regulation from zero to 5% , adjustable load limit from zero to 125% of unit rating.
D.
The governor shall permit parallel operation of any and all other generating units
furnished under this contract and with an infinite bus.
E.
The governor shall be cable of maintaining the frequency constant within plus or minus
0.25% for any constant load between 25% and 100% generator rating. After any sudden
load change of not more than 25 percent of rated load, the governor shall re-establish
stable operating conditions in not less than 4 seconds. Surging period shall not exceed 3.6
Hz.
2.08
A.
EXCITER
The exciter shall be a brushless type using a rotating, fused rectifier bridge circuit. The
three phase, full wave, rectifying unit shall be mounted on the generator motor shaft. the
exciter shall be capable of supplying the field excitation current requirements for the
generator and delivering 150 percent of its rated current for one minute without being
subject to damage. The complete exciter shall be enclosed and protected by a removable
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 6
cover.
B.
2.09
A diode failure detector shall form part of the exciter circuit.
AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A.
The automatic voltage regulator (AVR) shall be of completely solid state design.
B.
A maximum voltage drop of 3 percent of rated voltage will be allowed for 0 to 110
percent of rated load, but shall be a minimum consistent with the requirements for
satisfactory parallel operation. The voltage at any constant load from 0 to 100 percent
load shall be within a band of 1 percent of rated voltage.
C.
Transient voltage dip after a sudden 25 percent load stop-change increase and transient
voltage rise after a sudden 25 percent load decrease shall not exceed 5 percent of nominal
voltage. For this requirement, the initial load shall be taken to be within the range of 50 to
85 percent of actual operating capacity under conditions of any generating set or any
combination of generating sets, applicable, operating on the bus.
D.
The voltage shall recover to within 1 percent steady-state band specified above, within 1/2
second after initiation of the load changes specified above.
E.
The AVR shall be equipped with cross-current compensation and an adjustable droop
range from 0 to 5 percent for parallel operation.
F.
The exciter shall be complete with all components necessary to provide the excitation,
and shall be designed without the use of electronic tubes or electrolytic capacitors.
G.
The exciter shall utilize a multiphase, amplifier controlled silicon rectifier and a three
phase exciter power transformer for receiving the power from the generator output.
H.
Provision shall be made for relay-operated pilot excitation or field flashing that receives
its power from the storage battery, or from permanent magnets.
I.
Special provision shall be made to ensure that the silicon rectifiers are not subject to peak
inverse voltages in excess of their rating under any condition of system operations,
including transient conditions.
J.
The system shall be designed to sustain 300 percent of rated current for 3 seconds when a
symmetrical short circuit is applied at the generator terminals.
K.
The AVR shall have a plus or minus 10 percent voltage adjustment range capable of
being controlled automatically or by remotely mounted adjusting devices.
L.
The AVR shall be equipped with a variable control for setting the degree of stability of
reactive current during parallel operation. The maximum difference in reactive kVA of
one generating unit and that of the average of the units shall not exceed 5 percent of the
continuous kVA rating of any one unit. The requirements shall apply under any load
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 7
condition from 20 to 125 percent of combined rating at rated frequency and at any power
factor between 0.8 lagging and unity.
M.
The AVR shall be equipped with a switch selectable (or link) rheostat for field current
limiting with an adjustable setting. A time delay shall be included in the circuit so that
there is no interference with normal field forcing.
N.
The prevent over fluxing of the machine at low speeds, a frequency fall of circuit shall be
included in the AVR to progressively reduce the generator when the frequency falls below
90 percent of the nominal. This facility shall be selected by a link on the AVR.
O.
An electronic manual voltage regulator. with potentiometer control on the main control
panel, shall be provided. A manual/automatic selector switch shall be provided on the
main control panel.
2.10
STARTING SYSTEM
A.
Electric starting shall be provided to all machines and shall comprise 24 volt equipment
including starter motor, alternator and rectifier, lead acid batteries of ample capacity and
mains powered constant voltage charging equipment and all connecting wiring.
B.
Batteries are to be mounted on each set and capable of withstanding the following starting
load:- five 20 second starts in succession in any four hour period.
C.
A battery charging panel for each starter battery shall be provided and shall be capable of
recharging the battery from discharged state in 6 hours and maintaining it in a charged
state when the set is standing idle. The battery of each generator set shall be charged from
the own set mounted alternator/rectifier when that particular set is running.
D.
The batteries shall be used to supply auxiliary relays as required whose operation must
not be affected whilst supplying starting current. Auxiliary circuits are to be protected by
fuses.
2.11
EXHAUST SYSTEM
A.
The exhaust system shall be manufactured in heavy quality steel tubing to BS 1387, fitted
with suitable robust gas-tight flexible sections close to the engine to allow engine
movement and to reduce the transmission of engine vibrations to the remainder of the
exhaust system and the surroundings. Bends shall have a minimum radius of three times
the diameter of the tube. As far as possible, flexible sections shall be vertical, free from
bends and have sufficient length or slack to allow free movement without damage.
B.
Silencers shall be of the heavy duty baffle and absorption, residential type, so designed
and installed as to reduce noise to the minimum level as allowed by the local and
international standards, without appreciably impairing the working efficiency of the
engine.
C.
Vibration isolating equipment shall be provided with each silencer for use where they are
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 8
mounted on structural steelwork.
D.
The silencers and exhaust pipework shall be properly and adequately supported clear of
fuel and feed pipes and shall be provided with suitable insulation to protect personnel,
plant and buildings from excessive heat. Design of exhaust system shall be suitable for
site conditions and routing, where shown on layout.
E.
The pipework shall drain away from the exhaust manifold and drain pipes shall be fitted
in the low points of the system to avoid accumulation of condensate.
F.
The system shall be so constructed as to enable it to be readily dismantled for
maintenance. Provision shall be made to prevent rain water entering the exhaust pipe at its
outlet to the atmosphere.
G.
All exhaust connections shall be to BS 4504.
H.
All necessary brackets, supports, insulation and protection shall be provided, together
with all fixing bolts. Bolts, washers and nuts shall be greased with graphite grease or other
suitable heat resisting lubricant during assembly.
I.
The finish of all exhaust silencers exposed to the open air shall be sprayed metallic
aluminium by a process complying with BS2569, Part 2, Process A.
2.12
COOLING SYSTEM
A.
Engine cooling shall be by a water jacket, with water circulating pump and heavy duty
tropical radiator with an electric driven pusher fan.
B.
The radiator shall be fitted with drawings legs and sited as shown on the drawings.
C.
The fan shall be rated for tropical conditions.
D.
The cooling equipment complete with feed and expansion tank and pumps as necessary.
E.
Where necessary to limit the oil temperature, a water cooled lubricating oil temperature
stabiliser, complying with BS3274, shall be incorporated in the engine cooling system.
Sufficient corrosion inhibitor shall be added to the cooling water to protect the cooling
system from internal corrosion. Thermostatic control shall be incorporated.
2.13
FUEL SYSTEM
A.
The fuel system shall comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 37.
B.
The engine shall be operated on Df-2 fuel.
C.
The fuel system shall be complete and shall consist of an external fuel storage tank
suitable for 72 hours continuous operation at 100% load, a dual filtering system, an
engine day tank suitable for 8 hours continuous operation at 100% full load, two
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 9
electrically driven fuel transfer pumps and one hand pump for emergency situations.
D.
The fuel storage tank shall be a standard size tank with accessories as specified in section
15175.
E.
One full flow strainer and one duplex filter shall be provided between the day tank and
the engine. The strainer shall be of the metal edge or screen type with a maximum
spacing of 0.007 inch (80 mech). The filter case shall be compatible with the filter
element. The strainer and filter shall be mounted in accessible locations without
disconnecting the piping or other engine equipment when changing the strainer and filter
element. Indicating pressure gauges shall be provided to measure the pressure drop across
the strainer and filter.
F.
The engine fuel pump shall be a positive displacement, engine-driven type, and shall be
capable of supply an adequate quantity of fuel under all conditions of operation. A relief
valve shall be provided to prevent the build-up of excessive pressure if the discharge line
becomes blocked.
G.
Provide rigid fuel pipework and fittings in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. Flexible connections shall be provided at the interface between the
engine and the fixed pipework.
H.
Provide high and low level switches in the bulk fuel storage tank and high and low level
switches in the day tank with overflow acoustic alarm.
I.
Provide an electrically operated valve on the engine mounted day tank to dump the fuel
oil and shut-down the engine when a signal is received from an external fire alarm panel.
J.
Provide control logic to shut-down fuel transfer pump when a signal is received from an
external fire alarm panel. This control circuit shall be independent from the day tank
drain valve control circuit.
2.14
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
A.
The engine lubricating system shall conform to NFPA 30 & 37 and operate under a
predetermined and constant pressure.
B.
The primary lubricating oil pump shall be an engine driven, positive displacement pump.
C.
An electric DC motor driven prestart lubricating oil pump shall be installed as an integral
part of the genset. The control logic shall be designed to stop the electric lubricating oil
pumps when the genset attains sufficient speed to maintain adequate oil pressure through
the engine driven mechanical pump.
D.
A sump pump, relief valves and by pass valves shall be installed if required for proper
operation.
E.
One tube type oil cooler arranged for utilizing engine cooling water as the cooling
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 10
medium shall be furnished for each engine. The cooler may be separately mounted or
mounted on the engine. The capacity and construction shall be as recommended by the
engine manufacturer.
F.
2.15
One full flow strainer and one full flow strainer and duplex filter shall be provided in the
lube oil line on the discharge side of the lube oil pumps. The strainer shall be of the metal
edge or screen type with a maximum spacing of 0.007 inch (80 mesh). The filter shall be
of the multiple cleaning and replaceable element type and the filter case shall be
compatible with the filter element. A pressure relief valve shall be provided to relieve
becomes clogged. An alarm condition shall be annunciated when the relief valve is in the
open position. The strainer and filter shall be mounted in accessible locations without
disconnecting the piping or other engine equipment when changing the strainer and filter
element. Indicating pressure gauges shall be provided to measure the pressure drop across
the strainer and filter.
SAFETY SYSTEM
A.
The generator set shall be equipped with automatic safety devices which shut down the
generator set and open the generator circuit breaker in the event of low lubricating oil
pressure, high coolant temperature, engine overspeed, high lubricating oil temperature,
over load and as specified elsewhere. The stop switch on the engine instrument board
may be connected in the circuit if so recommended by the manufacturer.
B.
The safety system shall be equipped with visual and audible devices that become
operational before engine shutdown.
C.
Lube oil pressure and cooling water temperature and pre-alarms to be inter connected to
the building management system.
D.
Simultaneous activation of the audible signal, activation of the visual signal, stopping the
engine, and opening the generator field and main circuit breakers shall be accomplished.
E.
For startup of the engine-generator set, time-delay devices shall be installed bypassing the
low lubricating oil pressure alarm during cranking, and the coolant-fluid outlet
temperature alarm. The lube-oil time-delay device shall return its alarm to normal status
after the engine starts. The coolant time-delay device shall return its alarm to normal
status 5 minutes after the engine starts.
2.16
ENGINE INSTRUMENTATION AND ALARMS
A.
An engine instrument panel shall be provided that displays gauges and indicators for
proper engine control, surveillance and maintenance. The panel shall be mounted on a
bracket welded to the skid. All connections to the engine shall be flexible types providing
anti-vibration isolation. All instruments and gauges to be analogue and in metric units,
where applicable.
B.
The engine instrument and alarm panel shall contain all the switches, indications, meters,
push buttons, displays, etc. for the proper monitoring and control of the operations of
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 11
emergency power generator system described of following items shall be provided:
C.
1.
Coolant-fluid inlet temperature display.
2.
Lubricating-oil pressure indicator.
3.
Lubricating-oil inlet temperatures display.
4.
Red emergency stop (push-button or switch)
5.
Run-time meter.
6.
Fuel meter display.
7.
Fuel-header-pressure display.
8.
Tachometer display.
9.
Engine start-stop switch.
10.
Start-attempt light indicator.
11.
Lubricating-oil prelubricating pump start-stop switch.
12.
Pyrometer display with selector switch.
13.
Alarms
All alarms and instrumentation shall be provided and arranged to stop the engine
automatically. In the event of an emergency the operation of this safeguard shall at the
same time give individual warning of the failure by illumination of an appropriate visual
indicator and the sound of a distinctive audible alarm. A self-resetting audible alarm
muting switch shall be provided.
The safe guards shall operate when any of the following conditions occur irrespective of
whether the set is on automatic or manual control:
1.
Engine over-speed.
2.
High cooling water temperature.
3.
Low cooling water level.
4.
Low lubricating oil pressure.
5.
High lubricating oil temperature.
6.
Low fuel level (to operate at 10% capacity of fuel tank).
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 12
2.17
7.
Control circuit fault.
8.
Fail-to-Start.
9.
Generator failure (Set running).
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL
A.
The control panel shall be totally enclosed metal clad cubicle type and shall contain the
following equipment together with any other items which are required to ensure a
complete and safe installation.
B.
The generator control panel shall provide controls, gauges, metres, etc. to include:
1.
Main circuit breaker (MCCB)
2.
Four position selector switch with Off-Auto-Man-Test
3.
A hand operated switch to raise or lower the speed of the engine together with a
hand operated voltage trimming rheostat.
4.
All engine controls, relays, indicator lamps, fuses, wiring etc.
5.
Voltmeter with seven position selector switch
6.
Three Ammeters
7.
Kilowatt-hour meter
8.
Power factor meter
9.
Frequency meter dial type with a range of 90 to 110 percent of rated frequency.
The instruments shall be manufactured to BS 89, and shall be 100 mm square, flush
mounted, 90o scale moving iron type with chromium plated bezel. The kilowatt-hour
meter shall be of the digital read-out type, flush mounted. The instruments mentioned
above are additional to the instruments specified elsewhere in this specification.
C.
Indications
1.
Flush type coloured indicators illuminated by low voltage lamps for the
following:Green lamps : Main supply available
Red lamps : All alarm conditions listed above in "2.16 (C)"
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 13
2.
The indicators shall be clearly labelled as to their duty. The "mains supply
available" indicator shall be operated from the mains supply.
D.
An audible device with reset shall also be provided.
E.
Suitable robust protected type spring return pushbuttons on the front of the control panel
for the following duties:1.
Start engine (for testing, servicing etc. with control selector switch in `Manual
position)
2.
Stop engine.
F.
Test buttons for verifying the operation of the alarm conditions listed above in "2.16(C)"
G.
Clean contacts to provide remote indications for any purpose such as BMS or for any
other location of the following conditions:-
H.
2.18
A.
1.
Mains supply normal.
2.
Mains failure, standby running.
3.
Generator set under manual control.
4.
Fault in control circuit.
5.
Low fuel level.
6.
Low oil pressure .
7.
High water temperature.
8.
Fail to start.
Provision for connection to a dummy load by means of lugs with butterfly nuts for
commissioning purpose.
CONTROL OPERATION
The manufacturer shall provide the following switch selectable operational modes on the
diesel electric generator control system.
1.
Manual Control (manual start and stop)
2.
Semi-Automatic Control
3.
Full-Auto control (Auto-start with auto stop when commercial supply returns).
(Auto-start manual return)
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 14
B.
In the automatic mode, the installation shall operate as follows :Mains failure shall cause a changeover relay to de-energise. This relay shall have an
adjustable 0-10 seconds delay before contacts re-set when it is de-energised so that if
power is restored within that period no changeover shall take place. If the power is not
restored, the changeover relay contacts shall re-set and operate as follows :1.
The mains contactor control circuit shall be opened. This contactor will already
have opened owing to loss of supply
2.
The engine run relay shall be energised and the standby set run up.
3.
The standby contactor control circuit shall be prepared and complete when the
generator voltage and frequency monitors show that the set is up to speed, and
the contactor shall close. The generator is required to take over full load within
10 seconds of start up.
4.
When mains power is again available it shall be detected by a reset timer with an
adjustable time delay of 0-30 minutes before operation when energised. When the
timer operates it shall energise the changeover relay. Energizing the changeover
relay shall:
a.
Open the standby contactor control circuit, dropping out the contactor.
b.
Close the mains contactor control circuit so that the contactor closes.
c.
De-energise the engine run relay.
The relay shall have a time delay adjustable up to 15 minutes before the contacts
re-set to allow the engine to continue to run on no load before shutting down.
5.
2.19
A.
Refer to section No. 16496 for details of enclosed transfer switch.
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL ITEMS
Wiring
All cabling and small wiring shall be securely cleated in systematic runs; small wiring
shall be multi-strand copper not smaller than 1.0 Sq.mm flexible cord.
Power and small wiring cables interconnecting major components shall be heat and oil
resisting.
All cabling and small wiring shall be coded and terminated with lugs or letters of the
terminals to which they are connected. Terminals shall be numbered or lettered, easily
accessible and fitted with individual insulating barriers or adequately spaced.
Barriers shall be fitted to separate control terminals from power wiring terminals.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 15
B.
Earthing
1.
C.
Contactors
1.
D.
E.
1.
Switching and control devices shall be solid state where possible. Electromechanical relays shall be of robust and rugged construction with rolling or
wiping contacts. They shall be mounted on individual sub-bases and wired so that
easy access is obtained to soldered connections. Unsealed relays shall be enclosed
in individual or common dust protecting cases.
2.
Time delays, if of the pneumatic type, shall operate on filtered air. The thermal
type of time delay relay will not be accepted.
Fuses
Rectifiers and Capacitors shall be suitable for any transient voltages likely to be
encountered during the operation of the equipment and for the internal operating
temperature of the enclosures at the specified maximum external ambient
temperature.
Winding Heaters
1.
H.
A spare fuse cartridge for each pole shall be mounted inside each equipment.
Rectifiers and Capacitors
1.
G.
Contactors shall have magnetic circuits designed for AC or DC operation and
shall be suitably rated. Four pole contactors shall be fitted for three phase
equipment and two pole contactors for single phase equipment. Main and
auxiliary contacts shall be silver faced.
Relays
1.
F.
All metalwork housing electrical equipment shall be provided with earthing
terminals for bonding to the building earthing system.
Suitably rated heaters for operation on the appropriate voltage shall be provided
for every alternator, motor and electrical panel. A separate terminal block shall be
provided for the heater supply in each relevant panel.
Trunking and Accessories
1.
Trunking runs and connections between trunking and boxes shall be flanged,
spigotted and/or provided with coupling pieces with earth bonding continuity
straps.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 16
2.
2.20
All accessories and fittings shall be manufacturers proprietary items as far as
practical with site fabrication maintained to a minimum. Any site fabrication shall
be approved by the Engineer.
LABELLING AND SAFETY
A.
Each major component of the unit shall have the manufacturer’s name, address, style, type
or catalog number on a place securely attached to the component of the units.
B.
The function or duty of each meter, instrument, indicator, switch, or push buttons or other
device for external control, shall be clearly defined with labels in accordance with section
16010.
C.
Any instructions for the proper and safe working of the plant shall be fixed in a position
close to where the operation is carried out, in accordance with section 16010.
D.
The engine/generator unit shall have a notice fixed in a conspicuous position, with titles at
least 25mm high and remainder 12mm high, both in Arabic and English and in red color
stating:DANGER - KEEP CLEAR
THIS SET IS REMOTELY / AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED AND
MAY START AT ANY TIME. WRITTEN AUTHORITY MUST BE
OBTAINED AND APPROPRIATE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TAKEN
BEFORE ANY WORK IS UNDERTAKEN ON THE SET OR
ASSOCIATED CONTROL EQUIPMENT.
E.
2.21
A.
Exposed parts that are subject to high operating temperatures or are energised electrically
and moving parts which are of such nature or so located as to be a hazard to operating
personnel, shall be insulated, fully enclosed, or guarded. Guarding shall be arranged in a
manner that will not impair the proper function of these parts.
PAINTING
Painting shall be in accordance with the appropriate requirements of section - Painting.
EXECUTION PART 3
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receiver work and field dimensions are as shown on
drawings.
B.
Verify that required utilities are available in proper location and ready for use.
C.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 17
3.02
A.
3.03
INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and standards.
SHOP AND FIELD TESTS
A.
Shop and Field testing will be performed under provisions of section 16350.
B.
Provide full load test utilizing portable test bank, if required, for four hours minimum.
During test, record the following at 20 minutes intervals:
1.
Kilowatts
2.
Amperes
3.
Voltage
4.
Coolant temperature
5.
Inside container or room temperature
6.
Frequency
7.
Oil pressure
C.
Test alarm and shut down circuits by simulating conditions.
D.
Test system in case of automatic mode as described in this specification.
E.
The engine-generator unit shall demonstrate its adequacy to operate as specified in all
aspects any failure to demonstrate adequacy in any respect shall be corrected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
TRAINING
The installation contractor shall furnish training for the operation and maintenance of the
emergency power generator system for a minimum of four employees of the Owner. The
total training course shall be conducted by the manufacturer's representative for a
minimum duration of 24 hours, conducted on three days as per the schedule to be agreed
by the Owner.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME
The manufacturer shall provide four copies of a comprehensive operation and
maintenance manual for each diesel generator unit. Two copies shall be in the English
language and two in the Arabic language. in addition to operation and maintenance
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 18
instructions, the manual shall include an illustrated parts list, detailed system description,
and appropriate diagrams and drawings. The programme shall include an inspection and
maintenance schedule and details of tasks to be performed. The manuals shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to their acceptance by the Client.
END OF SECTION 21
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM
SEC.21 - 19
SECTION 22
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Examine all other Sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
B.
Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section.
Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
The work under this section consists of furnishing, installation and testing of complete
lightning protection system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
All electrical work shall comply with all government rules and regulations and shall be
carried out in accordance with the relevant standards and specifications issued by the
appropriate authority, and in addition to the following:
1.
British Standards Specifications (BSS) as published by the British Standards
Institution.
2.
International Electro technical Commission (IEC).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
GENERAL
The lightning protection system shall consist of air termination networks, down
conductors, test clamps, earth network, tapes, cables, etc., necessary to form a complete
system in accordance with the required "Standards".
AIR TERMINATION NETWORK
A.
Air termination network shall be provided on roof and consist of air terminals and/or roof
conductors as shown on the drawings. No part of the roof within the air termination
network should be more than 5 meter from a roof conductor.
B.
Air terminals shall be solid copper. The roof conductor shall also be solid copper, bare or
insulated, circular or tape as shown on the drawings.
2.03
DOWN CONDUCTORS
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SEC.22 -1
A.
2.04
The down conductors shall provide a low impedance path from the air termination
network to the earth. Any one type or a combination of circular or tape conductors,
dedicated reinforcing bars, structural steel stanchions, etc. shall be used as down
conductors as shown on the drawings. Down conductors shall, where possible, take the
most direct route from the air termination network to the earth.
TEST CLAMPS
A.
Test clamps shall be plate type, manufactured from cast leaded gun metal to BS:1400,
Grade LG1-C or LG2-C for copper.
B.
Tape shall pass through clamps and protrude 25 mm approximately. Tape shall be tinned
on contact surfaces. Only resin based flux shall be used.
2.05
EARTH NETWORK
A.
Earth network shall comprise any one type or a combination of earth rods, radial electrode
(perimeter loop), earth plates, underground pipes, foundation reinforcement bars, etc. as
shown on the drawings and as approved by the Engineer.
B.
Earth rods shall be copper clad steel with concrete inspection pits.
2.06
CONDUCTORS AND TAPES
A.
Conductors used for lightning protection shall either be bare or PVC insulated high
conductivity plain stranded annealed copper to BS:6360.
B.
Tapes shall be either bare or PVC insulated
confirming to BS:2870.
C.
Size of conductors and tapes shall be as shown on the drawings.
high conductivity annealed copper
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
The installation shall be carried out in accordance with BS:6651. The position of all
conductors, test clamps, ground rods and earth terminals shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to commencing the work.
B.
The building structural steel work shall be utilised for the lightning protection down
conductors in the locations shown on the drawings. In reinforcement lapping areas the
continuity of the down conductors shall be ensured by mechanical bonding between the
reinforcement bars with a 70mm² copper cable or as recommended by the manufacturer.
All steelwork members of building structure shall be bonded to the lighting protection
system as directed in BS:6651.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SEC.22 -2
C.
Ground rods shall be driven into ground to a required depth and shall be provided at the
position of each down conductor.
A concrete inspection pit shall be fitted at each rod to tape joint position. Rods shall be
located as close as possible to the building.
D.
Fittings shall be of similar material to the tape system unless otherwise approved. Vertical
tapes shall be fixed at intervals not exceeding 900 mm and horizontal tapes shall be fixed
at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm.
E.
All connections and joints between rods, tapes and conductors shall be made using
"Exothermic" process which produces a fused joint. Bolted connections shall not be used
except at the connection to the ground rods which shall be disconnectable for testing
purposes and to ensure electrical continuity between reinforcement steelwork.
3.02
A.
TESTING
The electrical and mechanical continuity of all conductors, bonds and joints shall be
verified.
The resistance to earth of the whole installation and each earth termination shall be
measured and shall be in accordance with BS:6651.
B.
The testing shall be in accordance with BS:6651. The overall resistance of the installation
to the general mass of earth shall not exceed 5 ohms. The resistance of each test joint
shall satisfy BS:6651. Additional earth terminations shall be added, if required, under the
directions of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 22
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SEC.22 -3
SECTION 23
FIRE ALARM / LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This specification provides the functional requirements for the installation,
programming, configuration, warranty and maintenance of a complete Addressable
Intelligent Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Network. The system shall include, but not
be limited to:
1. Fire Alarm Control Panel(s), and Network Node Panels.
2. Automatic and Manually Activated Voice Evacuation Alarm Subsystem
3. Firefighter’s Telephone Communications System/Subsystem
4. Automatic and Manually activated Alarm Initiating and Monitoring Devices
5. Notification Peripheral and Appliances
6. Standby Power Supplies
7. Programming, Commissioning and Training of Operators, and
8. Conduit, wire and accessories required to furnish a complete and Operational Life
Safety System.
1.02 EQUIPMENT REFERENCES
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in fire protective signaling systems shall list
the system and all components. The UL Label shall be considered as evidence of
compliance with this requirement. The equipment shall be listed by UL under the
following standards as applicable:
UL 864/UOJZ, APOU
Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 1076/APOU
Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems.
UL 268
Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling
UL 268A
Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications Systems.
UL 217
Smoke Detectors Single Station.
UL 521
Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 228
Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 464
Audible Signaling Appliances.
UL 1638
Visual Signaling Appliances.
UL 38
Manually Activated Signaling Boxes.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
SEC.23 - 1
UL 346
Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1971
Visual Signaling Appliances.
UL 1481
Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 1711
Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
Any equipment not bearing a UL Label shall be removed and replaced with UL
labeled equipment at the contractors’ expense.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
In the case of any discrepancy between these specifications, the project drawings, and
any applicable local codes, the installed Fire Alarm / Life Safety System shall comply
with the most stringent requirement.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR
The Fire Alarm Contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the layout and the
installation of automatic computer-based Fire Alarm Systems. Prior to the bid date, the contractor
must be able to show evidence that he has successfully completed projects of similar size and
scope in the last 12 months.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
No equipment shall be purchased by the contractor for the Fire Alarm / Life Safety System
specified herein until the Professional Supervising Engineer has approved the Project Submittals
in their entirety and has returned them to the contractor. It is the responsibility of the contractor to
meet the entire intent and functional performance detailed in these specifications. Approved
submittals shall only allow the contractor to proceed with the installation and shall not be
construed to mean that the contractor has satisfied the requirements of these specifications.
The contractor shall submit (3) complete sets of Project Submittal documentation in order to be
considered for this project. This Project Submittal documentation shall include:
A) Product Data: Complete data sheets bearing the printed logo or trademark of the Fire
Alarm Control Network manufacturer for the following pieces of equipment:
• System Control Panel(s)
• System Power Supply(s)
• Standby Power Supply(s)
• Each type of intelligent automatic Smoke and Heat Detector to be
connected to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Network.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
SEC.23 - 2
1.05 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
A) The Manufacturer shall supply a 3-year warranty from date of manufacture for all
Control System and Field Devices and appliances. The contractor shall warrant the
installed fire alarm system to be free from any defects of material and installation for a
period of 2 years from acceptance by the professional engineer. Any deficiencies shall
be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the owner. The contractor shall
maintain a service organization with adequate spare parts stock within 150 miles of
the installation. Any defects that render the system inoperative shall be repaired within
24 hours of the owner notifying the contractor. Other defects shall be repaired within
48 hours of the owner notifying the contractor.
B) The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System supplied shall include a store of spare system subassemblies and field devices for use as emergency service stock. As a minimum, the
spares stock shall include 2% of each different type of field connected device and 1
each (minimum) of each internal system component assembly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
This Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Specification must be conformed to in its entirety
to ensure that the installed and programmed Life Safety System will function as
designed, and will accommodate the future requirements and operations required by
the building owner. All specified operational features will be met without exception.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Equipment and materials shall be provided by EST- Regional Office/Agent who will ensure
proper Specification Adherence, final connection, test, turnover, warranty compliance, and
service.
Service availability: The supplier shall have sufficient stock on hand and have a fully equipped
service organization capable of guaranteeing response time within 8 hours, 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week to service the system.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
SEC.23 - 3
The Regional Office/Agent who distributes and does the application engineering and
programming of the Fire Alarm / Life Safety Equipment specified herein shall provide a copy of
their certificate of successful completion of an authorized Training Course given by the
Manufacturer of the Fire Alarm / Life Safety Equipment.
The manufacturer of the Fire Alarm system components shall conform to the International
Standards Organization (ISO) standards, as listed below, and provide suitable proof of ISO
certification to these standards:
ISO-9000
ISO-9001, in the disciplines of:
Design Engineering
Manufacturing
Technical Support
Documentation
Training
Marketing
Equipment by other manufacturers will be considered only if a written request accompanied by
supporting documentation establishing equivalent levels of performance is submitted to the
Supervising Engineer. By submitting of equipment by an alternate manufacturer for
consideration, the submitter accedes that the final decision of the Supervising Engineer, as to
whether the alternate equipment is of equivalent performance, will be final and binding on all
parties.
SYSTEM TROUBLE DETECTION
When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating devices, the following
functions shall immediately occur:
A) The System Trouble indicator shall flash.
B) A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated.
C) The control panel display shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the
trouble condition and its location
D) Unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages, and if
Such an alarm must also be displayed, the trouble message will not be displayed until
the operator has acknowledged all alarm messages.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
SEC.23 - 4
E) The appropriate trouble message shall be displayed on all printers so programmed.
SYSTEM RESET SWITCH
Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all initiating devices, notification appliance
circuits ,and associated output devices to return to the normal condition. If alarm conditions exist
in the system after the System Reset Switch activation, the system shall then repeat the alarm
sequence.
LAMP TEST FUNCTION
Activation of the Lamp Test function shall turn on all LED indicators, system graphic
display, and then return all indicators to the previous condition.
* AUTOMATIC DETECTOR TEST
The system shall include a Resident Automatic Detector Sensitivity Test, which
satisfies the NFPA and UL requirements for detector sensitivity test. No additional
calibrated tests shall be required if the system indicates the smoke detectors are with in
the normal sensitivity range.
2.02. A PANEL MOUNTED SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2.02.A.1 Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Operators’ Interface
The System Display
The graphical display shall provide the means to inform the System Operator with detailed
information about the off-normal status of the installed Fire Alarm/Life Safety System. The
graphical display shall automatically respond to the status of the system, and shall display that
status in 168-character front panel display.
A) Automatic Functions
The following status functions shall be annunciated by the Graphical Display:
When the Fire Alarm / Life Safety System is in the “Normal” Mode, the panel displays:
• The current Date and Time.
• A Custom System Title (minimum 2 lines X 21 characters).
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
SEC.23 - 5
• A summary total of system events.
With the Fire Alarm Life Safety System in the “Alarm” Mode, the display shall automatically
reconfigure into four logical windows
3.04.A Delivery of System Documentation Package
The Fire Alarm contractor shall deliver two sets of the System Documentation Package to the
Building Owners Representative and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Final payment of
the contractor will not be authorized until the complete documentation specified herein is
delivered to the professional engineer. The System Documentation Package shall consist of the
following documents, to be provided after the <fire alarm system><phase of the fire alarm
system> has been completely installed and tested:
1) Operations and Maintenance Manuals which detail the operation and maintenance of
the installed Life Safety System.
2) An As-Built copy of the scaled plan of each building showing the actual installed
location of each piece of fire alarm equipment as well as the installed raceway sizes
and routing, conductor sizes and quantities in each raceway, and the exact location of
each junction box.
3) Point to Point diagrams of the entire Life Safety System <Phase of the Life Safety
System>as installed and tested. Point to Point Diagrams shall include all connected
Smoke and Heat Detectors and addressable Field Modules. In addition, “As-Built”
riser and wiring diagrams reflecting all T-Taps, each programmed device characteristic
including detector type, base type, serial number, sensitivity setting and wire
configurations will be provided to the Supervising Engineer, based on the information
gathered during the system final testing process.
4) The application program (database) listing for the system as installed at the time of
acceptance by the building owner (Disk and Hard copy printout).
5) A Time and Date stamped report which lists every Fire Alarm / Life Safety System
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
SEC.23 - 6
Cabinet within the system. This report shall include date regarding each cabinet in the
system, the hardware modules mounted in each cabinet, and the physical mounting
location of each module.
6) A Time and Date stamped report, which lists every detector, module, switch and
output circuit within the system. This report shall include addressing, custom labeling,
device type, and physical location for each device.
7) A letter certifying that the installation is in strict compliance with all applicable codes
and in strict compliance with the requirements of these specifications. The letter shall
also clearly explain any discrepancies between the originally submitted system
drawings and the as-built system drawings.
8) Two originals of the NFPA document titled “Fire Alarm System Certification and
Description” completely filled-in and signed as required.
9) Name, address and telephone of the authorized factory representative.
10) Written certification by the fire alarm contractor that no power supply audio amplifier
or circuit on the system has an electrical load greater than 80% of its rated capacity.
11) A copy of the manufacturers’ warranty on the installed system.
System Startup:
A Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor shall perform system Startup.
A contractor under the direction of the Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems
Distributor may perform certain functions of the Systems Startup Procedure.
3.05 Instruction of Owner
The Fire Alarm Contractor shall schedule and execute an instruction class for the Building owner,
which details the proper operation of the installed fire alarm system.
The Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide operations manuals or any other curricula that may
enhance the instruction of the Building Owners or Local Municipal Fire Department in the
operation and maintenance of the system.
END OF SECTION 23
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
SEC.23 - 7
SECTION 24
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. All Interconnecting Wiring
B. Outside Plant (cable, splices, cross connection and distribution pedestals)
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16120: Wiring
B. Section 16161: Grounding and Bonding
1.03 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the associated
drawings and the standards listed hereunder or other standards approved by the
Supervising Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all purchased materials and
manufacturer items and shall develop and submit where applicable proposals for shop
inspection and testing.
C. The following is a summary of International standards. The latest issues of applicable
publications shall be observed. Alternative international standards may be used
provided they give equivalent guidance and are submitted for Supervising Engineer's
review and approval in advance of their use.
- International Electro technical Commission (IEC)
- British Standards (BS)
- International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT).
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. The equipment shall be suitable for the environment in that the working conditions are
up to 50 degrees C. and 98% humidity. While the equipment will normally operate
within a controlled environment, it shall be capable of operating for a minimum of
two busy hours within the following limits:
1. 0 degrees to 46 degrees C.
2. 10% to 70% humidity
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
SEC.24
-1
B. The equipment shall be capable of being stored or transported in a switched off
condition in the range of -10 degrees C to +50 degrees C with 70% humidity without
damage.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Before commencement of manufacture, the Contractor shall submit the following to
the Supervising Engineer for review:
1. Performance data including mean time between failures (MTBF) and mean time to
epair (MTTR) figures.
2. Manuals's covering the following:
a. Start-up procedures
b. 3 copies of catalogues of all equipment to be furnished.
3. A list of special tools required for installation and maintenance.
4. A list of test equipment required for installation and maintenance.
5. Proposed list of spare parts required for two years maintenance.
6. Typical floor layout
7. A list of all subscriber and system features provided with details of operation.
8. Proof of compliance with National and/or International standards.
1.06 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Installation subject to approval, inspection and test of local utility company.
B. Provide equipment compatible with utility company telephone system.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall provide and install all indoor and outdoor plant as shown on the Drawings
for the complete telephone system from the site boundary interface with the PTT incoming trunk
lines to each individual subscriber telephone set.
The Contractor shall provide any additional items of hardware that may be recommended by the
EPABX manufacturer and approved by the Supervising Engineer. The Contractor shall provide
any additional hardware required to satisfy the requirements of the MOPTT specifications even if
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
SEC.24
-2
this hardware is not specifically shown on the drawings.
2.02 EQUIPMENT ITEMS
The items detailed in the attached Specification technical Data Sheets shall be
provided.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All cables shall be harnessed and properly dressed.
B. All exposed surfaces and access openings shall be free from sharp edges, open V slots
or pointed ends.
C. Separation of telecommunication circuits from the building electrical system and
electrical equipment shall inform to the latest issue of the international codes.
D. An earth or ground shall be provided and be extended to the termination box and
connected to each station protector. The earth or ground shall be installed and bonded
in accordance with Section 16161.
END OF SECTION 24
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
SEC.24
-3
SECTION 25
Public Address System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Description Of Work
A. This section applies to the public address system.
B. The quantity and location of apparatus comprising a complete system as shown
on drawings.
1.02 System Description
A. Equipment shall be shown with microphones and loudspeaker units positioned
where indicated on the drawings to provide the maximum flexibility and coverage for
broadcasting.
1.03 Quality Assurance
A. Equipment shall be purchased only from single manufacturer established and
specializing in these types of products.
1.04 Submittals
A. Manufacturers shall submit drawings and illustrated leaflets of the various types
of apparatus offered.
B. For speakers submit the following:
1. Characteristic curves for defined methods of mounting on ceilings.
2. Suitability for continuous full output power handling.
3. Types recommendations by manufacturer with application and environment
considerations. Suitable cabinets for internal loudspeakers to be flushed to
ceilings.
1.05 Delivery and Handling
A. Pack to protect all apparatus during transportation and storage.
B. Store in dry location.
C. Do not install equipment until it can be protected from damage during
construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Equipment
A. To provide high quality reproduction and natural sounding speech/music from a
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Public Address System
SEC.25 -1
good amplitude modulated amplifier.
B. Supply:
1. Central rack including all necessary equipment such as Amplifiers, power
supply, Radio tuner AM/FM, double deck cassette recorder, CD player, Zone
selections,...etc. as shown on drawings and B.O.Q.
2. Microphone call stations
3. Column loudspeakers indoor type wall mounted type each complete with tap
transformer .
4. Horn type loudspeaker indoor and outdoor type shall be as shown on the
drawings.
5. 6W round type recessed ceiling mounted loudspeakers with tap transformers.
6. Selector switches.
C. Level of Sound Output:
The system shall be designed so that it is capable of providing without the undue
distortion the maximum loudness likely to be required taking into account such factors
as audience absorption and the maximum ambient noise level.
D. For internal output a mean sound intensity level of 60dB relative to 5 - 8W/cm2)
shall be provided and 20 dB below maximum available from the amplifier and
speakers and not after allowance for the loudest passages so as not to create
distortion in output quality. The rated power of the amplifier shall not be less
than 12.5 m per 13000 m3.
2.02 Microphones
A. Suitable for omni directional response. Smooth response over range of
frequencies for the system. Move coil, ribbon or piezo electric as most suitable
for the amplifier.
2.03 Amplifiers
A. To operate continuously on the environmental conditions stated earlier.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Public Address System
SEC.25 -2
B. Low voltage to speakers not in excess of 100V. Inputs to the amplifier shall be
high enough to produce full power output stated earlier.
C. Frequency response: With filter inoperative, tone control set for desired response
the frequency response shall not vary more than 2 dB over:
100 Hz to 20 KHz at rated output
2.04 Distortion
A. With same conditions of frequency response the total harmonic content at rated
power should not exceed:
2% (-34 dB) at 100 Hz
2.05 Loudspeakers
A. Loudspeakers shall provide close frequency response. Loss of higher frequencies
shall not exceed 10 dB at the highest frequency.
B. Line transformers shall also be fitted to loudspeakers where individual outputs
require to be adjusted.
2.06 Radio Tuner
A rack mounted tuner shall be provided. The tuner shall provide for-set selection
of 16 FM stations to program individually in the frequency range of 87.5
108.0
MHz. Automatically and manual station searching mode. LCD and LED
display.
The tuner shall provide the following minimum performance:
Input Sensitivity :
1.5
THD :
0.5%
If Bandwidth:
250 Khz
Antenna Input :
75
Output Signal :
0 - 500 mV adjustable
Poser Supply :
24 VDC
2.07 Cassette Player
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Public Address System
SEC.25 -3
Rack mounted cassette player units of the industrial quality shall be provided for
replay of background music.
Each player shall beef fully controlled electronically by press of a button, and shall
accept standard compact cassettes sand shall provide at least 3 hours continuous
replay with out repeat.
The Cassette Player shall provide the following minimum performance:
WOW and Flutter :
<0.15% (DIN)
Signal - to - noise ratio : > 52 dB (DIN)
Frequency response :
60 …. 18000 Hz
Output voltage (mono) : Max. 0 dB, adjustable
Output Voltage (Stereo) : 2 x 400mV
Mechanical Features
Tape Speed :
4.75 cm/sec
Rewind time :
120 seconds for C 60 Cassettes
Motor :
2+1 motors with revolving sound.
head and no slip clutches
Tape monitoring :
Electronic with air cushioned
compartment and auto -
reverse function.
Material :
sendust sound head
Cassette Head Cleaner:
An non - abrasive cassette unit head cleaning cassette shall be obtained within the
system manual.
2.08 Compact Disk Player
A rack mounted compact disc (CD) player shall be provided.
The CD Player shall provide the following minimum performance:
1. One control Load and Play
2. Continuous repeat of a pre-programmed track selection.
3. Latching pause control.
4. Visible display of track number and of total playing time in the inserted disc.
The CD player shall include a cartridge for pre-loading of 5 or 6 compact discs, with
random track selection facilities.
The CD player shall provide the following minim performance:
1. Frequency response 40 Hz - 20 kHz ± 0.5 dB.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Public Address System
SEC.25 -4
2. Signal - to - noise ration (S/N) > 100 dB (A).
3. Channel separation > 85 dB
4. Harmonic distortion < 0.01 % @ 1 KHz
2.09 Test Input
An industry standard socket with gain control (female XLR-3 or standard ¼” jack)
shall be obtained for the rack for the insertion of external test sources.
A latching switch shall be provided on the rack for continues broadcast of test message
2.10 Loudspeakers
1. Distribution Cone Loudspeakers
Distribution ceiling mounted cone loudspeaker shall be provided in all areas within
the suspended ceiling. Loudspeakers shall be round, white with metal grid.
Distribution loudspeaker shall be high quality core unit sand shall be fitted wit
bayonet in the mounting ring for rapped and easy fitting.
Ceiling loudspeaker shall be fitted with suitable acoustic enclosure and shall have a
built in matching transformer with taps for 100 V @ 6, 3, 1.5 and 0.75 watts.
Distributed cone loudspeaker shall provide the following minim performance:
1. Power :
6/9 watts
2. Frequency range (-3dB): 80 …18000 Hz
3. Sound pressure (1w/1m): 90 dB
4. Impedance :
4
2. Horn Loudspeakers
Re-Entrant horn loudspeakers shall be provided in plant and high noise level areas.
The loudspeaker horn and river unit shall be of rugged, impact resistant construction
and shall meet the following minimum performance:
1. Handling power:
15 watts
2. frequency range) -3db):
250 …. 18000 Hz
3. Acoustic pressure (1w/1m):
118 dB
4. Basic impedance
8
5. Matching transformer [email protected] 100 V : 15, 7.5, and 3.8 watts
The horn loudspeakers shall be provided with rugged brackets which shall permit a
Minimum of + - 45 o c (horizontal), site adjustment in one plane only shall not be
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Public Address System
SEC.25 -5
Acceptable.
Miniature re-entrant horn loudspeakers installed within diecast or plastic rectangular
assemblies, shall be installed in quiet plant areas (> 75dB (A)) and in service corridors.
The assemblies shall be temperature rated (aluminum range - 10 o C to + 65 o C).
Loudspeakers horn shall be suitable for the environment in which they are installed.
2.11 Column Loudspeakers
The column loudspeaker shall be a rugged design in metal of indoor and outdoor
rain protected mounting, with expanded metal fron cover.
Simple installation shall be accomplished with supplied mounting brackets.
The column loudspeaker shall be for professional application with high reproduction
quality for music and speech.
The column loudspeaker shall be for professional application with high reproduction
quality for music and a speech.
The column loudspeaker shall meet the following minimum performance:
1 . Handling power : 20 watts
2 . Frequency range : 140 …. 18000 Hz
3. Acoustic pressure (1w/1m) : 95 dB
4. Matching transformer @ 50 / 100 V : 20,12.5, .6.2 and 3 watts
2.12 Cabling
A. All cables for the sound system are to be twisted 3 core white PVC sheathed PVC insulated copper cables, not less than 2.5mm2.
B. Microphone cables shall be twisted pairs screened with tinned copper closely
lapped or braided. The screening shall be sheathed overall with PVC insulation.
C. Flexible cables shall be hard service cord high temperature thermoplastic
insulated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Inspection
A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which the system is
to be installed and function.
B. Correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Public Address System
SEC.25 -6
manner acceptable to the Supervising Engineer.
3.02 Installation
A. Power supply to be provided adjacent to the amplifier.
B. All equipment metal enclosures to be grounded.
C. A separate un insulated grounding system for connection to cable screens.
D. Room where amplifier is installed shall be adequately ventilated.
E. Public address system cable shall not be placed in any raceway or cable trays
with conductors for lighting or power cables or cable carrying voltages higher
than 100V.
F. Power supply shall be durably marked to indicate the class of supply.
G. All non-current carrying metal parts of equipment shall be grounded.
H. All fixed cabling shall be carried out as a fixed wiring system.
I. Joints shall not be permitted.
J. Boxes shall be fitted in dry locations where possible. Boxes fitted in damp
locations shall be waterproof pattern.
K. Wires forming a pair shall not be split. Distribution boxes shall provide separate
Terminals for all incoming and outgoing wires with cross connection facilities.
L. One terminal shall contain one wire only. Spare wires shall be left long enough to
reach any terminal.
M. A schedule shall be fixed to the inside face of the box cover showing all
connections and giving details of the wiring.
N. Cables shall not be run externally.
O. Adequate protection shall be provided for all accidental damage or unauthorized
interference.
P. P/A System shall be connected and interfaced with other sound systems in the
project.
3.03 Field Quality Control
A. The completed installation shall be inspected to ensure the work has been carried
out in a satisfactory manner and that the methods, materials and components shall
comply with the specification, drawings and manufacturer's recommendation.
B. A functional test of the installation shall be made to ensure the installation will
give satisfactory service under all conditions likely to be experienced.
C. Earthing connections shall be checked and tested.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Public Address System
SEC.25 -7
PART 4 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
1. Optimus Spain.
2. Sony Japan.
3. Seimens Germany.
END OF SECITON 25
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Public Address System
SEC.25 -8
SECTION 26
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
1-
GENERAL
A. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components that are
regularly manufactured and used in the manufacturer’s system.
B. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in
actual use.
C. All systems and components shall be provided with the availability of 24-hour
technical assistance program (TAP) from the manufacturer. The TAP shall
allow for immediate technical assistance for either the dealer/installer or the
end user at no charge.
D. All systems and components shall be provided with a one-day turn around
repair express and 24-hour parts replacement. The repair and parts express
shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer on warranty and nonwarranty items.
2-
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
A. The digital video recorder (DVR) shall provide a high-quality recorder
capable of storage and playback of images from 1 to 16 camera inputs at a
simultaneous refreshing recording rate of up to 480 images per second
(NTSC) at CIF resolution with a CD-RW as standard equipment. Refer to
paragraph B.8. for total frame rates at 2 CIF and 4 CIF resolutions. The DVR
shall possess a watchdog system, triplex operation, Windows® 2000 operating
system with Service Pack 4 with the latest security updates from Microsoft,
watermarking of each frame, inputs for external alarms, video motion
detection, and scheduled event recording. Remote software shall be provided
for operation via PC, web, and Pocket PC handheld devices.
B. The DVR shall meet or exceed the following design and performance
specifications:
3-
PROCESSOR:
Processing Unit:
Pentium 4, 2.5 GHz processor with 2 GB of RAM
Recording Modes: Continuous, motion detection, alarm activation, or scheduled
recording
Storage:
Hard drive with 80, 250, 500, 750, or 1,000 GB of storage
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
SEC.26 -1
Operating Software: Windows 2000, Service Pack 4
Signal Format: NTSC/PAL
Resolution:
a. NTSC
320 x 240, 640 x 240, 640 x 480, 720 x 240,
or 720 x 480 pixels, depending on model
b. PAL
352 x 288, 704 x 288, 704 x 576, 720 x 288,
or 720 x 576 pixels, depending on model
Frame Rate:
NTSC
PAL
c. CIF
480 ips
400 ips
d. 2CIF
112 ips
96 ips
e. 4CIF
80 ips
64 ips
Functions: Operate as a recorder and a full-duplex multiplexer
PTZ Control:
Pan, tilt, and zoom functions via RS-422 communications
(D, P, and Coaxitron protocols)
Viewing/Recording:
Configurations of full screen, 4, 9, 12, or 16
cameras, or custom-designed display views
Full-Triplex Operation: Simultaneous playback and live viewing while
recording live images
Programmable Schedules: 24 individual schedules
Program Modes: Motion event, alarm input, or continuous recording
Hardware Watchdog System:
A hardware device to monitor the system
clock for Windows lockup; upon lockup of the system the recorder shall
automatically reboot without losing any of the programmed settings
Password Protection:
Four user levels of protection for setup functions,
operation, and system exiting
Motion Detection: Built-in motion detection for each camera to start recording
or to increase the recording rate of the system
Motion Areas:
Selectable detection area and sensitivity for each camera
Languages:
English
Alarm/Motion Activation:
Alarm input will start the unit recording, or
if already recording, increase the recording rate and image quality
Pre-Alarm or
Pre-Motion Recording:
Record images for up to 60 seconds before
the alarm sensor has been activated
Bandwidth Throttling:
Network throttling of transmitted video
Alarm History Log:
Available through a query
Alarm Outputs: Sixteen dry contact alarm outputs to activate external
devices
Motion Activation:
When a unit is in scheduled time recording and a
camera detects motion or an alarm is activated, the system shall begin
recording the event
Remote Control: Full remote control operation of pan, tilt, and zoom
functions via TCP/IP protocol and RS-422 interface
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
SEC.26 -2
LAN/WAN Connection: Software and hardware provided for viewing and
controlling DVR over the network
Video Quality:
High-quality video recording of at least VHS grade
compared to the original video; supports NTSC or PAL video
Color Palettes:
Minimum of 16 million color palettes
Gray Scale:
256 shades
Backup: A backup management system is to be provided to back up data to
external devices (CD or other storage devices) without interrupting hard disk
recording
Hard Disk Drives: From 80 GB up to 1TB
Programming:
On-screen programming and operation through a PC
keyboard or PS/2 mouse.
Digital Zoom:
Digital zoom of the image on the screen during playback
modes
Authentication: Software provided for image verification of each image
recorded
4- MECHANICAL:
Mounting: Capable of being mounted in an EIA-standard 19-inch rack or
placed on a shelf or desktop
Connectors:
a.
Depending on model, eight or sixteen BNC video
inputs plus eight or sixteen looping video outputs with automatic termination
b. Two 9-pin, D-type connectors for COM
1 and COM 2 ports (disabled)
c. Two 6-pin, mini-DIN connectors for a
PS/2 mouse and keyboard
d. One 15-pin, D-type port for a PC
monitor connection
e. One 25-pin D-type port for Printer
connection
f. One S-video jack for analog monitor
output (disabled)
g. Two multiplexed analog video outputs
(optional)
h. One RJ-45 connector for network
connection
i. Four RJ-45 ports for RS485/RS422
support
j. Depending on model, eight or sixteen
push-in connectors for alarm inputs and
eight or sixteen push-in connectors for
relay outputs
k. Six high-speed USB 2.0 ports
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
SEC.26 -3
3. Dimensions:
4. Operating Temperature:
5. Relative Humidity:
6. Optical Drive:
a. Desk Mount
7.0 (H) x 17 (W) x 19.9 (D) inches
(17.78 x 43.18 x 50.55 cm)
b. Rack Mount
7.0 (H) x 19.0 (W) x 22.0 (D) inches
(17.78 x 48.26 x 55.88 cm)
50°F to 95°F (10° to 35°C)
Maximum 80% noncondensing
CD-RW
ELECTRICAL:
Input Voltage
100-240 VAC, 50/60Hz, autoranging
5- REMOTE CLIENT REQUIREMENTS:
Recommended PC Requirements
1. Processor:
2. Memory:
3. Video Card:
4. Resolution:
5. Monitor:
6. Operating System:
7. Internet Explorer:
8. Disk Space:
BRAND NAME CORE 2 DUE with 1.8
MHz minimum processor speed
1 GB of RAM
AGP VGA with minimum of 256 MB of
video RAM
1024 x 768 display, 32-bit color, and
DirectX 8.1 application programming
interface
SVGA or XVGA with minimum of 1024 x
768 resolution
Windows 2000 (SP4) and Windows XP,
DirectX 8.1 or better
5.5 or later
500 MB of free space
CERTIFICATIONS:
1. UL
2. FCC:
Class B (Class A if audio option is installed)
6- DIGITAL CCD DAY/NIGHT COLOR/B-W CAMERA
A. The DSP color/black-white CCTV camera shall consist of a 1/3-inch format
CCD imaging chip.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
SEC.26 -4
B. The DSP color/black-white camera shall be a high resolution color camera
that switches to black and white mode, depending upon available light
utilizing a removable infrared cut filter in color mode and an optical low-pass
filter in black and white for optimal image quality.
C. The DSP color/black-white CCTV camera shall meet or exceed the following
design and performance specifications:
COLOR/B-W CCD CAMERA SPECIFICATION
A. Day/Night Operation:
B. Imaging Device:
D. Scanning System
a. NTSC:
b. PAL:
E. Picture Elements
a. NTSC:
b. PAL:
E. Sensing Area:
F. Horizontal Resolution:
Infrared cut filter with optical low-pass filter
1/3-inch interline transfer CCD
525 lines, 2:1 interlace
625 lines, 2:1 interlace
768 (H) x 494 (V)
752 (H) x 582 (V)
6 mm diagonal
Color: 480 TV lines
B-W: 530 TV lines
G. Auto White Balance:
On/off switchable
H. Auto White Balance Range:
2,500° to 9,500°K
I. Electronic Shutter Range
a. NTSC:
1/60 to 1/100,000 second
b. PAL:
1/50 to 1/100,000 second
J. Iris Control:
Selectable on/off
K. Auto Iris Lens Type:
DC/video drive (autosensing)
L. Automatic Gain Control: On/off switchable
M. Electronic Shutter Control:
On/off switchable
N. Backlight Compensation: On/off switchable
O. Flickerless Mode:
On/off switchable
P. Internal Sync:
On/off switchable
Q. D/N Dusk Dark
On/off switchable
R. Signal Processing:
Digital signal processing (DSP)
S. Gamma Correction:
0.45
T. Video Output:
1 Vp-p, 75 ohms
U. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: >50 dB
V. Vertical Phase:
Adjustable ±120°
W. Minimum Illumination
a. Color Mode:
0.7 lux, F1.2, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% reflectance
b. B-W Mode:
0.09 lux, F1.2, 40 IRE, AGC on,75% reflectance
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
SEC.26 -5
X. Synchronization System: V-Sync/AC line lock/internal
7- ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Input Voltage
12-36 VDC +/-10% or 24-28 VAC +/-10%
B. Power Consumption:
<6.0 watts
C. Power Connector:
2-pin terminal strip
D. Video Connector:
BNC or RJ-45
E. Lens Jack:
4-pin connector (miniature square)
F. Photo Cell Input:
RJ-45 or 2-pin terminal strip
G. UTP Connector:
RJ-45 connector
H. Service Connector
8- ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Operating Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Operating Humidity:
Storage Humidity:
14° to 122°F (-10° to +50°C)
14° to 158°F (-10° to +70°C)
20% to 80%, noncondensing
20% to 90%, noncondensing
9- PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Dimensions:
B. Weight:
5.0" L x 2.9" W x 2.6" H (12.8 x 7.2 x 6.7 cm)
0.8 lb (0.4 kg)
10- MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Lens Mount:
B. Camera Mount:
C/CS mount (adjustable)
1/4-inch UNC-20 screw, top or bottom of camera housing
11- CERTIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS
A. CE, Class B
B. UL Listed
C. FCC, Class B
12- WARRANTY
A. 3 years, parts and labor
DSP COLOR CAMCLOSURE, High Resolution, Varifocal
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
SEC.26 -6
A. The integrated camera and lens shall consist of a high resolution camera and
varifocal lens 2.7-15mm module that is prepackaged for shipment and which
shall allow the installation of the enclosure to precede installation of the
camera and lens.
B. The integrated camera system shall provide multiple methods of installation,
including the following: surface mounting onto ceiling or wall, recessed
mounting in ceiling or wall, and pendant mounting with an optional parapet
mount.
C. The DSP color CCTV camera shall meet or exceed the following design and
performance specifications:
COLOR CCD CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
Interline Transfer Imager: 1/4-inch interline CCD chip
Scanning System:
525 lines, 2:1 interlacing
Horizontal Resolution: 480 TV lines, NTSC or PAL
White Balance:
Automatic
White Balance Range:
2500 – 9500K
Iris Control Range:
1/60 to 1/100,000 second
Iris Control
Electronic/passive
Gain Control:
Selectable by DIP switch (0-20 dB)
Minimum Illumination: <1.2 lux at 30 IRE, f1.2
Video Output:
1 Vp-p, 75 ohms
Signal-to Noise Ratio:
48 dB (AGC off)
Synchronize System:
Internal or line lock
Vertical Phase:
Adjustable, 0° ±120°
Backlight Compensation: Automatic: adjusts AGC and AES
Signal Processing:
Digital signal processing
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Input Voltage:
Power Consumption:
Video Output:
Frequency:
Power Connection:
Video Connector:
24 VAC line lock or 12 VDC, autosensing
3 watts or less
75 ohms terminated
60 Hz
Two wires, flying leads
Flying lead, BNC
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Operating Temperature: 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C)
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
SEC.26 -7
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A.
B.
B.
C.
Construction:
Dome:
Finish:
Dimensions:
D. Weight:
ABS plastic back box and surface mount ring
Polycarbonate, smoked or clear, with a discrete liner
White or black
Recessed: 5.30 inches (13.46 mm) maximum diameter,
4.04 inches (10.26 mm) total height, 1.65 inches (4.19 mm)
recessed in ceiling, 2.39 inches (6.07 mm) exposed below
ceiling, 3.90 inches (9.91 mm) bubble diameter
Surface Mount: 5.72 inches (14.53 mm) diameter, 4.04
inches (10.26 mm) height, 3.90 inches (9.91 mm) bubble
diameter
0.52 lb (0.24 kg)
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Camera Mount:
3-axis gimbals mount allowing for 360° of pan, 140° of tilt,
and 360° of rotation; once view is set, mount will not move
B. Video Service Connector: On-board service connector port
C. UTP Output:
Available
D. 4S Box Adapter Plate:
Standard for mounting in 4S back box
CERTIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
CE Compliant:
UL Listed:
FCC:
cUL:
Class B
Standard 2044
Class B
Listed to Canadian safety standards
WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s:
3 years, parts and labor
END OF SECTION 26
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
SEC.26 -8
SECTION 27
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UNIT (U.P.S.)
PART 1 GENERAL
This specification describes a continuous duty, solid state, un-interruptible power
supply system, hereafter referred to as the UPS. The UPS shall operate in
conjunction with the building electrical system and the generator to provide high
quality power for computer controller. The system shall consist of an inverter,
rectifier/battery charger, storage battery, a static bypass transfer switch,
synchronizing circuitry and an internal maintenance bypass switch. Cooling fan, inlet
dust filter, and shall have a radio frequency interference suppression filter at the input
and output. The UPS capacity shall be as shown on the drawings.
PART 2 MATERIAL
A. All material and parts comprising the UPS shall be new of current
manufacture and shall not have been in prior service.
B. The UPS should be by a reputed manufacturer who is in the
industry for a minimum period of 20 years. The equipment must be ISO 9000
certified and manufactured to International standards such as EW/IEC/UTE/VDE,
The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line reserve transfer system, and
shall consist of a rectifier/battery charger, batteries, inverter, static bypass transfer
switch, synchronizing equipment, protective devices, internal bypass switch and
accessories as specified herein that will automatically provide continuity of electric
power without interruption, upon failure or deterioration of the normal powr supply.
Continuity of electric power to the load shall be maintained for an emergency period
with the inverter supplied by the batteries, up to the specifeid maximum time or until
restoration of the normal power supply. The operation and control for the UPS shall
be provided through the use of microprocessor controlled logic. The system shall
provide an alarm indication 10 minutes before the reserve power failure and shal
provide automatic shutdown of the non essential equipment at the end of a
programmable time.
PART 3 MODES OF OPERATION
The UPS shall be designed to operate in the following modes:
3.01 Normal
The critical load shall be continuously supplied by the inverter. The rectifier/battery
charger shall derive power from the utility A/C source and supply DC power to the
inverter while simultaneously float charging the battery.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UNIT (U.P.S.)
SEC.27 - 1
3.02 Emergency
Upon failure of the utility A/C source the critical load shallbe supplied by the inverter,
which without any swithcing, obtains its power from the storage battery. There shall
be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration for the utility A/C
sources.
3.03 Recharge
Upon restoration of the utility A/C source, the rectifier/battery charger powers the
inverter and simultaneoulsy recharges the battery. This shall be on automatic
function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load.
3.04 Bypass Mode
A. If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair of internal failures
or in cases of heavy output overload, "the static bypass transfer switch" transfers the
load to the alternate source without an interruption. Retransfer to the load shall be
accomplished after the UPS inverter automatically synchronizes to the alternative
bypass source.
B. Once the source is synchronized, the static bypass transfer switch shall transfer the
load from the by-pass source to the UPS inverter to ramp into the load and then
disconnecting the bypass input source.
3.05 Maintenance Bypass/Test Mode
Internal switches shall be provided to isolate the UPS inverter output and static
bypass transfer switch output from the A/C bypass input source and the load. The
switches shall enable the UPS inverter and static bypass transfer switch to be tested
without effecting load operation.
3.06 Downgrade
If the battery only is to be taken out of service for maintenance, it shall be
disconnected from the rectifier/battery charger and inverter by means of a circuit
breaker. The UPS shall continue to function as specified.
3.07 UPS System Rating
The UPS system shall be as shown on drawings at rated voltage, for a minimum
autonomy of 10 minutes for the computer equipment.
The UPS shall be able to supply 125% rated load for at least 10 minutes.
3.08 Electrical Characteristics:
Input Rectifier a. Voltage : 3Ph + N400 / 230V
b. Tolerance ± 20%
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UNIT (U.P.S.)
SEC.27 - 2
c. Frequency : 50Hz ± 10%
3.09 Output Inverter
a. Voltage :
3Ph + N400 / 230V
b. Tolerance stable condition
± 1.5%
c. Overall harmonic distortion on linear load:
<1%
d. Phase angle accuracy for 100% unbalanced load ± 2%
e. Frequency:
50Hz
f. Free running output frequency accuracy
± 0.01%
g. Acceptable load power factor: 0.8 lag to 1
h. Acceptable overload:60 sec :
1h:
150%
110%
i. Acceptable crest factor without downgrading:
j. Overall efficiency:
up to 3
up to 94%
3.10 Rectifier/Battery Charger
Incoming A/C power shall be converted to regulated DC output by the rectifier/battery
charger. A phase controlled bridge rectifier shall provide regualted DC voltage which
is subsequently filtered to provide power for the inverter and battery charging
functions. The battery charging circuitry shall be capable of being set for automatic
battery recharge operation, float service, manual battery charge service and equalize
operation.
The rectifier/battery charger shall have sufficient capacity to support a fully loaded
inverter and recharge the battery to 95% of its full nominal capacity withing 24 hours.
The charging curent shall be automatically limited by an electronic device to a
maximum value as specified by the battery manufacturer. Charger regulation shall
ensure DC output fluctuation is less than 1% of the DC voltage.
3.11 Mechanical Design
A. The mechanical structure of the static uninterruptible power
supply shall be made of a sufficiently solid and indefinably framework to enable
handling and maintenance operations to be carried out without risk.
B. Access to the sub-units making up the system shall be fitted at
the rear of the unit.
C. The metal sheets which make up the mechanical structure shall
be protected against corrosion by a suitable treatment.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UNIT (U.P.S.)
SEC.27 - 3
D. The ground space taken up by the static uninterruptible power
supply shall be small.
E. For case of installation, particulary when passing through
doorways, staircase, its height shall not exceed 1.8M and it is the supplier's
responsibility to unload the UPS.
3.12 Battery
A. The Battery shall be of Sealed lead calcium type.
B. The Battery to be UL approved for UL standard (UL 924).
C. The Battery must carry a life warranty of 10 years.
D. The Batteries to be installed in matching enclosure similar to the
UPS.
E. The autonomy for the batteries will be 2 hours.
3.13 System Status and Control
The UPS shall be provided with a system status and control panel to provide
monitoring and control of the complete system. The UPS shall be equipped with a
self test system identifying the faulty subassembly in the event of a problem.
Indications, measurements and alarms together with pwor history and battery
autonomy shall be shown on a liquid crystal display panel.
A. Metering
A meter shall be provided with the capability of monitoring any of the following
system functions:
a. AC output voltage (L-L).
b. AC output current/phase (L-N).
c. AC output frequency.
d. DC voltage.
e. Battery DC current (Charge/discharge).
B. System Control
The following controls shall be provided for the system:
a. Inverter off push button.
B . Lamp test push button.
C. System Alarm
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UNIT (U.P.S.)
SEC.27 - 4
Visual Alarms: The following status shall be signaled:
a. Rectifier-charger in operation.
B.. Load on inverter.
c. Load on standby mains.
d. General Alarm.
D. Also the following signaling shall be available.
a. Battery problem.
b. Manual charging cycle running.
c. End of battery autonomy.
d. Manual bypass in maintenance position.
e. Standby mains outside tolerance limits.
3.14 Environment
Temperature: a. Storage: 50oC
b. Operating: 40oC
c. Noise: 50 to 65 dB at 1M
b. Standard: EN 50091 - IEC 146 – 4
END OF SECTION 27
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UNIT (U.P.S.)
SEC.27 - 5
SECTION 28
ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 HAND DRYERS
A. Dryer cover shall be one piece, heavy duty die cast zinc alloy. It shall be lightweight,
unbreakable, rustproof fitted with an insulated pushbutton and 360 degrees revolving
nozzle. Hand dryer shall be surface mounted to a wall plate. Supply dryer via back
box. Entire mechanism shall be internally grounded throughout.
B. Motor shall be brushless and shall be insulated by a resilient mounting. Motor shall be
protected by its own fuse. Fan shall be large single inlet centrifugal type. Fan shall be
mounted directly on motor shaft and fan and motor shall be insulated from the dryer to
obtain maximum dampening effect. Heater element shall be 2 kW rating and shall have
its own protective device. Hand dryer shall be capable of providing air at 70 degrees C
for an adjustable period of 10s to 30s. Motor and accessories shall be designed for
operation on a 230 Volt, single phase, 50 Hz. power supply system.
B. Hand dryer shall be equipped with infra-red proximity switch to switch on and off
automatically as hands approach and are withdrawn.
Hand dryer shall be fitted with indestructible metal casing.
Hand dryer shall be provided with integrated shaver socket 230/115V.
1.02 INSTALLATION:
Install hand dryers according to manufacturer's instructions and in locations shown in
Drawings centered on outlet box.
END OF SECTION 28
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS
SEC.28
-1
SECTION 29
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Access shall be afforded at all times to the Engineer to enable him to inspect the
Electrical Equipments.
B.
Upon completion of the Electrical Equipment installation or part of the installation, the
Contractor shall carry out and be responsible for testing and commissioning it, in stages
if required, to ensure that it is in proper working order and capable of performing all of
its functions in accordance with the Specification and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Any Electrical Equipment damaged in commissioning shall be replaced and
retested by the Contractor at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C.
All testing shall be carried out according to the requirements of the relevant standards
and regulations as may be stated or implied in the Specification or otherwise agreed by
the Engineer in writing.
D.
The Contractor shall submit for Engineer's approval, no later than 6 weeks prior to the
commencement of testing and commissioning, a schedule of all Electrical Equipment
tests and commissioning procedures that he intends to carry out to prove that the
Electrical Equipment complies with the requirements of the Specification together with
his proposed programme for such testing and commissioning.
E.
Tests shall not commence before the schedule of tests has been approved and such other
tests as may be required by the Engineer shall be included within the schedule of tests.
F.
The Contractor shall give to the Engineer in writing at least ten days' notice of the date
by which he will be ready to make the specified tests on completion of installation.
Unless otherwise agreed the tests shall take place within seven days after the said date
on such day or days as the Engineer shall in writing notify the Contractor.
G.
The tests shall as far as possible be carried out under normal working conditions to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and shall extend over such periods as he may direct.
H.
The Contractor shall provide all skilled labour, supervision, consumables, apparatus
and instruments required for commissioning and testing and within a reasonable time
thereafter furnish to the Engineer a total of six certificates of all tests performed and
accepted, signed by the Contractor, or an authorised person acting on his behalf, as
prescribed in the appropriate regulations and specifications.
I.
If any part of the Electrical Equipment fails to pass the specified tests, further tests
shall, if required by the Engineer, be repeated. The Contractor shall, without delay, put
in hand such modifications as are necessary to meet the requirements as described in
the Contract and any expense which the Owner may have incurred by reason of such
further tests may be deducted from the Contract price.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SEC.29 - 1
J.
Acceptance shall not in any way absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
performance of the Electrical Equipment after erection as a complete working system in
all respects.
K.
Each completed system within the installation shall be tested as a whole under normal
site operating conditions to ensure that each component functions correctly in
conjunction with the rest of the system.
L.
The Contractor's particular attention is drawn to the requirements of Section 01650 and
01700 of the Specification in regard to testing, commissioning and handover of the
Works.
PART 2 TESTING
2.01
TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
The Contractor is to programme, oversee, co-ordinate and record all the testing and
commissioning of the electrical systems. This will be carried out in co-ordination with
those elements undertaken by the mechanical services Contractor. The electrical
Contactor shall allow for liaising and attendance and providing all necessary test and
general data information at the right times.
B.
The systems are to undergo phases of testing and commissioning, in accordance with
the following:-
C.
2.02
Phase 1.
Works testing and quality assurance of elements;
Phase 2.
Site installation, wiring, checks, performance and operational tests for
all elements;
Phase 3.
Sub system group operational tests/performance tests;
Phase 4.
Complete system operational and performance tests on dummy loads;
Phase 5.
Complete system operational and performance tests on Client loads.
All the electrical systems, whether mentioned in this section or not, will be subject to
testing and commissioning.
ELECTRICAL TESTING
A.
At the completion of the electrical installation for each facility it shall be tested to
ensure that it is satisfactory and complies with the requirements of the Specification.
B.
Tests of the installation shall be carried out in the following sequence:
1.
Ring-main continuity
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SEC.29 - 2
2.03
2.
Protective conductor
equipotential bonding
continuity,
including
main
and
supplementary
3.
Earth electrode resistance
4.
Measurement of insulation resistance including site built assemblies and
distribution cables
5.
Check of protection by electrical separation, barriers and enclosures
6.
Measurement of the insulation on non-conducting floors and walls
7.
Check of phase rotation
8.
Verification of polarity
9.
Measurement of earth fault loop impedance
10.
Test of operation of residual current devices
11.
All external distribution cables, both high and low voltage in accordance with
the relevant standard(s).
12.
Fault simulation on protective devices or control system of stand-by generator,
transformers, 13.8 KV cubicles, power distribution boards, motor control
centers, etc...
13.
Load test on stand by generator, sub-station, power distribution boards,
panelboards, etc...
14.
All 13.8 kV cables and equipment shall be pressure tested. The Contractor shall
submit a method statement for the test procedure, voltage levels and safety
precautions.
LOW CURRENT SYSTEMS TESTING
A.
All special low current systems such as telephone, intercom, public address, fire
detection and alarm, Data, CCTV, CATV, security, sound, etc. shall be tested as
specified herein or recommended by the manufacturers.
B.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing the procedure to test these
systems as a whole for the site.
C.
At the completion of these special systems installation for each facility, these shall be
tested individually for each facility then it should be tested with their main control
panel, such as fire detection and alarm, telephone, CATV etc... so that to see the good
performance of these systems as a whole.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SEC.29 - 3
PART 3 COMMISSIONING
3.01
GENERAL
A.
All Electrical Equipment and integral systems shall be commissioned in accordance
with the relevant standards and regulations given in the Specification and to the
recommendations of specialist suppliers (e.g. Switchboards, Standby Generators, Fire
Detection and Alarm System, Public Address System, Cables, etc.).
B.
Full operational tests shall be carried out on all systems to demonstrate that they operate
in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.
3.02
SWITCHBOARDS
A.
Design tests of:
Rated continuous current
Short circuit current
Enclosure dielectric.
B.
Production tests of:
Dielectric
Mechanical operation
Grounding
Control wiring
Electrical operation.
3.03
STANDBY GENERATOR
A.
Field erected fuel piping shall be tested with air pressure and proven right at 150
percent of the working pressure for a period of two hours.
B.
Shops tests shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements:
C.
1.
Unless otherwise directed, all tests shall be performed in the presence of the
Supervising Engineer.
2.
Each assembled engine and generator shall be tested in accordance with the
manufacturer's customary practice.
3.
All components shall be checked, lube-oil leaks shall be remedied.
Following the complete installation of the generating unit and its associated equipment,
field tests shall be conducted. The Contractor shall provide all instruments and supplies
required for the tests. Fuel instruments and instrumentation procedures to be followed
shall be appropriate for the tests to be performed. Prior to the startup of any generating
units, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all piping
systems have been cleaned.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SEC.29 - 4
D.
E.
Sequence of Field Tests:
1.
Check all engine and driven unit mounting bolts.
2.
Check alignment of engine and generator by dial indication.
3.
Check generator motor air gap.
4.
Check generator and exciter insulation resistance with an insulation resistance
tester.
5.
Perform engine manufacturer's recommended prestarting checks. This shall
include a test of the prestart lube-oil pump to determine if adequate oil pressure
is provided.
6.
Start engine and make engine manufacturer's after starting checks during a
reasonable run-in or warm-up period.
7.
Operate generator with step loads of 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% for 7 hours and
110% for 1 hour rated load. Record data hourly, including current, voltage,
frequency KW and temperature information. A load bank has to be provided by
the Contractor.
8.
Increase engine speed by means of the governor.
overspeed device trips.
9.
Check functioning of high coolant temperature trip by restricting air into the
radiator.
10.
Shut down engine and record pressure at which low oil pressure device trips.
Check speed at which
Checks to be made during field testing:
1.
During the tests, all operations of which the controls on the panel and at the
switchboard are capable shall be performed to assure that all controls are
functioning in a satisfactory manner.
2.
At several points during the tests, each instrument on the switchboard and
engine panel shall be observed to assure that all instruments and gauges are
functioning properly.
3.
During the tests, all auxillary and accessory equipment, all valves including
pilot valves, and the injection pumps shall be checked to assure proper
operation.
4.
During the 100 percent load test, pyrometer reading of each cylinder of each
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SEC.29 - 5
engine shall be taken and recorded at 1/2 hour intervals.
F.
3.04
After completion of the tests, a general inspection shall be made for:
1.
Leaks in the engine, piping systems, tanks, etc.
2.
Blow-by
3.
Crankcase contamination
4.
Crankshaft misalignment
5.
Generator misalignment and damage to generator bearings.
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
A.
Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is
energized. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made as work progresses.
B.
A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of
tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings,
dates and witnesses. The Engineer shall be notified before the start of the required tests.
All items found at variance with the drawings or this specification during testing or
inspection by the Engineer, shall be corrected.
C.
Test reports shall be delivered to the Engineer as completed.
D.
All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests
shall be made available by the installing contractor. The following equipment shall be a
minimum for conducting the tests:
1.
Ladders and scaffolds as required to access all installed equipment.
2.
Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance.
3.
Intelligent device programmer/tester.
4.
Two way radios, flashlights, smoke generation devices and supplies.
5.
Laptop computer with programming software for any required programme
revision.
6.
A manufacturer recommended device for measuring air flow through air duct
smoke detector sampling assemblies.
7.
Decibel meter.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SEC.29 - 6
E.
In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing contractor, the
installation shall be subject to test by the Engineer.
F.
A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the fire alarm system components
and installation will be prepared by the Contractor and submitted for review and
approval to the Engineer in accordance with NFPA 72, and this specification. The
contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the ATP, demonstrating the
function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components,
circuits, and programming.
G.
A programme matrix shall be prepared by the installing Contractor referencing each
alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that
input. In the case of outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving
"any", "or", "not", "count", "time", and "timer" statements; the complete output
equation shall be referenced in the matrix.
H.
A complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays and
logging printers shall be prepared by the installing contractor prior to the ATP.
I.
In conducting the ATP, the Engineer shall request demonstration of any or all input and
output functions. The items tested shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and
correct subsequent system operation in the event of:
a.
Open, shorted and grounded intelligent analog or network signalling
circuits.
b.
Open, shorted and grounded conventional zone circuits.
c.
Open, shorted and grounded speaker telephone circuits.
d.
Primary power or battery disconnected.
e.
Intelligent device removal.
f.
Incorrect device at address.
g.
Printer trouble, off line or out of paper.
System evacuation alarm indicating appliances shall be demonstrated as
follows:
a.
All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed
b.
Audibility and visibility at required levels.
System indications shall be demonstrated as follows:
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SEC.29 - 7
4.
5.
6.
J.
a.
Correct message display for each alarm input at the control panel, each
remote alpha-numeric display and each CRT terminal.
b.
Correct annunciator light for each alarm input at each annunciator and
colour graphic terminal as shown on the drawings.
c.
Correct printer logging for all system activity.
System off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows:
a.
Correct zone transmitted for each alarm input
b.
Trouble signals received for disconnect
Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows:
a.
System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of time as
specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be
created and the system shall perform as specified for a period as
specified.
b.
System primary power shall be restored for forty eight hours and system
charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a fully charged
battery bank.
c.
System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked at the
fire alarm control panel using the test codes and displayed on the LCD
display.
Fireman's HVAC override system functions shall be demonstrated as follows:
a.
Operation of key lockout switch preventing unauthorised operation of
controls.
b.
On/Off controls of each controlled element and test of interaction of
other automatic and manual control functions while in the over-ride
mode.
c.
Correct status display of monitored elements.
d.
Correct logging of activity to printer and historical memory as
programmed.
In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed during the ATP
procedure, at the discretion of the Engineer, the test shall be terminated. The installing
contractor shall retest the system, correcting all deficiencies and providing test
documentation to the Engineer. The Engineer may elect to require the complete ATP to
be preformed again if, in his opinion, modifications to the system warrant complete
retesting.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SEC.29 - 8
K.
Changes made to a systems configuration program required by the acceptance inspector
or to comply with the systems operating parameters shall be validated to insure that in
making the software programming change no other part of the systems operation was
effected. The validation shall utilize systems software which meets the requirements of
NFPA 72 section 7-1.6 "System Reacceptance Testing" as specified in the NFPA 72
National Fire Alarm Code 1993 edition. Change validation methods other than that
described will not be considered acceptable and shall allow the acceptance inspector to
require the complete ATP to be performed again.
PART 4 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING
4.01
INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING OF CLIENTS STAFF:
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of suitably qualified personnel for
the instruction and supervision of the staff nominated by the Client at Site in the
operation and routine maintenance of all Electrical Equipment and associated works.
The instruction and training shall be for periods of six hours daily for twelve days after
the satisfactory commissioning of the installation and as necessary, after each
subsequent commissioning of a system or part thereof.
B.
The Contractor shall accept for training up to four technicians in every system
nominated by the Client who will be assigned to train in all aspects of the installation
on Site during operation of the installation.
C.
The cost of the training will be the Contractor's responsibility. During the training
period the salaries of the trainees, their subsistence and all their out-of-pocket expenses
will be the responsibility of the Owner.
D.
Before the commencement of such training, the Contractor shall have available
additional copies of sufficient As Built drawings, record drawings, operating and
maintenance instructions and spare parts lists referred to Section 16010 Basic Electrical
Requirements, of the Specification so that the staff nominated can fully understand the
operation and maintenance of the equipment. Two months prior to the commencement
of commissioning and training, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
approval, the schedule for testing, commissioning and training programme.
END OF SECTION 29
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
SEC.29 - 9
Electrical Approved Manufacturer List
Item
Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
Manufacturer
Origin
Manufacturer
Origin
Manufacturer
Origin
1
Main Distribution Boards
Schnider
France
Moeller
Germany
ABB
Sweden
2
Distribution Boards
Schnider
France
Moeller
Germany
ABB
Sweden
3
Isolating Switch
Schnider
France
Moeller
Germany
Legrand
France
4
Contactors and controls
Schnider
France
ABB
Sweden
Moeller
Germany
5
Circuit Breakers
Schnider
France
Moeller
Germany
ABB
Sweden
6
Wires and Cables
Synergy
Local
Pirelli General
Turkey
Draka
UK
7
Wiring Accessories, Sockets &
switchs
Schnider
France
Legrand
France
Bticino
Italy
8
PVC Conduits & Accessories
Visman
Local
Mericaf
Local
Kasem plast
Local
9
Wiring for Fire Alarm System
Teldor
Local
Pirelli
Turkey
Cavical
Italy
10
Wiring for Data System
R&M
Swiss
Teldor
Local
Synergy
Local
11
Data Outlet & Patch Panel
R&M
Swiss
3M
Germany
Legrand
France
12
Public Address System
TOA
Japan
Bosch
Holland
Honeywell
USA
13
Fire Alarm System
Simplex
USA
Notifier
USA
Morely
Canada
14
Comunication Sysem
Aiphone
Japan
Ormel
Italy
Comelit
Italy
15
Access Control System
Honeywell
USA
GE
USA
Cardax
Newzland
16
CCTV System
Bosch
Holland
Honeywell
USA
Pelco
USA
17
Lighting Fixtures
Disano
Italy
Thorn
UK
Philips
Holland
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
31
ِApproved Manufacturer List
Electrical Approved Manufacturer List
Item
Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
Manufacturer
Origin
Manufacturer
Origin
Manufacturer
Origin
OBO
Bettermann
Germany
Wiska
UK
18
Cable Glands & Accessories
BICC
UK
19
Telephone & PABX System
Panasonic
Japan
20
Floor Boxes
Wiremold
21
UPS
22
Automatic Hand Dryers
23
SMATV System
24
Stand by Diesel Generator
25
Lightning Protection
26
27
Power Factor Correction
Cable Trays, Ladders & Metalic
Cable Trunking
28
Elevators
Sweden
Siemens
Germany
UK
Ericson
OBO
Bettermann
Germany
Legrand
France
APC
USA
Marlin Gerin
France
Makelsan
Turkish
Wandsworth
UK
Vortice
Italy
Hirshman
Germany
Fuba
Germany
Polytron
Germany
SDMO
France
Caterpillar
UK
Perkins
UK
Furse
Schneider
Electric
OBO
Bettermann
UK
Helita
France
Indelic
France
France
EKG
Germany
Simens
Germany
Germany
Nidax
Germany
Wiremold
UK
Shindler
Swiss
Otis
France
Mitsubishi
Japan
Notes:
1. Given list of manufactures is intended only to be used as a guideline for
materials/equipment quality objective.
2. Contractors can provide equal or better quality of that stated, and as per engineer
approval.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
32
ِApproved Manufacturer List
Technical Specifications
FIRST OPTION
Sports center -Ramallah
Ramallah Municipality Project Name:
Ramallah Recreational Complex
Phase 1
Sports Center
Ramallah, Palestine
Volume VI
GENERAL AND PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
C- Mechanical Specification
SPORT HALL
Funded by: IBSA
INDIA BRAZIL SOUTH AFRICA
Through: United Nations Development Programme
Programme Assistance to the Palestinian people
Designed by
First Option- Amara
Architects, Engineers & Construction Managements
2009
1
DIVISION 2
DIVISION 2 – MECHANICAL WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1000
Section 1001
Section 1002
Section 1100
Section 1101
Section 1102
Section 1103
Section 1104
Section 1105
Section 1106
Section 1107
Section 1300
Section 1301
Section 1302
Section 1303
Section 1401
Section 1402
Section 1403
Section 1404
Section 1405
- Basic Mechanical Requirements .......................
- Electrical Requirement s for Mechanical
Equipment .........................................................
- Mechanical Identification..................................
- Plumbing Piping................................................
- Plumbing Valves ...............................................
- Plumbing Supports, Hangers and Brackets .......
- Plumbing Specialties.........................................
- Plumbing Fixtures .............................................
- Plumbing Piping Insulation...............................
- Water Heaters....................................................
- Plumbing Pumps
- Fire Protection Systems.....................................
- Fire Protection Piping .......................................
- Fire Pumps ........................................................
- Fire Protection Specialties ................................
- Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning.......
- HVAC Thermal Insulation................................
- Ductwork...........................................................
- Ductwork Accessories.......................................
- Air Outlets and Inlets
SECTION 1000
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
This Section covers the basic general requirements applicable to all Division
1 works that shall be provided for by the Contractor.
B.
The following specifications may be used as a guide for pricing but the Contractor
will be fully responsible for the mechanical services as indicated diagrammatically
on the drawings and to supply complete Mechanical Services Installations to the
approval of the Engineer and complying with the aesthetic requirements of the
Architect/Interior Designer.
1.02
CALCULATIONS
A.
The Contractor shall acquaint himself with the constructional details of the
buildings and exterior works both before and during the course of erection
and shall take his own particulars with regard to the installation of
mechanical equipment. The Contractor shall check the sizes of all
mechanical equipment taking into account any additions or deletions required
to ensure the installations fit into the room or other spaces allocated and in
relation to other plant and equipment being provided.
B.
The Contractor shall undertake and prepare all necessary calculations and
drawings relating to the mechanical systems and equipment and for all
associated foundation, structural and builder's and services work, except
where specifically defined otherwise in the Specification and/or on the
Drawing.
C.
The Contractor shall provide and submit to the Engineer all calculations,
drawings and supporting data for the mechanical equipment.
D.
The Contractor shall provide calculations, details, drawings and technical
data to enable the Engineer to ascertain the correctness of the specialist
designs of the associated foundations, supports, bases and fixings.
E.
All calculations shall use final approved building construction elements, Uvalues including curtain walling system, other glazing types, floors, walls,
roof. The Contractor shall use software based thermal modelling
programme(s) capable of demonstrating building thermal storage and 3dimensional heat transfer for external element construction.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
The Contractor shall provide submittals as directed in the individual sections.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-1
B.
The Contractor shall provide method statements for installation procedures
of ductwork, pipe work, plant, equipment and BMS/automatic controls and
all specialised systems.
C.
Refer to Division (1).
1.04
WORKING DRAWINGS
A.
The Contractor shall provide for approval working drawings of the whole
mechanical works. The drawings shall include, but not necessarily be limited
to the followings:1.
Co-ordinated general arrangements of all services to a scale of
not less than 1:50
2.
Co-ordinated detailed layouts of plant rooms and similar
spaces to a scale of not less than 1:20.
3.
Schedules of all equipment to be installed, together with
starting and full load current and running power consumption
along with any integral power factor correction capacitors.
4.
Indicate with accurate dimensions sizes and positions of all
plant, equipment, pipes, thermal and acoustic insulation,
conduits, trunking, under floor ducting, cable tray, cables
together with all inspection points and cable joints.
5.
Fully indicate all ductwork, pipe work, sizes and positions of
all plant equipment and valves together with all inspection
points and test positions.
6.
Fully indicate all builders’ work requirements inclusive of all
foundations, bases, plinths, sumps and holes together with the
overall sizes and masses of the plant concerned.
7.
Indicate the number, size and services for every cable, duct,
pipe for every service within the building.
8.
Indicate all equipment and control wiring diagrams for all
systems.
9.
Show all pipes, cables and ducts in pits and service ducts on
drawings to a scale of 1:50 or larger.
10.
Show clearly all plumbing and drainage and setting out
dimensions for all drainage pipe work and manholes, both
within the building and throughout.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-2
B.
C.
11.
Services zoning principle in cross-section for each ceiling
void area having extensive engineering. The sections are to
demonstrate the sizes, dimensions of zones allocated for
separate HVAC, public health, electrical, and other
engineering services along with services cross-over zones,
support/brackets zones thermal insulation, clearance and
maintenance allowances to demonstrate the correct
coordination.
12.
Fully indicate extent and construction/installation details for all acoustic,
noise and vibration control systems including floating floor constructions,
inertia bases and plant room.
The symbols used for each service for all working drawings shall be shown
on separate drawings.
In addition to the working drawings, the Contractor shall obtain and provide
at the request of the Engineer, two sets of all manufacturers’ detailed
drawings for all items of plant, equipment, apparatus and materials. These
drawings shall be suitably titled and have drawings references number added.
Specific requirements are given in the individual specification Sections.
D.
All drawings, diagrams and schedules called for in this clause shall be
submitted to the Engineer for examination and approval.
E.
The Contractor shall make due allowance for an approval/comment period
and it must be clearly understood that the correctness of the submitted
information will directly affect this comment/approval period.
F.
The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating all mechanical,
electrical, lift, fire protection, plumbing, drainage and irrigation works, and
other engineering systems such that each may be installed in a proper
manner, ensuring correct performance and allowing adequate maintenance
access. All services shall be installed such that the positioning of ducts,
pipes, cables, and all items of equipment avoid conflict. The Contractor's
working drawings shall indicate any services co-ordination needs prior to
submission to the Engineer for approval; tender drawing shall not be reissued
as working drawings.
1.05
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
A.
Following approval of the Contractor's drawings by the Engineer, they shall
constitute "Construction Drawings" and the E and M equipment shall be
manufactured and installed in accordance with those approved drawings. The
acceptance by the Engineer of any such drawing shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility under the Contract and shall not commit the
Engineer or make the Engineer liable for any mistake of the manufacturer's
deficiencies in strength or efficiency in operation of any part of any item for
its specified purpose.
B.
The Engineer reserves the right subsequently to amend or add to the
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-3
Construction Drawings as may be necessary or expedient.
C.
The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer, immediately after approval of each
detailed drawing, one copy and two dye-line prints.
1.06
REGULATIONS
A.
The installation materials and components shall comply with all relevant
statutory instructions and regulations current at the date of tender, whether so
detailed or not. In particular, the following regulations and standards must be
followed: 1.
Standards issued by Jordanian Standards Organisation
2.
British Standard Specifications
3.
British Standard Code of Practice
4.
UK IEE Regulations for Electrical Installation
5.
US National Electrical Code
6.
US National Electrical Safety Code
7.
UK Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
(CIBSE)
8.
The American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
9.
Electrical Regulations issued by JEPCO
10.
US Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association (SMACNA)
11.
UK HVCA DW142 Ductwork specification.
12.
US National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA)
13.
IEE Regulations for Electrical Equipment of Buildings
14.
Local Laws, Rules and Regulations
15.
U.K. CIBSE Commissioning codes
Refrigeration and Controls Installations.
for
Air,
Water,
One copy of all the above codes and standards in hard-copy are to be held on site for
the duration of the contract and be available for reference by the Contractors and
Clients Site Supervision Teams.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-4
1.07
CLIMATIC AND OPERATING CONDITIONS
A.
City
: palestine
B.
Elevation
: 850m above sea level
C.
Design conditions : Outdoor dry bulb summer
38 °C (For calculating heat
gain)
: Outdoor dry bulb summer
40 °C (For chiller selection)
: Outdoor dry bulb winter
0°C
1.08
WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the components for
each system are mutually compatible and integrated to form fully efficient
systems complying with the Drawings and Specification. Corresponding
parts throughout the Works shall be made to gauge and be interchangeable
wherever possible. The Contractor shall, when required by the Engineer,
prove interchange ability by the actual interchange of the various parts.
B.
All articles and materials specified to conform to Jordanian, British and other
standards shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the appropriate standard
number specified except where marking is impracticable when relevant
documents shall include this information.
C.
All materials and workmanship shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain a competent supervising engineer and
supervisors for each specialisation and for each section of the work on Site
throughout the whole of the time to the completion of the works. The
Engineer shall give prior approval to the appointment of this supervising
engineer and shall have the authority to withdraw this approval at any time.
No person shall be allowed to execute any type of work that is normally
carried out by a skilled tradesman unless he is thoroughly experienced and
proficient in the trade concerned. The Engineer shall have the authority to
require any tradesman to demonstrate his proficiency to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
1.09
INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS
A.
The Engineer and his duly authorised representative shall have at all
reasonable times access to the Contractor's premises to inspect and examine
the materials and workmanship of mechanical equipment being
manufactured there, and if part of such equipment is being manufactured on
other premises, the Contractors shall obtain for the Engineer and for his duly
authorised representative permission to inspect as if that equipment was
manufactured on the Contractor's own premises. Such inspection,
examination or testing, if made, shall not relieve the Contractor from any
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-5
obligation under the Contract.
B.
All works, materials and the like rejected shall be corrected or replaced as
necessary at the Contractor's own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C.
Where the mechanical equipment is a composite unit of several individual
pieces manufactured in different places, it shall be assembled and tested as
one complete working unit, at the manufacturer's works, to the relevant test
or tests required.
D.
The Contractor shall submit his proposed programme of tests for the
Engineer' approval six weeks before the commencement of testing.
The aforementioned works tests carried out before delivery to the Site shall
not in any way relieve the Contractor of completing satisfactory Site tests
after erection as specified.
E.
F.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer reasonable notice, at least ten clear
days in writing, of the date and the place at which any mechanical Equipment
will be ready for testing as provided in the Contract and the Engineer shall
thereupon at his discretion notify the Contractor of his intention either to
release such part upon receipt of works tests certificates or of his intention to
inspect such part. The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer six duly
certified copies of all relevant test readings.
E.
The Contractor shall provide, free of charge, such labour, materials,
electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus, instruments and other things as may
be reasonably demanded to carry out efficiently such tests of the mechanical
equipment in accordance with the Contract, and shall provide facilities to the
Engineer or to his authorised representative to accomplish such testing.
Where inspection or testing is to be carried out at a Sub-contractor's works, a
representative of the Contractor shall be present.
F.
Works tests shall also be carried out with due consideration is given to the
Site conditions under which the mechanical equipment is required to
function. The test certificates shall give all details of such tests.
G.
Specific performance works tests are described in the relevant Sections of
Division 9, and include all major items of Mechanical, HVAC and Plumbing
plant and equipment.
1.10
CERTIFIED DRAWINGS
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all "Certified" drawings
from manufacturers of mechanical equipment, prior to their manufacture and
installation. A "Certified' manufacturer's drawing shall mean a drawing
which is prepared by a manufacturer showing the exact dimensions and
details of items of the mechanical equipment, as they will be supplied and
installed on the site.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-6
1.11
SAMPLES
A.
The Contractor shall provide a sample, properly labelled, of all fittings, valves,
insulation, cocks, unions, grilles, dampers, switchgear, cables and other like
accessories described in the Specification or as required by the Engineer.
1.12
PROTECTION AND CARE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
A.
All mechanical equipment shall be packed in robust containers to prevent
damage and mishandling during transport to Site. Before dispatch from
works, all mechanical equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, protected
against damage, deterioration, corrosion and ingress of dirt and packed and
protected suitable for prolonged storage in a humid and saline atmosphere.
B.
During storage and erection at the Site, the mechanical equipment shall be
kept clean and free from dirt and debris, and water shall not be allowed to
remain in any pockets of the equipment. All items of mechanical equipment
shall be stored clear of the ground on suitable timbers to the approval of the
Engineer.
C.
All mechanical equipment, particularly electrical and other sensitive
instrumentation shall at all times be protected so that it is not subject to
damage by rainwater, moisture, dust, etc., from any source. Mechanical
equipment that may be damaged by heat or sun shall be protected
accordingly. All open pipe and duct ends whether installed or in store shall
be fitted with plastic caps or suitable protective covering.
1.13
GUARDS
A.
A guard shall be provided for all open unprotected intakes to axial fans,
centrifugal flow fans, for V-belt drives.
B.
Fan guards shall be manufactured by the fan maker, of galvanised steel wire
mesh, not greater than 25mm attached to a rigid galvanised steel rod
framework.
C.
Guards to V-belt drives shall be made of galvanised steel wire of at least 12
gauge, with a mesh not greater than 12.5mm attached to a rigid galvanised
framework of rods of not less than 10mm diameter. The guard shall be
readily removable to permit the belts to be changed. Adequate access panels
shall be provided in the side of the guard to allow tachometer readings of the
two shafts to be taken and belt tension tested. Allowance shall be made for
the adjustment of the motor on its slide rails.
1.14
CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning all mechanical equipment at
all times to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The cleaning shall be carried out
notwithstanding the fact that the installation or any part thereof may be in use
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-7
or partial use within the premises in occupation by others. A Certificate of
Completion will not be issued until the Engineer is satisfied that all dirt,
jointing materials and other extraneous and injurious materials have been
removed.
1.15
AIR CONDITIONED STORES
A. The Contractor shall provide air-conditioned site stores for all goods that
deteriorate when subjected to the site climatic conditions detailed. The
contractor will adhere strictly to the Manufacturer's instructions with regard
to storage temperatures for all materials being used for the construction of
this project.
1.16
PAINTING
A.
The preparation, painting and treatment of mechanical equipment surfaces
shall be in accordance with relevant items in Division 9 and Division 9.
B.
Full details of the manufacturer's standard finishes shall be given to the
Engineer for his approval prior to manufacturer. Special care shall be taken
to ensure standard finishes are suitable for the particular conditions
applicable to the individual items of plant.
C.
Any damage to paintwork that occurs shall be made good by the Contractor
at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E.
All bright metal parts shall be covered before despatch with an approved
protective compound and protected adequately during delivery to Site. After
erection these parts shall be cleaned with a correct solvent and polished
bright where required.
F.
Machined mating surfaces such as gear teeth, etc., shall be coated with a
thick layer of grease. Other machined surfaces shall be given a coat of rustpreventing paint, which shall be readily removable when required.
G.
Where it is the usual practice of the manufacturer of special items such as
pumps, compressors, electric motors, gear boxes, switch gear, etc., to apply a
high standard of protective enamel paintwork in the shop before despatch,
this will be acceptable provided any subsequent damage to the paintwork is
made good by the Contractor, at his own cost. The preferred finish is light
grey.
H.
The inside of outdoor control cubicles, cabinets, etc., where condensation is
liable to occur, shall be coated with an approved anti-condensation
composition.
I.
The Contractor shall obtain the paint manufacturer's guarantee that each coat
of paint is compatible with the previous and subsequent coats so that peeling,
flaking and other faults do not occur.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-8
J.
The Contractor shall include for painting all pipes, ducts, flange edges, etc.,
prior to their being insulated.
1.17
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATES
A.
Nameplates: Each item of mechanical equipment and plant shall have the
manufacturer's name or trademark on a corrosion-resistant nameplate,
securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The manufacturer's name or
trademark may be cast integrally, stamped or otherwise permanently marked
upon the item of the equipment. The nameplate shall show the equipment
reference number, date of manufacture and the capacity. Such other
information as the manufacturer may consider necessary to complete
identification shall be shown on the nameplates.
1.18
LABELS
A.
Identification labels of plastic laminate or similar approved materials engraved black
on white unless otherwise agreed, with not less than 5mm "line" style letters shall be
fixed on all controls, switches and distribution gear, by means of at least two brass
screws. Socket outlets of all voltages shall be similarly identified or engraved.
B.
The labels shall bear the identification shown on the Drawings, such as
indication, designation, function and, where necessary, phase, voltage,
current, frequency, pressure and temperature. All labels shall be in Arabic
and English.
1.19
LUBRICATION
A.
The Contractor shall furnish a complete schedule of recommended oils and
other lubricants. The number of different types of lubricants shall be kept to a
minimum. The schedule and the name of the supplier of the lubricants shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval before incorporation in the
instruction manuals. In the case of grease lubricated roller type bearings for
electric motors, a lithium base grease is preferred.
B.
Where lubrication is affected by means of grease, preference shall be given to
a pressure system that does not require frequent adjustment or recharging.
Frequent, for this purpose, means more than once weekly and grease systems
having shorter periods between greasing should be avoided. Where necessary
for accessibility, grease nipples shall be placed at the end of extension piping
and, when a number of such points can be grouped conveniently, the nipples
shall be brought to a battery plate mounted in a convenient position. Button
head type nipples shall be of the same size and type for every part of the
plant. Arrangements shall be provided to prevent bearings being overfilled
with either grease or oil.
C.
Where more than one special grease is required a grease gun for each special
type shall be supplied and permanently labelled.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-9
D.
Oil sumps shall be fitted with oil level indicators of the sight glass type, or
where this is not practical, with dipsticks. The indicators shall show the level of
all temperatures likely to be experienced in service. The normal, maximum and
minimum levels at 30oC shall be clearly visible in the sight glass type from the
normal access floor to the particular item of plant, and they shall be easily
dismantled.
E.
All sight glasses shall be firmly held and enclosed in metal protection in such a
manner that they cannot be accidentally damaged.
F.
All lubrication systems shall be designed so as not to present a fire hazard.
Particular care shall be taken to prevent leakage of lubricants and to avoid
leaking lubricants coming into current contact with any electrical equipment,
heated surfaces or any other potential source of fire.
G. The Contractor shall supply flushing oil for each lubrication system when an
item of plant is ready for preliminary running and a sufficient quantity of the
approved lubricants for setting to work and for the commercial operation for
one year after the relevant Certification of Completion has been issued.
1.20
SPECIAL TOOLS
A.
The Contractor shall supply two complete sets of any special tools necessary
for the operation, maintenance and dismantling of the mechanical equipment.
The Contractor shall supply wall-mounted strongboxes; each fitted with a
suitable lock and two keys, and located near the item of mechanical
equipment for which they will be used. Such tools shall not be used by the
Contractor during the erection of the mechanical equipment.
1.21
SUNDRY BUILDERS WORK IN CONNECTION WITH SERVICES
A.
The Contractor shall include in his prices for drilling, rawbolting, plugging,
screwing and nailing of all brackets and hangers for all pipework, ductwork
conduit, cable tray, cable trunking and cable supports. The Contractor shall
also include for supplying all brackets, hangers and supports as necessary.
1.22
NOISE (REFER ALSO TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 1407)
A.
Noise Criteria
B.
The Contractor shall employ an Acoustic Specialist, approved by the
Engineer, to carryout all noise and vibration analysis, calculations,
recommendations and final specification of acoustic treatments.
C.
The Contractor shall provide a quiet installation. All items of mechanical
equipment shown on the Drawings shall be carefully chosen with a view to
silent operation. The recommendations in BS 5720 and BS 8233 shall be
followed wherever necessary. The Contractor shall prepare detailed noise
level calculations to indicate the anticipated noise levels in all occupied
.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-10
areas. Fan chambers, technical rooms and chiller plant rooms shall be
constructed to ensure that noise levels in surrounding spaces meet specified
levels.
D.
All possible steps shall be taken, (e.g. by the use of sound insulation, antivibration mountings, floating floors, walls, ceilings and careful design of
pumps, motors, fans, ducts, bends, dampers, grilles and other equipment) to
reduce the noise produced by the mechanical equipment.
E.
The Contractor shall determine the noise levels of all primary mechanical
equipment before proceeding with manufacture and submit sound power
levels of such equipment and resultant room noise levels to the Engineer for
approval before manufacture is commenced.
1.23
ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTINGS AND SOUND ABSORPTION
A.
The Contractor shall provide and fix all mechanical equipment to prevent
noise and the transmission of vibration through the structure.
B.
All fans, motors, chillers, pumps and other items, as appropriate, shall be
mounted on resilient mountings in such a manner that the plant foundations
are isolated from the floor or structure. Pumps shall be installed on inertia
bases. In addition, all rotating plant shall be statically and dynamically
balanced.
C.
Mechanical vibration shall be eliminated by the use of anti-vibration
mountings and flexible connections to ensure an isolation efficiency in
excess of 98% from the building structure except where defined otherwise on
the Drawings or in the Specification.
D.
Spring type anti-vibration mountings shall be the captive partially encased
and restrained type to prevent lateral movement.
1.24
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A.
“As Built” record drawings are to be produced as the installation work is
completed. The working drawings shall be checked against the installation,
corrected and issued for approval. The Contractor shall provide a delivery
schedule of the drawing submissions based on the construction programme.
Thirty days prior to the date of the handing over certificate, the Contractor
shall provide the final copy of the "as built" record drawings of the whole
works for approval.
B.
The Drawings shall include the following:1.
General arrangements of all services to a scale of not less than
1:50.
2.
Detailed layouts of plant rooms and similar spaces to a scale
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-11
of not less than 1:20.
3.
Schedules of all plant and cross referenced equipment to the
maintenance manual.
4.
All equipment and control wiring diagrams. Diagrams must
be co-ordinated and show all required interlocks etc. between
systems or components.
5.
Indicate with accurate dimensions, sizes and positions of all
plant, equipment and valves together with all inspection
points and test positions. All plants to have indicated
manufacturer's name, model and type number also crossreferenced to maintenance manual.
6.
Fully indicate all ductwork, pipe work, sizes and positions of
all plant equipment and valves together with all inspection
points and test positions. All plant to have indicated
manufacturer's name model and type number also crossreferenced to maintenance manual.
7.
Show the disposition and depth of all cables, pipes, ducts,
buried direct in the ground and taken at intervals where cable
increase or decrease in number/size and at every point where
the services enter into or depart from ducts or buildings.
8.
Indicate the number, sizes and services for every cable, duct,
and pipe, for every service within each building. Circuit lists
for every distribution board shall be entered on to the relevant
drawings and such lists shall agree with the list fixed within
the distribution board door.
Show clearly on site drawings all the new buildings together
with all other existing buildings and other permanent features
with dimensions between such buildings
9.
10.
Cables, pipes, ducts, etc. clearly marked, together with
installed backfill and surround to each service.
11.
Show clearly all plumbing and drainage and setting out
dimensions for all drainage pipe work and manholes both
within the building throughout the site, together with drainage
pipe work backfill, or surround in each location. A schedule
shall be included to indicate each manhole size, cover size,
invert level and ground level.
C.
The symbol used for each service for all as built drawings shall be shown on
separate drawings.
D.
In order to achieve accurate as built drawings, all relevant information
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-12
relating to the mechanical works shall be entered onto prints supplied
immediately after the work has been carried out. The marked up prints shall
be available for inspection at the Contractor's site office at any reasonable
time during the progress of the works.
E.
All service routes, intersections and joints shown on the prints and finally
recorded shall be actually physically measured from permanent features and
accurate distances shall be shown on the Drawings.
F.
In addition to the ”as built drawings”, the Contractor shall obtain and provide
two sets of all manufacturers’ detailed drawings for all items of plant,
equipment, apparatus and materials. These drawings shall be suitably titled
and have drawing reference numbers added.
G.
The Contractor shall provide two copies of all “as built drawings” for review
comments and approval. Upon receiving approval in writing from the Engineer, or
his representative, the Contractor shall provide one negative copy of each approved
as built drawing and bind one set of prints into each of 6 No. copies of the operating
instructions specified in clause 1.25.
1.25
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A.
The working, operating and maintenance instruction shall be prepared in
draft as soon as the working drawings are in hand as the work progresses and
shall take the form of a manual in which fully detailed information relating to
the maintenance and operation of the complete installation and its component
parts is presented.
1.
Overall general description of the complete equipment
installed together with the method of functioning.
2.
Full technical descriptions of each and every item of
equipment, including the electrical circuit details as
applicable.
3.
Operating procedures for each section of the works and each
individual item of equipment or plant.
4.
Planned maintenance schedules for the installation and its
component parts to include commissioning performance
details and measurements.
5.
Schedule of components comprising each and every item of
equipment including manufacturer's name, description and
part number of each component.
6.
A copy of the manufacturer's literature, describing each item
of equipment, plant fittings and accessory type used
throughout the installation. This literature shall list the
technical data available, together with catalogue list numbers
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-13
for replacement purposes.
7.
Complete name of manufacturer, postal address, contact
person telephone, telefax and E mail shall be tabulated for
ease in procurement of spare parts. Spare parts forms
(standard) shall be prepared.
Generally all drawings must be arranged to flood out from
their position and be entirely visible when any part of the
manual is being read. They shall be printed on linen-backed
paper.
8.
Each section shall be encased in a loose-leaf ring binder
covered in plastic material of an approved colour and of a type
that shall be flat when open.
9.
The Contractor shall include for the preparation and supply of
six copies of the above operating and maintenance
instructions for each section after the Engineer has approved
all details.
10.
Electronic transfer of "As Built" drawings shall be provided as
required by the Engineer.
1.26
INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of suitably qualified
personnel for the instruction and supervision of the Employer's staff at Site in
the operation and routine maintenance of all mechanical equipment and
associate works. Unless specified to the contrary in the specific technical
clauses, instruction and training shall be for periods of six hours daily for
twenty days after the satisfactory commissioning of the installation and as
necessary, after each subsequent commissioning of a system or part thereof.
B.
The Contractor shall provide a fully working and completely documented
electronic planned preventative maintenance schedule (PPM). The PPM shall
contain all the recommendations of the individual manufacturers of the
equipment installed and recognised good practice. The Contractor shall
employ a specialist to provide the software and compile the records, along
with training of the Clients staff.
1.27
SPARES AND CONSUMABLES
A.
A list of spares and consumables for 1 year’s operation for every item of
plant and system shall be furnished by the Contractor at the time of
tendering.
1.28
MOCK-UPS
A.
The Contractor shall provide mechanical equipment to allow full
Architectural Mock-ups to be built as described elsewhere in the
specification.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-14
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
* END OF SECTION 1000 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
____________________________________________________________________________
Basic Mechanical Requirements
1000-15
SECTION 1001
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This Technical Specification details the electrical requirements of the mechanical
equipment and plant..
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the electrical requirements for mechanical equipment.
B.
Co-ordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full co-ordination of the
work of all trades.
1.03
A.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor shall employ specialist electrical equipment installers and
manufacturers that can demonstrate at least 5 years successful experience in the
supply and installation of the type of equipment and systems specified.
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The Electrical Requirements shall comply with the latest relevant British Standards
in all respects.
B.
The following are some of the most commonly used British and other Standards
associated with Electrical works. However, the Contractor shall ensure all applicable
Standards are complied with, whether listed here or not.
BS 1376
Specification for colours of light signals.
BS 2757
Method for determining the thermal classification of
electrical insulation.
BS 4099
Colours of indicator lights, push buttons, annunciators and
digital readouts.
BS 4794 Part 2
Special requirements for specific types of control switches.
BS 6231
Specification for PVC insulated cable for switchgear and
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-1
controlgear wiring.
IEC 144
1.05
Degrees of protection of enclosures for low voltage
switchgear & controlgear.
SUBMITTALS
A.Product data - relating to each and every component and assembly.
B.Systems information - full schematic and wiring diagrams including panel fascia layouts.
1.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.07
WARRANTY
A.
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
CONTROL PANEL ENCLOSURES
A.
Panels shall be constructed from 2-mm thick galvanised steel plate to IP54.
B.
Each composite panel shall include a main isolator interlocked with the door, which
shall be lockable. All panels shall be finished with stove enamel internally and
externally. All panels shall be sealed against ingress of moisture, dust and vermin.
All starters and controls shall be located in panels unless agreed otherwise by the
Engineer. Anti-condensation heaters and ventilation fans shall be provided in each
panel.
C.
An earthing bar shall be provided throughout the entire length of the control panel.
D.
A minimum of 2 doors shall be provided on any panels wider than 800 mm which
shall be fabricated to form rigid trays with dust excluding gaskets around their
perimeter.
E.
Doors shall be fitted with hinges to facilitate the removal of the door panels if
required.
F.
All doors shall be interlocked or arranged such that the door that provides access to
the main isolator must be opened first. All door locks shall be provided with common
keys.
G.
Panels shall be designed with the following limitations:1.
Height =2200 mm max.
2.
Length of single section =2400 mm max.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-2
2.02
A.
B.
CONTROL PANEL METERS
Ammeters and voltmeters shall be provided for each motor either of the moving coil
or moving iron self-contained type to BS 89 (Industrial Grade).
All instruments shall be flush mounted and those with moving coil or moving iron
movements shall be centre pivot type with circular scales unless otherwise specified
or approved. They shall be of the dead-beat type and shall be capable of carrying
their full-scale currents continuously without undue heating or impairing their
accuracy. The indicated reading shall be clearly defined and shown against indelibly
marked scales engraved on enamelled metal. The pointers shall be of clean outline.
The pointers and scales shall be such that the scale is marked on a stepped section to
avoid the casting of shadows on the scale, and parallax errors. The markings on the
dials shall be restricted to the scale markings. Instrument transformer ratios and
maker's name shall not appear prominently on the dials but may be marked in an
unobtrusive position. The glass covers to dials shall be of non-reflecting glass.
C.
Means shall be provided for zero adjustment without dismantling the instrument or
removing the instrument from the panel.
D.
Busbar voltmeters shall be calibrated while hot. All voltage circuits to instruments
shall be protected by a fuse on each pole of the circuit placed as close as possible to
the instrument transformer terminal or, where instruments are direct connected, as
close as possible to the mains connection in any one of three phases. All instruments
and apparatus shall be back connected and all instruments shall be properly earthed.
2.03
CONTROL SWITCHES AND ELECTRICAL ISOLATION
A.
Control switches shall comply with BS 4794.
B.
Switches shall be of the rotary type.
C.
All control switches shall be capable of being locked in the "off" position, unless
stated otherwise.
D.
The contacts of all switches shall be strong and have a positive wiping action when
operated.
E.
All control switches shall be provided with labels.
F.
All control panels shall be provided with a defeat proof door interlock isolator
controlling the main incoming supply. The isolator shall be capable of making and
breaking on full load without damage. Additionally the isolator shall have:1.
Auxiliary contacts to isolate any secondary supplies to the control panel.
2.
Manual override switch to enable the control system only to be energised
whilst the incoming supplies are isolated.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-3
G.
All terminals of the isolator (incoming and outgoing) are to be shrouded to prevent
accidental contact.
H.
The panel shall be constructed such that power (3-phase and single-phase) equipment
is located behind the interlocked isolator door.
I.
Control (extra low voltage) and BMS outstation equipment shall be located behind
the second or subsequent doors to ensure segregation from power equipment.
J.
The control system operating voltage shall not exceed 24V without prior
authorisation.
K.
All internal wiring shall be enclosed within wireways. Inter wiring that is required to
pass between the power and control sections of the panel shall be enclosed within
separate or segregated wireways to ensure electrical separation of the power and
control systems.
2.04
INDICATING LAMPS, INSTRUMENTS AND FITTINGS
A.
Indicating lamps fitted into the facias of switch and instrument cubicles or panels
shall be adequately ventilated.
B.
A red warning light shall be provided to indicate "Main Supply On".
C.
The following must be included on all local HVAC control panels.
D.
1.
Run/trip lamps for all equipment (plus run/trip indication to BMS).
2.
Panel live lamp
3.
Rotary selector switches for duty/standby plant
4.
Rotary switches for all single plant items (Auto/Off/Hand)
5.
Ammeters for all motors.
6.
Warning lamps (plus warning signals to BMS).
7.
Gauges (plus reading to BMS).
8.
Hours run meters (plus information to BMS).
9.
Variable speed inverter drive indicators (plus status information to BMS).
(If required).
10.
Filter clogged indicator lamp (plus indication to BMS).
Lamps shall be easily replaceable from the front of the panel by manual means
without the use of extractors.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-4
E.
The bezel of metal or other approved material holding the lamp glass shall be of an
approved finish and easily removable from the body of the fitting so as to permit
access to the lamp and lamp glass.
F.
The lamps shall be clear and shall fit into a standard form of lamp holder. The rated
lamp voltage should be 10 percent in excess of the auxiliary supply voltage, whether
ac or dc. For ac circuits, lamp units shall have an integral transformer providing a 6V
supply to the lamp.
G.
The lamp glasses shall comply with BS 1376 and BS 4099 and shall be in standard
colours, red, green, blue, white and amber. The colour shall be in the glasses and not
an applied coating and the different coloured glasses shall not be interchangeable.
Transparent synthetic materials may be used instead of glass, provided such materials
have fast colours and are completely suitable for use in tropical climates.
H.
All indicating 1amp circuits shall have a "Test Lamp" switch.
2.05
SMALL WIRING
A.
All control panel wiring shall be carried out in a neat and systematic manner with
cable supported clear of the panels and other surfaces at all points to obtain free
circulation of air.
B.
In all cases, the sequences of the wiring terminals shall be such that the junction
between multi-core cables and the terminals is affected without crossover. Except
where terminals are approved by the Engineer for use with bare conductors, crimped
connectors of approved type shall be used to terminate all small wiring. Insulating
bushes shall be provided where necessary to prevent chafing of wiring.
C.
All panel wiring shall comply with the requirements of BS 6231 Type A or B, as
appropriate. Conductors shall be copper and have a minimum cross section equivalent
to 50/0.25 mm (2.5 mm²), 7/0.67 mm (2.5 mm²) or 1/1.78 mm (2.5 mm²). 7/0.67 mm
shall only be employed for rigid connections, which are not subject to movement or
vibration during shipment, operation or maintenance. Flexible conductors’ equivalent
to 30/0.25 mm (1.5 mm²) or smaller sizes generally shall only be employed with
written approval.
D.
All wires shall be colour coded and fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at
each termination. At points of inter-connection between wiring, where a change of
numbering cannot be avoided, double ferrules shall be provided. Such points shall be
clearly indicated on the wiring diagram.
E.
No wires shall be tied or jointed between terminal points.
F.
Electrical wiring and instruments shall be located so that leakage of oil or water cannot
affect them.
G.
All metallic cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc., mounted on control
panels or in cubicles, steel, or otherwise, shall be connected by means of copper
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-5
conductors of not less than 2.5-sq.mm section to the nearest earth bar. These
conductors may be bare or have insulation coloured green/yellow stripes.
2.06
LINKS AND FUSES
A.
Provision shall be made for isolating links to enable circuits to be isolated for
maintenance and testing items of plant on the panels without affecting other circuits.
These links shall be clearly labelled.
B.
All incoming supply terminals above 230V shall be shrouded.
C.
Fuses of the appropriate rating shall be fitted to each outgoing circuit to provide both
overload and short-circuit protection.
D.
All fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type and comply with BS 88. Carriers and
bases for fuses and links shall be coloured in accordance with local practice. The
labelling of links and fuses shall be in accordance with the schematic diagrams. A
complete set of spare fuses shall be provided in each panel.
E.
If miniature circuit breakers and/or moulded case circuit breakers are utilised in any
circuit, and "back-up protection is required to afford adequate discrimination between
these circuit breakers and any other protective device in the circuit, HRC fuses shall
be used as “fault current limiters".
F.
The rating and characteristics of fault current limiters shall be such as to limit the
fault current of the ultimate circuit breaker in the circuit to the fault current capacity
of the circuit breaker. Fault current limiters shall be such that they will not operate
under overload as distinct from short circuit conditions. Fault current limiters shall be
labelled as such.
G.
Equipment fixed inside cubicles shall be required to give easy access to wiring and
terminals. Resistance boxes shall be located so that the adjustment screws are on a
vertical accessible face. Stud terminals shall be provided for all resistances.
2.07
TERMINAL BOARDS
A.
Grouped terminal boards of adequate capacity and fully numbered, with permanent
labels, shall be provided for all wires leading to equipment outside a panel. Terminal
numbers or markings shall correspond with those used on related apparatus and
wiring diagrams. Removable plates or other facility shall be provided for the entry of
incoming cables, conduits, trunking, etc. with means for effective earthing to the
cubicle chassis. Provision shall be made for the earthing of all non-current carrying
metalwork. For main power terminals incorporated within a panel, soldered socket
type terminals shall be provided.
B.
All terminal boards shall be mounted in accessible positions and when in enclosed
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-6
cubicles, are preferably to be inclined towards the doors. Spacing of adjacent
terminal boards shall be not less than 100 mm and the bottom of each board shall be
not less than 200 mm above the incoming cable gland plate. Separate terminations
shall be provided on each terminal strip for the cores of incoming and outgoing
cables including all spare cores. Barriers shall be provided between wires of different
voltages on the same or adjacent terminals.
C.
Terminals that are "live" from other power sources when the cubicle isolator is open
shall be shrouded and fitted with a danger label.
D.
Screw or stud type terminals shall only be used with crimped ring type wiring
terminations. Plain steel screws and studs shall be not less than size M6 but stainless
steel and bronze down to size M5 may be used provided that the current carrying
capacity is adequate. All studs shall be provided with nuts, washers and lock
washers.
E.
Insertion type terminals shall generally be employed for small circuit wiring whereby
the stranded conductor or crimped termination is clamped between plates by a screw
having a suitable locking device. Terminal entries shall be shrouded such that no
current carrying metal is exposed. Tapped holes shall have not less than three full
threads.
F.
Terminal assemblies are preferably to be of the unit form suitable for mounting
collectively on a standard assembly rail, secured from the front and giving the
required number of ways plus 10% spare.
G.
All connections shall be made at the front of the terminal boards and no live metal is
to be exposed at the back.
H.
No more than two leads shall be taken to any common pair of terminals, unless
specially approved by the Engineer.
1.2
A.
B.
2.08
NUMBER PLATES AND LABELS
Number plates and labels shall be provided and fixed to all items, including push
buttons, operating levers, indicating lamps, etc. to show the purpose and function of
each item and to ensure its safe and satisfactory operation. The type, size, inscription
and position of labels shall be to the Engineer's approval.
Adhesive die stamped or printed tapes shall not be permitted for labelling equipment.
EARTHING
A.
All control panels shall be provided with a continuous copper earth bar having a
sectional area of not less than 75 mm2 placed at a convenient position near the
bottom of the panel. The area of the earth bar shall not be less than half the crosssectional area of the phase busbars and not less than the area of the incoming neutral
conductor.
B.
All metal cases or earth terminals of the various instruments, relays, etc. on the
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-7
panels shall be connected to this earth bar by copper connections of not less than 2.5
mm2.
C.
2.09
All metal parts other than those forming part of any electrical circuit shall be earthed
in an approved manner and all earthing terminals shall be of adequate dimensions.
ANTI CONDENSATION HEATERS
A.
Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided in all control panels, switchboards and
motors to prevent internal condensation due to atmospheric or load variations. The
heaters shall be thermostatically and humidity controlled and of sufficient capacity to
maintain 5oC temperature differential with the surrounding atmosphere. The heater
circuit shall include an isolating switch and indicator lamp to show "Heater Circuit
On". The heaters may be energised from a 400V or 230V, 50Hz supply, as
applicable.
B.
When maintaining equipment fitted with heaters it will be necessary to switch off
both the main isolating switch and the switch for the heater. A warning notice of this
danger shall be fitted near the terminal box of every remote heater and at every panel
fitted with heaters.
C.
All equipment fitted with heaters shall be such that the maximum permitted rise in
temperature is not exceeded if the heaters are energised while the equipment is in
operation and as such must be provided with suitable ventilation.
D.
All such equipment, whether fitted with a heater device or not, shall be provided with
suitable drainage and be free from pockets in which moisture can collect.
2.10
MOTOR STARTERS
A.
Motor starter enclosures shall be at least to the standards specified for LV switchgear.
B.
Motor starters shall be of the following types and suitably rated for each application:-
C.
1.
MANUAL
= UNDER 0.34 kW MOTORS
2.
DIRECT ON LINE
= UP TO 5 kW MOTORS
3.
STAR DELTA
4.
AUTO TRANSFORMER
MANUFACTURER.
= ABOVE 5 kW MOTORS
WHEN
SUPPLIED
BY
THE
MOTOR
Auto-transformer type motor starters when supplied shall each comprise:
1.
Triple pole mechanically interlocked isolator with padlocking facilities in the
'off' position.
2.
Protection devices in the power circuit.
3.
Adequately rated autotransformer.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-8
D.
E.
4.
Contactors rated at 9 starts per hour suitable for pushbutton operation, with
magnetic blow outs and arc chutes on each pole, hard drawn copper main
contacts of the removable type, and continuously rated operating coils.
5.
Under voltage release.
6.
Overload relays of the adjustable electro-magnetic type with oil dashpot time
lags and reset facilities, calibrating plates shall be scaled in amperes or
equivalent thermal compensated type.
7.
Control circuit fuses of the cartridge type.
8.
Single-phase preventative device.
9.
Ammeter of the moving iron type.
10.
Pilot lamp to indicate "motor-running".
11.
Removable neutral link of heavy section copper.
The Star/Delta motor starters shall each comprise:
1.
Triple pole mechanically interlocked isolator with padlocking facilities in the
"off" position.
2.
Protection devices fuses in the power circuit.
3.
Contactors rated at 9 starts per hour suitable for pushbutton operation, with
magnetic blow-outs and arc chutes on each pole, hard drawn copper main
contacts of the removable type and continuously rated operating coils.
4.
Under voltage release.
5.
Overload relay of the adjustable thermal type.
6.
Control circuit fuses of the cartridge type.
7.
Motor protection relay (unbalance and single phasing)
8.
Ammeter of the moving iron type.
9.
Pilot lamp to indicate "motor running".
10.
Removable neutral link of heavy section copper.
Direct-on-line type motor starters shall each comprise:
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-9
1.
Triple pole mechanically interlocked isolator with padlocking facilities in the
"off" position.
2.
Protection devices fuses in the power circuit.
3.
Contactor rated at 9 starts per hour suitable for pushbutton operation, with
magnetic blow outs and arc chutes on each pole, hard drawn copper main
contacts of the removable type, and continuously rated operating coils.
4.
Under voltage release.
5.
Overload relays of the adjustable thermal type.
6.
Control circuit fuses of the cartridge type.
7.
Motor protection relay (unbalance and single phasing).
8.
Ammeter of the moving iron type for motors in excess of 5 kW.
9.
Pilot lamp to indicate "motor running".
10.
Removable neutral link of heavy section copper.
F.
For starters incorporating reduced voltage starting the change over shall be
automatic. A lock-off switch shall be provided and located locally to each motor and
connected into the starter control circuit so that the starter cannot be operated when
the switch is in the "off" position.
G.
"Hand/off/Auto" switches shall be provided for all starters.
H.
Variable frequency inverter drives shall be used for V.A.V AHU fans as indicated in
the schedules.
I.
Variable frequency inverter drives shall be used for secondary chilled and hot water
pumps as indicated in the schedules.
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
BELT DRIVES
Centrifugal fans shall be driven by electric motors through V-belt drives unless
specified otherwise. V-belt drives shall conform to BS 1440 and shall consist of
endless V-belts capable of transmitting a power at least 75% in excess of the rated
BHP of the motor. Not less than two belts per drive shall be used. Guards shall be
provided for all V-Belt drives.
ELECTRIC MOTORS
Motors shall be of the totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) design to BS 5000 and
shall be fitted with axially locating type bearings and/or heavy duty thrust bearings at
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-10
the non-driving end and roller type bearings at the drive end. All bearings shall be of
adequate proportions and design suitable for the particular application.
B.
Motors shall be of the squirrel cage induction type. Motors shall be suitably finished
to afford protection against any corrosive liquid or fumes.
C.
All motors shall be built of high-grade components and materials and shall operate
without undue vibration and with the minimum of noise.
D.
The insulation shall be Class `F' to BS 2757 but the temperature rise shall be limited
to 80 oC measured by the resistance method, at an ambient temperature of 40 oC. The
motors shall be suitable in all respects for their operational duties taking into account
such an ambient temperature within the building.
E.
All motors rated at 11 kW and above shall be fitted with thermostatic control
elements actuating directly on the control circuit of the motor and disconnecting it
from the supply in the event of a temperature rise exceeding the acceptable limits for
its insulation class.
F.
The motors shall be fully tropicalised, and shall be fitted with anti-condensation
heaters.
G.
The motors shall be capable of providing 10% in excess of the specified volume flow
of their respective fans under all operating conditions. Selections must assume that
resistance increases by the square law and absorbed power by the cube law.
H.
Motors are required to operate from a 400V, 3 phase or 230V single phase, 50Hz
supply as applicable, and shall be continuously rated.
I.
The motors shall be capable of satisfactory operation with a voltage variation of 10%
above or below the supply voltage. They shall also be capable of operating
satisfactorily with a frequency variation of 2.5% above or below the normal
frequency of 50.
1.
No motor shall run faster than 900 rpm. unless otherwise Indicated.
2.
Motors shall be designed to operate at a power factor not less than 0.85.
3.
Motors shall be suitable for the starting methods specified.
4.
Motor starting currents shall not exceed the following values:Autotransformer starting - 1.5 times the full load current.
Star/Delta starting - 3.5 times the full load current.
Direct-on-line starting - 6 times the full load current.
J.
The connections of the motors shall be brought out to easily accessible terminals of
the stud type, totally enclosed. They shall be substantially designed and thoroughly
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-11
insulated from the frame. Cambric or equal insulation shall be used for the
connections from the windings to the terminals. Terminal boxes shall be fitted with
glands to accept the specified type of cable.
K.
The cable glands shall be downwards pointing at such an angle as is necessary to
clear the motor base plate and plinth.
L.
Motors shall have visible nameplates indicating:1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.13
Motor power --- kW
Voltage
Phase
Cycles
RPM
Full load amps,
Locked Rotor amps
Frame size
Manufacturers name and model
Power factor
VARIABLE VOLUME FAN AND PUMP MOTOR SPEED CONTROLS
A.
Fan motor speed variation control of specified fans shall be achieved using digital
Pulse Width Modulation Inverters.
B.
Totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage motors shall be used rated for ambient
conditions and the Contractor shall ensure that the fan manufacturer sizes motors to
allow for frequency inverter control and confirms that their equipment is fully
suitable for this method of control and the inverters provided. Motors and inverters
shall be capable of continuous operation at levels of 10% in excess of specified
duties.
C.
All inverters shall be of the same manufacture and installed fully in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
D.
Inverters shall control over the range 0.5 to 120 Hz, starting current 1 x FLC, near
unity power factor over the speed range and not require any additional means for
motor starting.
E.
Acceleration and deceleration ramps shall be independently adjustable and the
inverter capable of riding a 500 millisecond mains interruption without causing
tripping.
F.
Inverters shall be mounted in the local mechanical control panels dust and damp
protected to BS 5420 IP54, allowing all parameters to be set with the door closed,
and provided with adequate ventilation for cooling. Ambient air shall be taken as
40oC Inverters shall be installed by the panel manufacturer and shall be totally
compatible with all control and drive equipment supplied by others.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-12
G.
Inverters shall provide the following protection:1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Motor phase to phase fault.
Motor phase to earth fault - continuous during operation.
Overvoltage.
Undervoltage
Inverter overheat
Motor overheat
Stall protection
Loss of control signal
Loss of auxiliary control voltage
Current limit
H.
Operation of any of these faults shall cause electronic shutdown without fuse
blowing.
I.
Selectable information should be available as an output digital display:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Output frequency (Hz)
Reference 1 (hand)
Reference 2 (auto)
Difference of references
Motor current (amps)
Torque (% x PN)
DC link voltage (%)
Temperature ( C)
Fault memory
J.
Inverters shall have the ability to provide either a linear or square law voltage to
frequency ratio on the output, and the facility to adjust the field weakening point.
K.
Inverters must be capable of electronic maintenance without the motor being
connected.
L.
The inverter shall be speed controlled by direct digital input from the DDC fan
controllers’ out-station, and all necessary interface cards shall be provided.
M.
The inverter shall provide means of running at a fixed (selectable) speed on the
closure of a remote volt free contact. This should override the normal speed control
reference signal.
N.
A common fault alarm condition shall be available from volt free contact, together
with an output signal to indicate output frequency (speed).
O.
Inverters shall be screened for radio and computer interference.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-13
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
INSTALLATION
Installation of all the equipment, plant and material included in this Section of the
Specification shall additionally be in accordance with the requirements of Division
16.
* END OF SECTION 1001 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________________ -
Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
1001-14
SECTION 1002
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
SCOPE OF SECTION
This Technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the
standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Mechanical
Identification systems.
1.02
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labor, materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the supply and installation of Mechanical Identification
systems as specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings.
B.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the work
of all trades.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers:
Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Mechanical
Identification systems whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar
application and not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Mechanical
Identification systems with at least 5 years successful installation experiences on
projects of a similar nature.
1.04
A.
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
Mechanical Identification systems and all associated materials and workmanship shall
comply fully with the latest relevant British Standards in all respects.
The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards associated
with pipe work products and associated materials. However, the Contractor shall ensure
that all applicable British Standards are complied with whether listed here or not.
1.05
A.
BS 1710
-
Specification for Identification of Pipelines and Services.
BS 4800
-
Specification for Paint Colours for Building Purposes.
SUBMITTALS
Drawings: refer to 1000
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-1
B.
C.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
Products : Full manufacturers color data for each product.
Samples - Full - size color sample of pipe work and ductwork identification and
labeling.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Mechanical identification system shall correspond totally to "As Built" data.
WARRANTY
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
PLANT AND PIPEWORK IDENTIFICATION
All pipe work shall be color coded in accordance with BS 1710 as detailed in Table 1.
Basic Colors
Colour
Key
Green
Silver Grey
Brown
Yellow Ochre
Black
Light Blue
Voilet
Orange
G
SGy
B
YO
BK
LBe
V
O
BS 5252 Colour Ref. Basic Contents
12 D 45
10 A 03
06 C 39
08 C 35
Black
20 E 51
22 C 37
06 E 51
Water
Steam
Oil
Gases
Drainage
Air also Vacuum
Acides & Alkalis
Electrical Conduits
Code Clours
Colour
Kev.
Auxiliary Blue
Crimson
Emerald Green
Salmon Pink
Safety Ref.
French Blue
Grey
Primrose
Abe
C
EG
SPk
SR
FBe
Gy
P
BS 5252 Colour Ref.
18 E 53
04 D 45
14 E 53
04 C 33
04 E 53
20 D 45
00 A 09
12 E 51
Exhaust/recirculated air
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-2
Terracotta/Brown
Yellow
White
Black
Maroon
T
Yw
W
BK
M
06 C 39
10 E 53
White
Black
02 C 39
Colour Identification Charts
General Services
Basic color
approximately
90mm
Color code
indication
100mm
Basic color
approximately
90mm
WATER
Drinking
G
Abe
G
Cooling
G
W
G
Boiling feed
G
PIPE CONTENTS
Condensate
C
W
C
G
C
EG
C
G
Chilled
G
W
EG
W
G
Central Heating –
100oC
G
ABe
C
Abe
G
Cold, down service
G
W
ABe
W
G
Hot water supply
G
W
C
W
G
Hydraulic Power
G
Sea, river untreated
PIPE CONTENTS
Fire extinguishing
SPk
G
G
Basic colour
approximately
90mm
Colour code
indication
100mm
Basic colour
approximately
90mm
G
SR
G
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-3
Softened water
G (SOFTENED)
Raw water
G (RAW)
De ionised
G (De ionised)
WATER (Cont.)
Laundry recovered
G (RECOVERED)
Steam
Sgy
Drainage
Bk
Electrical conduit
ducts
O
GAS
Natural gas
LPG
INDUSTRIAL GASES
Vacuum
Acetylene
* (See note)
YO
YO
Yw
EG
YO
YO
LBe
W
Lbe
YO
M
(ACETYLENE)
YO
Argon
YO (ARGON)
Butane
YO (BUTANE)
Hydrogen
YO (HYDROGEN)
Nitrogen
YO (NITROGEN)
Oxygen
YO (IND. O2)
Propane
YO (PROPANE)
Refrigerant
YO (REFRIGERANT)
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-4
PIPE CONTENTS
MEDICAL GASES
Compressed Air
Basic color
approximately
90mm
LBe
Color code
indication 100mm
W
Basic color
approximately
90mm
Bk
LBe
Vacuum
LBe
P
LBe
Nitrous Oxide
YO
Fbe
YO
Oxygen
YO
W
YO
Nitrous Oxide
Oxygen Mixture
YO
(O2 + N2O)
Spare Medical Gas
FBe
W
YO
(50/50)
YO (S.MG)
Pathology services shall have an extra code colour band (terracotta) with the letters
‘PATH’ OR ‘PATHOLOGY’ clearly printed in black as illustrated in the example given
below.
Example
* Note:
Basic Color
(PATHOLOGY)
T
Code
Color
Basic Color
Acetylene pipelines shall have identification (as shown) at intervals not
greater than 3 meters.
Oils, Acids, Alkalis and Chemicals
PIPE CONTENTS
Basic color
approximately
90mm
OILS
Burner fuel
Color code
indication 100mm
Basic color
approximately
90mm
B
Diesel
B
W
B
Hydraulic Power
B
SPk
B
Lubricating
B
EG
B
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-5
Transformer
B
Liquid soap
(Laundries
C
B
B (Soap)
PIPE CONTENTS
Basic colour
approximately
90mm
Colour code
indication 100mm
Basic colour
approximately
90mm
Colour code
indication 100mm
Basic colour
approximately
90mm
ACIDS, ALKALIS AND CHEMICALS
PIPE CONTENTS
Basic colour
approximately
90mm
Bleach
V (BLEACH)
Caustic soda
V (CAUSTIC SODA)
Cleaning Fluid
Soda
V (CLEANING FLUID)
V (SODA)
Hydrochloric Acid
Chlorine
V (HYDROCHLORIC)
V (CHLORINE)
Ventilation Plant and Ductwork
Shall be identified in accordance with DW/142 coded and fixed as specified in Part D.
B.
C.
Identification to pipework shall consist of 100mm PVC adhesive bands over the basic
colour and shall include flow direction arrows together with the abbreviation of the
service name. All coding requirements are to be agreed with the Engineer.
Code indication for safety conditions shall be as follows:Safety Colour
Red
BS colour reference
BS 4800
04 E 53
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-6
Yellow
08 E 51
Auxiliary Blue
18 E 53
Safety colour references are as follows:1.
Red for fighting equipment.
2.
Yellow with black diagonal stripes for warning of danger.
3.
Yellow with trefoil symbol for ironizing radiation
(as defined in BS 3510).
4.
Auxiliary blue in connection with green basic colours, to denote pipes
carrying fresh water, either potable or non-potable.
Safety colour references shall be applied using 100mm wide sections of PVC adhesive
band in all permanent locations, to be agreed with the Engineer.
Colour references shall include notation as follows:1.
FIRE
2.
DANGER
3.
RADIATION
4.
POTABLE OR NON-POTABLE
In the case of fire service, all equipment, i.e. valves, suction tanks, etc., shall also be
painted red.
D.
Uninsulated pipework shall be painted with one coat of undercoat and one coat of gloss
finish to the relevant BS colour.
E.
Valve identification shall be by means of 40mm diameter traffalyte discs of
white/black/white composition. Letters and figures of 8mm minimum height,
identifying the service and valve number shall be engraved into the material. A 3mm
diameter hole shall be drilled through the disc for the purpose of securing the disc to the
valve.
F.
Plant identification shall be by means of traffalyte labels of white/black/white
composition. Letters and figures of 8mm minimum height identifying the plant shall be
of a size to be agreed with the Engineer. A minimum of two 3mm diameter holes shall
be drilled through the label to the plant.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-7
G.
2.02
A.
All plants shall carry the manufacturer's identification plate which shall incorporate all
details of electrical and mechanical duties.
DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
Ductwork shall be colour coded in accordance with HVAC Specification DW142 to the
colours indicated in Table 2. For conditioned air, identification shall comprise either of
two symbols (one red, one blue) or a single symbol coloured, part red, part blue.
TABLE 2
DUCT IDENTIFICATION COLOURS
Type
Colour
BS 4800
Conditioned Air
Red and Blue
04353 / 18E53
Warm Air
Yellow
10E53
Fresh Air
Green
14E53
Exhaust / extract recirculated air
Grey
AA009
Foul Air
Brown
06C39
B.
Direction of flow shall be by PVC self adhesive equilateral triangles with one apex
pointing in the direction of flow. The minimum length of side of the triangle shall be
90mm.
C.
For all fume cupboard and laboratory exhausts at roof level and in service ducts, the
ductwork shall be labelled with an industry standard “Biological Hazard” label.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
STORAGE
All identification materials shall be stored within a well lit container or purpose made
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-8
compartmented racks or shelving. The material shall be adequately covered to prevent
damage and ingress of dirt.
B.
3.02
A.
Refer Division (1)
GENERAL
Identification shall be placed where it can be easily seen and at positions where
identification will be required. To ensure that the symbols are seen, the following points
shall be considered:1.
The symbols shall be on the surface which faces the positions of normal access
to the completed installation.
2.
The symbols shall not be hidden from view by structural members, other ducts,
plant or other services distribution systems.
3.
The symbols shall be placed where there is adequate natural or artificial light.
B.
Symbols shall occur frequently enough to avoid the need for ducts and pipes to be traced
back. Symbols should be placed at any service and access points to the distribution
system.
C.
Identification shall be applied to pipework and ductwork at every entry and exit point to
a room but in no case of intervals of less than 12m.
3.03
PLANT AND PIPEWORK IDENTIFICATION
A.
In addition to the colour bands, all pipework in plant rooms and service areas, whether
insulated or not, shall be legibly marked with black or white letters to indicate the type
of service and the direction of flow. Services shall be identified as follows:Chilled Water:
CHW
Refrigerant:
RFG
Cold Water:
Raw
RW
Sweet
SW
Deionised Water:
DW
Domestic Hot Water: Raw
RW
Sweet
SW
Softened Water
SFTW
Fire Main:
FM
Gas:
GAS
Steam
ST
OTI
OTI
LPG
LPG
B.
The basic identification colour shall be applied using a PVC adhesive band either
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-9
applied to pipework insulation or pipe when uninsulated. Identification shall be placed
at all junctions, at both sides of valves, services appliances, bulkheads, wall penetrations
and at any other places where identification is necessary or advantageous.
C.
3.04
A.
B.
Where pipes are run in pairs, the letters F and R shall be added to indicate flow and
return respectively.
DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
All ductwork in plant rooms and services areas, whether insulated or not, shall be
legibly marked with black or white letters to indicated the type of service and the
direction of flow. Services shall be identified as follows:Supply Air
-
S
Return Air
-
R
Fresh Air
-
F
Exhaust
Fume Cupboard
Exhaust
-
E
E (with biohazard labelling)
Ductwork identification shall be applied to ductwork whether insulated or not, at all
branches, plant connections, wall penetrations and at any other place where
identification is necessary or advantageous.
* END OF SECTION 1002*
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________
Mechanical Identification
1002-10
SECTION 1100
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF SECTION
A.
This technical Specification establishes the minimum requirements for the
equipment to be incorporated into the above ground Soil, Waste, Rainwater
and Hot and Cold water services plumbing pipe work.
B.
It also establishes the quality of materials and workmanship to be used in the
supply and installation of the systems.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 1000 Basic Mechanical Requirements
B.
Section 1002 Mechanical Identification
C.
Section 1101 Plumbing Valves
D.
Section 1102 Plumbing Supports, Hangers and Brackets
E.
Section 1103 Plumbing Specialties
F.
Section 1105 Plumbing Piping Insulation
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Provision of all labour, materials and the performance of all operations
necessary for the supply and installation of pipe work and fittings of the
above ground Soil, Waste Rainwater and Hot and Cold water services
systems as specified herein and as detailed on the Drawings.
B.
Co-ordination: The Contractor shall ensure that the soil and waste systems
are fully compatible with all trades, particularly those of the Civil,
Mechanical and Electrical services, for successful installation and operation.
C.
Submittals: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and
approval, all calculations and drawings for the equipment proposed and
associated builders works to show that the plant as installed will meet all the
specified criteria.
No works shall commence on the site until the design has received the approval
of the Engineer.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-1
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: The Contractor shall only propose the use of materials
produced by firms who have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of
plumbing pipe work systems and whose products have proved satisfactory in
similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms proposed for the installation of the plumbing pipe work
systems shall have been regularly engaged for at least 5 years in the
installation of plants of a similar type, quality and scope as is required for
this project.
1.05
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The plumbing pipe work shall comply fully with the latest relevant British
and DIN Standards in all respects.
B.
The following are the most commonly used Standards associated with Cold,
Hot, Soil and Waste Systems. However, the Contractor shall ensure that all
applicable Standards are complied with, whether listed here or not.
BS: 1387
Galvanised steel medium and heavy duty.
BS: 4514
Unplasticized polyvinyle chloride UPVC soil
and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories.
BS: 4660
Unplasticized polyvinyle chloride
underground drainpipe and fittings.
BS: 5255
Plastic waste pipe and fittings.
BS: 5481
Unplasticized polyvinyle chloride UPVC pipes
and fittings for gravity sewers.
BS: 6367
Drainage of roofs and paved areas.
BS: 6700
Design, installation, testing and maintenance of
services supplying water for domestic use within
buildings..
BS: 8000
Part 13 - Above ground drainage and sanitary appliances.
DIN: 8079
Chlorinated polyvinyle chloride CPVC pipes
DIN: 8061
Unplasticized polyvinyle chloride UPVC pipes
UPVC
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-2
DIN: 8062
Unplasticized polyvinyle chloride UPVC pipes
DIN: 8063
Pipe joints and pipe fittings for pressure
Unplasticized PVC pipes
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A.
Drawings - refer to Section 1000
B.
Products - submit full manufacturer data for every item.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Comply with Section 1000
1.08
WARRANTY
A.
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
Pipes and Fittings Shall Be In Accordance With The Following Schedule: Service
Soil, waste, rain water drain and vent
pipes for above ground installation
Soil, waste, rain water drain and vent
pipes for below ground installation
Pressurized Soil and waste drainage
pipes
Main cold and hot water pipes inside
building
Main cold and hot water pipes in
boiler room, parking area and on roof.
Cold and hot water distribution
pipework to sanitary fixtures
Condensate drains pipes less than
50mm dia.
2.02
Material
HDPE
HDPE
HDPE
Galvanised steel
Copper pipes to BS 2871
Cross linked polyethylene (PE-Xa )
pipe-XLPE
Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride
(CPVC)- 16 bar
ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS
A. The above ground drainage installations shall mean all pipework inside buildings and
located as follows:-Above floor slab
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-3
-Under tiles
-Embeded in walls
-At high level or low level exposed or concealed
-All vertical pipes (risers)
B.
.The pipes and fittings shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride UPVC to
BS 4514 and BS 5255
C.
All pipes shall be cast in one piece and with or without spigot bead or gasket
positioning lugs. All pipes shall be legibly marked on the barrel. The marking
shall consist of the manufacturer's name or registered trademark by which he can
be identified.
Each fitting shall be plainly marked with the manufacturer's name or
registered trademark by which he can be identified.
D.
E.
Jointing of pipework and fittings shall be by the use of solvent weld
sockets carried out in accordance with the manufacturer instructions.
Solvent weld cement shall be of a type approved by the manufacturer of
the pipework being jointed.
F.
Additional ring seal joints shall be provided as necessary to account for
expansion and contraction.
G.
The connection of pipes to all water closets shall be made by WCconnector with O- ring adapter socket and pan seal socket.
2.03 BELOW GROUND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS
A. The below ground drainage installation shall mean all drainage pipework installed
belowground slab and all external drainage pipework.
B. The pipes and fittings shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride UPVC.
Pipe size 110 mm. and 160 mm. shall conform to BS 4660, and size 200 mm.
up to 630 mm. shall conform to BS5481.
C.
2.04
Pipes and fittings shall be manufactured with polyproplene seal retaining caps.
All joints for below ground pipework shall be made by seal ring expansion
joint.
SANITARY DISTRIBUTION PIPEWORK
A. The sanitary pipework for cold water and hot water distribution from the water
distribution cabinets to the taps, mixers, etc. shall be cross linked polyethylene
plastic pipes, PE-Xa with high molecular weight and high density according to DIN
16892, with a working pressure of 10 bar at 90 C temperature, and shall comply with
and approved by DVGW (Germany), for drinking water and food usage.
The cross-linking factor shall be net less than 75%.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-4
The outside diameter of all pipes supply sanitary fixtures shall be 16mm of 2.2mm
thickness, 20mm of 2.8mm thickness, 25mm of 3.5mm thickness.
The pipes shall run in conduits (sleeves) to each individual outlet without using any
fittings along to the distribution cabinets.
The sleeves shall be of smooth polyethylene pipe of 32mm dia for 16mm and 20mm
pipes, and 50mm for 25mm pipes.
The pipes shall be flexible type delivered coiled.
The gap between the conduit and the pipe connected to the manifold outlet shall be
sealed with approved rubber ring.
B.
Connections to Sanitary Fixtures
The connections of PEX pipes to the tapes, mixers etc., shall be made using brass
elbow/adapter to BS 5750, housed in PVC box (Termination Box) built inside the
wall. The boxes shall have provision for incoming flexible conduit.
The termination box shall have compression connection for PEX pipe on one side
and female thread for the tap, mixer connection on other.
The complete assembly shall be such that the PEX pipe can be withdrawn and
replaced without damaging the wall finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
SOIL, WASTE AND RAINWATER PIPEWORK
A.
WORKMANSHIP
1.
Materials and workmanship shall be of best quality and
executed in accordance with the Specification, drawings and
manufacturers recommendations.
2.
Where any pipe is required to be shortened it shall be cut off
square and cleanly with an approved pipe-cutting machine.
3.
Where special joints or jointing materials are shown for pipes
of any materials, they shall be of an approved type and
manufacture, and the joint shall be made in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions, or as directed.
4.
Responsibility shall be assumed to identify and install all
necessary expansion couplings and fire sleeves throughout the
installations.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-5
B.
5.
All plant, pipes and fittings etc shall be thoroughly cleaned of
all foreign matter before installation. Each section of the
installation shall be clean and free from any obstructions
whatsoever before proceeding with the next section of the
installation.
6.
Flexible joints are to be provided wherever pipes cross
expansion joints.
7.
All soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes shall be to the sizes
and positions indicated on the drawings to take the discharge
from the branch waste and vent pipes, sanitary fittings and
equipment adjacent thereto.
8.
On completion the whole of the work is to be handed over in a
sound and clean condition. In the event of any pipe being
fractured from any cause whatsoever after having been (to all
appearances) properly installed, responsibility shall be
assumed in every instance and any such defective pipes shall
be replaced for approval.
9.
All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly
appearance, arranged parallel to or at right-angles to the
structural members of the buildings, giving maximum
headroom and shall not obstruct windows or doorways.
Pipework shall be erected such that there is a minimum
clearance of 75 mm to finished floor level and a minimum
clearance of 25 mm to finished wall faces.
10.
Slopes of drainage system (gravity) shall be as recommended
by local codes.
The discharge pipework shall be so installed as to minimise the risk of
blockage. Access covers and/or rodding eyes are to be positioned such as to
enable maintenance equipment to be inserted into the system(s) to permit
cleaning or clearing of all sections of the system(s).
The pipework system and fittings are to be installed so that broken or defective parts
can be easily removed and replaced.
The discharge pipework shall ensure that there is no leakage of contaminated water or
foul air into any building.
C.
The work shall be set out and responsibility assumed for the accuracy of the
same and the position of all fittings shall be approved by the Client's
representative. When first setting to any work, consideration must be given
to the work of other trades.
D.
Responsibility shall be assumed for leaving all unfinished works in a safe
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-6
condition during the progress of the works.
All materials and equipment are to be installed and protected in such manner as to be
adequately covered against damage and deterioration, and during the execution of the
work the open ends of all pipework shall be temporarily plugged off by means of blank
ends and compression caps respectively.
E.
Vent pipe roof termination
1.
Discharge stacks complete with domical cages shall terminate
not less than 300 mm above the roof, 900 mm above and not
less than 3000 mm, measured horizontally from any window
or air conditioner.
2.
Where the stack passes through floors, ceilings and roofs, the
openings are to be perfectly sealed-off by proprietary fittings.
They shall terminate with neoprene aluminium weathering
slate, weathering collar; and a cowl on top of pipe.
F.
All branch waste pipes to a range of fittings shall have an access provided on
the pipe in an accessible position at the end of the run.
G.
All pipework shall be supported in accordance with the manufacturer
recommendations. Sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through walls
or floors. Pipe sleeves shall be compatible with the pipes they protect; noncombustible and 1 ½ times the diameter of the pipe. Void between pipe and
pipe sleeve shall be packed with mineral wool and sealed with approved
mastic sealant.
H.
Where plastic pipes 50mm diameter and larger pass through fire
compartment walls, floors or ceiling cavity barriers they shall be fitted with
approved collars having the same fire resistance rating as the fire barrier they
pass through.
I.
All vertical soil and waste pipes shall have access doors on each floor fitted
above the spillover level of fittings served. Where pipes are installed in ducts
or built into walls access doors shall be provided in the duct wall or wall for
access to the access door. The type and finish of the access shall be to suit the
location and to the approval of the Architect.
J.
Connection to sanitary fittings
All outlets shall be trapped and provided with accessible and adequate means of
removal and cleaning. The traps shall be designed to be self-cleaning all surfaces and
joints are to be smooth.
1.
All traps with outlets for pipes up to and including 50 mm
shall have a minimum water seal of 75 mm.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-7
2.
Traps with outlets for pipes of over 50 mm shall have a
minimum water seal of 50 mm.
The waste pipes to the various sanitary fittings shall be of the following minimum
sizes:
Wash basins
50 mm diameter
Sinks
50 mm diameter
WC's
100 mm diameter
Shower bath tray
50 mm diameter
Floor drains with integral trap
75 mm diameter
Floor drains with P- trap
100 mm diameter
Urinals
50 mm diameter
Bidet
50 mm diameter
Floor cleanouts
100 mm diameter
K.
Condensate drains shall be provided from all fan coil units, and other A/C
units complete with proper P- trap and shall be piped as indicated on
drawings.
L.
Self siphonage tests
The contractor shall undertake tests for self-siphonage and induced siphonage in
branch discharge pipes by filling each appliance to over flowing and then discharging
by removing the plugs and discharging the W.C(s) at the upstream end of the discharge
pipe. All seals are to remain in the traps. The numbers of sanitary appliances to be
discharged for this performance test are enumerated below:
Type of
Use
Domestic
Congested
Number of
appliances
of each kind
on the stack
1 to 9
10 to 24
1 to 4
5 to 9
10 to 13
14 to 26
27 to 39
40 to 50
Number of appliances to be discharged
simultaneously
WC
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
Wash basin
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
Kitchen sink
1
2
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-8
M.
Testing and commissioning
1.
All tests requested by Local Municipality on the entire
installation shall be carried out, and all necessary appliance
and equipment for this purpose shall be supplied.
2.
Provision shall be made to carry out any test requested at any
time during the progress of the works or after their
completion.
3.
Whilst phased testing may be carried out (which may or may
not have been witnessed) the contractor shall be required to
demonstrate the watertightness, alignment, and level and
cleanliness of the whole installation seven days prior to the
installation being handed over.
4.
This requirement shall be discharged by the applying a full
running water test to the whole installation as described below
and by the drawing through of a drain profile, which will be
provided, to the required detail.
5.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Client's
representative, and a minimum of 48 hours notice shall be
given of readiness to test any section of the installation. Test
Certificates shall be submitted to the person witnessing the
test for their signature of approval, to the effect that the
system satisfies the requirements of this Specification.
6.
All sections of works must be pretested to satisfy that the
system will pass the required test, prior to carrying out the
main test.
7.
The Test Certificate shall be required to be completed for all
sections of the installation.
8.
After erection and immediately prior to sealing in, all
rainwater, main soil, waste, vent and branch soil, waste pipes,
shall be checked throughout for obstructions and finally tested
for soundness.
9.
The above ground sanitation and rainwater pipe installation
shall be subjected to two air tests, one of 75 mm water gauge
for a minimum period of 9 minutes prior to connection of
sanitary fittings and building in of pipework, and a second air
test on completion of the system with all traps and WC's
connected when the test pressure shall be 45 mm water gauge
for a minimum period of 9 minutes.
10.
At start of testing, sanitation and Rainwater Pipework shall be
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-9
checked for alignment and stability; mechanical joints shall be
re-torqued where necessary.
11.
Access doors shall be removed, felt washers greased and
doors replaced.
12.
The whole system shall be rodded through with an
appropriately sized disc type plus the allowance shall also be
made for testing to the Local Authority requirements and for
carrying out separate and independent tests if required.
13.
The provision shall also be made for obtaining an acceptance
test certificate form the Local Authority on completion of the
works. The test for the Local Authority shall be allowed for
as an addition to the tests required under this specification.
3.02
DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER SERVICES PIPEWORK
A.
Product handling
B.
1.
All products shall be delivered in manufacturer's original
protective packaging. All products shall be inspected at time
of delivery for damage and for compliance with
Specifications. Any products that are found to be damaged or
not in accordance with the Specifications shall immediately be
repaired or removed from the site and replaced. Repairs shall
not be undertaken before the Engineer's review of Contractor's
proposed action.
2.
All products shall be handled and stored as recommended by
the manufacturer to prevent damage and deterioration. The
Contractor shall supply handling equipment such as lifting
beams, reinforced canvas slings, protective padding, struts,
cradles, etc., required to handle the products without
damaging hardware or linings and coatings.
3.
Products shall be protected against damage and the ambient
conditions both during transport, site storage and immediately
up to the time products are installed. Precautions shall be
taken to protect the product from mechanical damage and the
effects of sunlight and heat, until the backfilling operations
have been completed. All site storage areas shall be shaded.
Installation of pipework
1.
Joints in buried pipework shall be kept to the absolute
minimum. Marker tapes with embedded metal strip shall be
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-10
laid 90 mm above the pipework. If valves are required, they
are to be in a valve chamber with the surface box lettered to
indicate what service is below them.
2.
The underground pipework shall be laid in 200 mm of sand or
stone free bedding material and wherever possible in straight
lines to uniform gradients. The clearance between the
pipework and footings of the buildings is not to be less than
200 mm. If less, the pipes shall be installed in a flexible
sleeve.
3.
All pipework shall run vertically or at an inclination to the
horizontal to enable the whole system to be drained off either
through the system or through a valve discharging externally
with an air gap to prevent contamination by backflow. When
the pipework is drained down, air is to be allowed into the
system to prevent failure or damage to the hot water cylinder.
A manual air inlet value shall be fitted to the high point in the
system to achieve this.
4.
Where cold water pipes are run chased into walls, floors, or
exposed to view all pipework shall be insulated.
5.
All main domestic hot water pipework shall be insulated.
6.
The connection of PEX pipes to sanitary fixtures shall be made via brass
elbow housed inside pvc box, chrome plated angle valve, chrome plated
copper tube flexible connections.
7.
All PEX pipework distributed to sanitary fixtures shall run inside
polyethylene sleeves of smooth pipes .
8
All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly appearance,
arranged parallel to or at right-angles to the structural members of the
buildings, giving maximum headroom and shall not obstruct windows
or doorways. Pipes shall bend round piers, projections and into
recesses forming part of the structural works whether so indicated on
the drawings or not. Pipework shall be erected such that there is a
minimum clearance of 75 mm to the finished floor level and at least
25 mm to the finished wall faces.
9.
All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the tubes
and pipes connected to them. Bushed outlets will only be accepted if
the required outlet size of a fitting is not of standard manufacturer.
Eccentric bushings and square tees shall be used where concentric
bushing and pitcher tees might cause air to be trapped in the system.
Elsewhere, square tees shall be confined to dead-leg branches of
domestic hot water supply systems and on cold-water branches to
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-11
fitting or ranges of fittings.
10
C.
Elbows shall be used, where practicable, in preference to bends.
11
Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be graded to
ensure venting and draining. The clearance between pipework (or
the insulation) and the wall and any other fixtures shall be not less
than 20 mm.
12.
Tubes shall be reamed after cutting and shall be free from burrs, rust
scale and other defects and shall be thoroughly cleaned before
erection. Open ends left during the progress of work shall be
temporally closed with purpose-made metal or plastic plugs or caps,
or blank metal flanges.
13.
All joints between copper and steel pipes shall be made using
dielectric couplings..
14
Where pipework passes through walls, floors or ceilings,
sleeves shall be provided. Pipework passing through flooring
shall be provided with approved type floor and ceiling plates
fastened securely to the pipe. The sleeves shall be 1.5 of pipe
size and to be of the same metal as the pipe.
9.
All exit holes to or from a building for pipework services shall
be sealed and plugged. For service conditions below 60 deg C
the sealant shall be mastic compound, Above this temperature
it shall be silicon rubber. Where the pipework enters the
building through a large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking
plate not less than 6 mm thick shall be built into the walls of
the hole or duct. The service pipes shall pass through
clearance sockets welded to the plate and the space between
pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged.
16
Hangers for horizontal pipework shall be supported in
accordance with the requirements of Section 1102 – Plumbing
Supports, Hangers and Brackets.
17
Piping that is insulated shall be secured by clips that allow
sufficient space behind the back of the pipe for the pipe
insulation to be properly installed.
18
All pipework shall be installed so that the vertical distance
between the discharge point and overflow level of the
receiving appliance shall not be less than 25 mm for taps
and/or fittings up to and including 20 mm and 70 mm for
those over 20 mm to prevent contamination as result of
backflow of water.
Storage
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-12
D.
E.
1.
All pipework shall be stored on purpose made pipe racks of
welded construction and of sufficient strength to support the
entire weight of the materials without any noticeable
deformation. The racks shall be such that all pipework is clear
of the ground.
2.
Pipework fittings shall be stored within a well-lit container
made compartmented racks or shelves. The fittings shall be
separated by means of their type and size and laid out in an
orderly manner for ease of identification.
System testing
1.
The Contractor shall ensure that all pipework is watertight to
the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall supply all pressure
gauges, meters, hoses, pumps and other temporary supports,
equipment and manpower necessary for carrying out pressure
tests.
2.
The Contractor shall, during testing, check the satisfactory
operation of each valve installed under the Contract.
3.
Before filling or pressure testing is started the Contractor shall
re-check pipes and valves for cleanliness and shall re-check
the operation of valves. The open ends of the pipes shall
normally be stopped off by blank flanges or capped ends
additionally secured where necessary by temporary struts and
wedges.
4.
Potable water system shall be tested with water to 1.5 times
the normal system working pressure or 6 bar whichever is
greater for a period of 4 hours, while uncovered but
adequately anchored. The testing shall be carried out in
sections if necessary. If a section should fail the test, the
Contractor shall trace and repair all leaks and defects and
retest the section before any further pipes or section of
adjacent pipework are laid.
5.
The system shall be filled with potable water and all air
expelled. After the system has been completely filled, the
pressure shall be steadily and gradually increased until the test
pressure has been reached. If any loss is recorded, repairs shall
be made and the test re-run.
6.
Written records of every test clearly identifying the tested
system together with time of test and name of testing Engineer
in tabulated format shall be submitted for review by the
Engineer upon completion of the test.
Flushing and disinfection
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-13
1.
All visible dirt and debris shall be removed from the tank.
2.
The tank and distributing pipes shall be filled with clean,
potable water and then drained until empty of all water.
3.
The tank shall be filled with clean potable water and supply
closed.
4.
A measured quantity of sodium hypochlorite solution of a
known strength shall be added to the water in the tank to give
a free residual chlorine concentration of 50mg/L (50ppm) in
the water.
5.
The tank shall be left to stand for 1 hour.
6.
Each draw off fitting shall be successively opened working
progressively away from the tank.
7.
Each tap and draw off fitting shall be closed when the water
discharged smells of chlorine.
8.
The tank shall not be allowed to become empty during this
operation. If necessary it shall be refilled and chlorinated as
above.
9.
The cistern and pipes shall then remain charged for a further
1-hour.
10.
The tap furthest from the cistern shall be opened and the level
of free residual chlorine in the water discharged from the tap
measured. If the concentration of free residual chlorine is less
then 30mg/L (30 ppm) the disinfecting process shall be
repeated.
11.
Finally, the tank and pipes shall remain charged for at least 16
hours and then thoroughly flushed out with clean, potable
water until the free residual chlorine concentration at the taps
is no greater then 21 mg/L (21ppm).
* END OF SECTION 1100 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
_________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping
1100-14
SECTION 1101
PLUMBING VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials, and the
standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of valves.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 1000 Basic Mechanical Requirements
B.
Section 1002 Mechanical Identification
C.
Section 1100 Plumbing Piping
D.
Section 1102 Plumbing Supports, Hangers and Brackets
E.
Section 1103 Plumbing Specialties
F.
Section 1105 Plumbing Piping Insulation
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour; materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the supply and installation of valves as specified
herein and where referred to on the Drawings.
B.
Co-ordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full co-ordination of the
work of all trades.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of valves whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar applications for not less than 10
years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of valves with at
least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar nature.
1.05
A.
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The valves and all associated materials shall comply fully with the latest relevant
British Standards in all respects.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Valves
1101-1
The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards
associated with valves and associated materials. However, the Contractor shall
ensure that all applicable British Standards are complied with, whether listed here or
not.
1.06
BS: 21
Specification for Pipe Threads for Tubes and Fittings where
Pressure Tight Joints are made on the Threads.
BS: 4504
Circular Flanges for Pipes, Valves and Fittings (PN
designated).
BS: 590
Specification for cast iron gate valves.
BS: 591
Cast Iron Gate (Parallel Slide ) Valves.
BS: 592
Cast Iron Globe and Globe Stop and Check Valves for general
purposes.
BS: 2879
Draining taps (screw down pattern).
BS: 593
Cast Iron Check Valves for general purposes.
BS: 594
Copper Alloy Globe, Globe Stop and Check, Check and Gate
Valves.
BS: 595
Butterfly valves.
BS: 596
Diaphragm Valves.
BS: 6683
Guide to Installation and Use of Valves.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Drawings - refer to Section 1000
B.
Products - submit full manufacturer data for every item.
1.07
A.
1.08
A.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Comply with Section 9000
WARRANTY
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Valves
1101-2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Valves, cocks, air vents and pipework specialties shall be provided where indicated
on the Drawings and at all positions necessary for the proper working, regulation,
control and maintenance of the installation with the approval for the Engineer.
B.
All valves and cocks shall be suitable for the temperatures, working and test
pressures applicable to each system.
C.
All valves cocks vents and specialties must be fitted in such a manner that they are
accessible for operation and maintenance.
D.
All valves, cocks, vents and specialties installed for the work specified in this
Contract shall be of the manufacturer specified hereafter or equal and approved by
the Engineer.
2.02
A.
VALVES
Isolating Valves < 50mm shall be:1.
B.
Isolating Valves > 65m shall be:1.
C.
Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Gate Valve to BS 594 series ‘B’ threaded to BS 21
taper. Solid wedge disk, non-rising stem, screwed-in bonnet, handwheel
operated. Rated PN20.
Cast iron (BS 1452 – 220) Gate Valve to BS 590 flanged BS 4504 Wedge
disk, non-rising stem, inside screw. Bronze seat rings and disk facings. Rated
PN16.
Non Return Valves < 50mm shall be:Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Non-return Valve swing type to BS 594 series ‘B’ threaded
to BS 21 taper. Renewable nitrile rubber disk, free to rotate, and hinge pin mounted.
Screwed-in cap. Integral seat. Rated PN20 but limited to 100C maximum
temperature.
D.
Non Return Valves > 65 mm shall be:1.
Cast iron (BS 1452 – 220) Non-return Valve swing type to BS 593 BS 4504
PN16. Bronze faced disk, free to rotate, hinge pin mounted. Bolted seat ring
bronze. Rated PN16.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Valves
1101-3
E.
Strainers < 50mm shall be:1.
F.
Strainers > 65mm shall be:1.
G.
Cast iron (BS 1452 – 220) ‘Y’ type Strainer. Ends flanged to BS 4504 Fitted
with perforated stainless steel screens with 0.75mm holes. Machined seats
body and cap ends. Bolted cap with captive washer. Rated PN16.
Draining Taps < 25mm shall be:1.
H.
Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) ‘Y’ type Strainer. Ends threaded to BS 21 taper.
Fitted with perforated stainless steel screens with 0.75 mm holes. Machined
seats body and cap ends. Screwed-in cap with captive washer. Rated PN32.
Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Angle Pattern Screw-down Draining Tap, lockshield
type. Male inlet threaded to BS 21 taper, outlet ribbed to provide integral
hose connection. Washer EP rubber. Rated PN 10.
Draw Off Cocks < 50mm shall be:Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Gland Pattern Draw-off Cock to BS 2879 type 2, inlet
threaded male to BS 21 taper. Fitted with hose union. Bronze tapered plug. Rated
generally to PN 10.
I.
Automatic Air Vents shall be:1.
J.
Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Automatic Air Vent, Vertical inlet with Bronze union
threaded ½” BS21 taper female, Horizontal side outlet threaded ½” BS2779
parallel with compression nut and sleeve to suit copper tube to BS2871.
Borosilicate glass inspection tube, integral check valve on outlet, EPDM
disk, 316 Stainless steel lever and clip, Rated PN 10.
Hose bibs
Hose bibs shall be bronze, with coupling union elbow replaceable hexagonal disc,
hose thread spout, vacuum breaker, chrome plated where exposed.
K.
Pressure reducing valves
1.
Water pressure reducing valves shall deliver flow rates based on initial and
final pressures as indicated. Valves shall be suitable for 1725 kPa operating
pressure on the inlet side with outlet pressure range 34.5 to 682 kPa.
2.
Valves shall have easily adjustable low-pressure setting and shall be designed
to resist water shock pressures.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Valves
1101-4
L.
3.
Valves 50mm and smaller shall have bronze body and trim with screwed
ends.
4.
Valves 65mm and larger shall have iron body and bronze trim and flanged
ends.
5.
Valves shall have stainless steel stem, disc and diaphragm shall be synthetic
rubber, and seats shall be bronze.
6.
Valves shall be self-contained, single seated direct operated, diaphragm,
spring-loaded type with balanced operation suitable for continuous or deadend service.
Double Check Valve Assemblies.
Bronze backed in line double check valves to BS 6282 part 1 with intervening test
plug and screwed ends.
M.
Automatic Relief Valves
1.
Pressure relief valves
Bronze body, stainless steel spring and trim with pipe type manual actuation
lever. The unit shall be pre-set and sealed at the factory.
2.
Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves
Bronze body, stainless steel spring and trim on ceramic coated temperature
sensing element and pipe type manual actuation lever. Unit shall be rated for
relieving the maximum heat input to the water heater and pre-set and factory
sealed. Unit shall be labelled with manufactures name, serial no, maximum
working pressure and temperature, set pressure and temperature and relieving
capacity in watts.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
STORAGE
A.
All valves shall be stored within a well lit container on purpose made
compartmented racks or shelves, constructed in a similar manner to support the
entire weight of materials without noticeable deformation.
B.
The valves shall be separated by means of their type and size and laid out in an
orderly manner for ease of identification.
C.
Valves shall be supplied and stored with purpose made or manufactured plugs to
prevent ingress of dirt.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Valves
1101-5
3.02
GENERAL INSTALLATION
A.
Valves with screwed ends shall have a union installed adjacent to the valve for ease
of dismantling.
B.
Where possible, valves shall be installed with the stem in the vertically upright
position. However, all valves shall be installed in a manner such that they are
readily accessible for ease of operation.
C.
Sufficient clearance shall be allowed for the application of thermal insulation, valve
boxes, etc. and to ensure that full travel of the valve stem can be achieved.
3.03
A.
3.04
ISOLATING VALVES
Separate isolating valves shall be provided on all pipework services to each item of
plant or equipment and on each main and submain, except where flow measuring or
regulating valves are required and these valves can be used for isolating purposes
without affecting their measuring or regulating functions.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Drain valves shall be installed at all system low points on the dead side of isolating
valves and on all items of plant to facilitate emptying down and removal.
B.
Line sized drain valves shall be installed at the end of each pipework run and at the
base of each pipework riser to enable the system to be adequately flushed.
3.05
AIR VENTING DEVICES
A.
Air venting devices shall be installed at all system high points.
B.
Automatic air eliminators shall be complete with copper relief pipework, taken to
within 1.5 m of the floor level and extended to a position where any discharge will
not damage building fabrics, decorations or the like.
* END OF SECTION 1101 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
ConsultantEngineers
________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Valves
1101-6
SECTION 1102
PLUMBING SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND BRACKETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the
standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Supports,
Hangers and Brackets.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 1000 Basic Mechanical Requirements
B.
Section 1002 Mechanical Identification
C.
Section 1100 Plumbing Piping
D.
Section 1101 Plumbing Valves
E.
Section 1103 Plumbing Specialties
F.
Section 1105 Plumbing Piping Insulation
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour, materials and the performance of
all operations in connection with the supply and installation of Supports, Hangers
and Brackets as specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings.
B.
Co-ordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full co-ordination of
the work of all trades.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Supports, Hangers
and Brackets whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar
application for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of pipework
systems with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a
similar nature.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Supports, Hangers & Brackets
1102-1
1.05
A.
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The Supports, Hangers and Brackets and all associated materials and
workmanship shall comply with the latest relevant British Standards in all
respects.
The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards
associated with pipework products and associated materials. However, the
Contractor shall ensure that all applicable British Standards are complied with
whether listed here or not.
1.06
BS 5572
Sanitary pipework.
BS 1387
Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and
tubulars and for plain end steel tubes suitable for welding
or for screwing to BS 21 Pipe Threads. 8mm - 90 mm dia.
BS 2871
Copper and copper alloy tubes.
BS 3974
(Part 1 & 2)
Pipe supports.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Drawings: Refer to Section 1000.
B.
Products: Submit full manufacturer data for every item.
1.07
A.
1.08
A.
1.09
A.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Comply with Section 1000.
WARRANTY
Provide warranty in accordance with the contract conditions.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Comply with Section 1000.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Supports, Hangers & Brackets
1102-2
2.01
GENERAL
A.
All supports, hangers and brackets shall be of an approved manufacture as
described herein and detailed on the drawings.
B.
All steel products used for support systems if not manufactured from malleable
cast iron or stainless steel shall be either galvanised or painted with one coat of
red oxide paint.
C.
All drop rods shall be galvanised and sized to suit the bracket type and system
weight but in no case shall be less than 6-mm diameter.
D.
All materials used for support systems shall be compatible with the material they
are supporting. Generally steel pipework shall be supported by cast iron and steel
clips, copper pipework by copper or brass clips and uPVC pipework by brass or
PVC clips. Where galvanised steel pipework is used all pipework clips shall be
galvanised.
E.
Where brackets are exposed to view they shall be of a chrome-plated finish.
F.
Fixings to concrete and masonry shall be of the expanding bolt or wedge anchor
type selected in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and suitable
for the imposed loads. Where fixings are to be made close to the outside edge of
concrete or masonry structures resin banded fixings shall be used to reduce the
risk of fracture.
G.
Brackets for fixing to woodwork or lightweight partitioned walls shall be of the
screw on pattern.
H.
Purpose made girder clamps shall be used where any system is supported from
steelwork and only with the approval of the Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
STORAGE
A.
All continuous lengths of channel angle and screwed rod shall be stored on
purpose made pipe racks of welded construction and of sufficient strength to
support the entire weight of the material without any noticeable deformation. The
racks shall be such that all material is clear of the ground.
B.
All raw metal shall be wire brushed and painted with one coat of red oxide paint
prior to storage.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Supports, Hangers & Brackets
1102-3
C.
3.02
All general support materials shall be stored within a well-lit container on purpose
made compartmented racks or shelving. The materials shall be separated by
means of their type and size and laid out in an orderly manner for ease of
identification.
GENERAL
A.
All systems shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to permit free
movement due to expansion, contraction, vibration or other changes in the system.
Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction.
B.
Vertical rising pipes and ducts particularly in shafts shall be adequately supported
at the base to withstand the total weight of the riser. Under no circumstances shall
branches from vertical rising pipes be the means of support for the vertical
pipework.
C.
Hangers for horizontal systems at high level shall be supported from angle or
channel irons suitable for securing to the structure.
D.
Pipework shall be independently supported; double stacking of pipes from the
same support will not be permitted.
E.
Adjustable mild steel hangers on steel pipework systems shall be used with swivel
joints at the pipe rings and spherical washers at the top of the hanger rods. Pipe
rings shall be malleable cast iron or fabricated steel made in halves and secured
by bolts or screws. Malleable iron hinged pipe rings may also be used but calliper
hooks shall not be permitted. Pipework 65 mm diameter and over shall not be
supported using malleable iron brackets. All pipe brackets over 50 mm diameter
shall be submitted to the Engineer and approved by the Engineer prior to
manufacture.
F.
Where rollers and chairs are required, these shall be preformed and where used
singularly they shall have restraining "U" straps or bolts formed over the diameter
of the pipe and bolted to the base support of the chair. The "U" straps or bolts
shall be fitted to allow movement of the pipe without binding. Continuously
threaded "U" bolts will not be permitted.
G.
The spacing of supports shall be determined in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer recommendation. Where one support carries more than one pipe of
different diameters the spacing shall be determined by the requirement of the
smallest diameter.
* END OF SECTION 1102 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Supports, Hangers & Brackets
1102-4
SECTION 1103
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials, and the
standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Plumbing
Specialties.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour; materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the supply and installation of Plumbing Specialties as
specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings.
B.
Co-ordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full co-ordination of the
work of all trades.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of piping specialties
whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not less
than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Plumbing
Specialties with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a
similar nature.
1.04
A.
1.05
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The Plumbing Specialties and all associated materials shall comply fully with the
latest relevant British Standards in all respects.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Drawings -
B.
Products - submit full manufacturer data for every item.
C.
Provide samples of each item where requested by the Engineer.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Section 1103-1
Plumbing Specialties
1.08
A.
WARRANTY
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.02
PIPE SLEEVES
A.
Pipe work sleeves shall be compatible with the pipes they protect and noncombustible.
B.
The inside diameter of sleeves shall be such as to allow an 8 mm minimum gap
between the finished surface of an insulated pipe and the internal surface of the
sleeve. The length of the sleeve shall be limited to prevent the sleeve protruding
beyond the finished building surface. Void between pipe and pipe sleeve shall be
packed with mineral wool and sealed at both ends with approved mastic sealant.
2.03
A.
2.04
A.
FLOOR, CEILING AND WALL COVER PLATES
Floor, ceiling and wall plates shall be plastic and selected to suit the pipework size
and material with which they are to be used.
PIPE CLEANOUTS
Shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 100 mm will
not be required. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be
T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs of the same
size as the pipe up to and including 100 mm. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug
shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior
downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts
are indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches
may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or
where less than 450 mm of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on
pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium-plated bronze, nickel
bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access
covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access
covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs, and cover screws.
Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with
the finished wall. Covers in finished walls shall be of a type approved by the
Architect.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Section 1103-2
Plumbing Specialties
2.05
A.
2.06
A.
2.07
FLASHINGS
A sheet-lead flashing shield shall be provided for drains and pipe sleeves with
integral clamping devices that penetrate a membrane. Flashing shield shall be made
from sheet lead not lighter than 20 kg/m², and extend not less than 200 mm from the
drain or sleeve in all direction. Flashing shall be inserted into the clamping device
and made watertight. Lead flashing shields, and roof flanges of lead or copper
flashing with integral flange, shall be set over membrane in a solid coat of a
bituminous cement and strip-flashed as specified by the manufacturer. Pipes passing
through pitched roofs shall be flashed using lead or copper flashing with an
adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 200 mm from the
pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a watertight seal.
FLOOR DRAINS
Floor drain type FD, shall be trapped UPVC gully with integral cleanout.
The floor drain shall have 4 blank inlets of 50 mm dia (2") and one outlet of 100 mm
dia (4").
PLANTER DRAINS
A.
Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, combination membrane flashing clamp
and gravel guard. Outlet size to suit connected pipework.
B.
Domed grating with fine stainless steel mesh screen secured in place by bolts.
2.08
ROOF DRAINS
A.
UPVC body with bottom or angled outlets as required. Outlet size to suit connected
pipe work.
B.
Domed, grating with securing bolts.
2.09 FLOOR CLEANOUT
A.
2.10
A.
UPVCbody with bottom outlet. Outlet size to suit connected pipework with
maximum diameter 100mm and eccentric reducer to connect to pipework where
larger than 100mm diameter. 90 x 90mm solid top, UPVC head with airtight seal.
GRATING DRAIN
Grating drain shall consist of pit of dimensions as indicated on the drawings; with
heavy duty primary coated grating fitted to the pit by means of steel angles. The
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Section 1103-3
Plumbing Specialties
bottom of the pit shall be provided with a floor drain type FD-1 as specified in
Clause 2.06 B.
The pit shall be furnished with all required civil work.
2.11
WATER DISTRIBUTION CABINET
The cabinet shall be 1.5mm thick stove enameled wall hung type on
wall bearing hanger, and shall be exposed in the service shaft for
maintenance.and shall be steel.with double doors.
The depth of the cabinet shall be 110 mm, and the dimensions shall be
selected according to the length of manifolds required as shown on the
water distribution cabinets schedules drawings, and to be sufficient for
the installation of all valves and fittings inside the cabinets.
Where the cabinets located within walls of ceramic tiles finish, the
cabinets shall be provided with heavy duty hinged type cover. The
cover to be of 10 mm thick fitted with ceramic tiles. The cover shall be
provided with locking mechanism. Cabinets and covers shall be
approved by the Consultant.
The cabinets shall include the following components:
.
A.
Cold and Hot Water Manifolds & Fittings
The manifold shall be made from extrusive shaped, brass bar with
ends female threaded, and supplied with the required outlets.
Manifolds and fittings shall be manufactured to BS 5750 Part (2).
The manifold size shall be of the same internal bore as CWS & HWS
feeder.
The outlet size shall be of the same internal bore as PEX pipes
distribution to the sanitary taps.
The connection of manifolds and outlets to copper and plastic tubes
shall be made properly using adaptors with O-rings. Outlets that are
not required, they shall be blanked off with plug and washer.
The manifolds shall be supported on the cabinet with adjustable
horizontal brackets.
B.
Isolating Valves
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Section 1103-4
Plumbing Specialties
Isolating valves shall be installed on CWS & HWS feeders to
manifolds and to each individual pipe connections to manifolds
outlets.
The isolating valves shall be standard port ball valves with T-handle,
chrome plated free brass, to BS 5750.
The valve size shall be of the same bore as the pipework connections.
Isolating valves shall be connected to the CWS and HWS feeders by
copper elbows and fittings.
C.
Automatic Air Vents
Automatic air vent of 12 mm dia. shall be provided on each manifold.
2.12
MANHOLES - GENERAL
Manholes shall be made of extra strength precast reinforced concrete construction
and shall be of details shown on the drawings.
Manholes shall be constructed to the required depth. The manholes top shall have a
600mm. opening and shall be shaped to accommodate a standard size manhole
frame and cover.
Manhole floors shall be formed by hand with rich cement mortar to the size and
shape of the sewer. Inverts shall have a cross section of exact shape as the sewers
and all changes in sewer size shall be made gradually and evenly. The floor shall
have a gradual slope from the sidewalls to the central channel
All concrete shall be made with sulphate resisting cement.
All internal surfaces of manholes shall be painted with two coats of approved
bitumen solution.
During construction of the manhole, galvanized iron steps shall be furnished and set
in place on the inside wall. They shall be properly embedded in the wall.
All work shall be carried out in a manner to ensure watertight construction. If leaks
occur they shall be caulked, repaired or the entire work shall be removed and rebuilt.
Attention shall be particularly paid to the necessary of keeping the water level below
all parts of the manhole until the cement has obtained adequate set.
2.13
BENCHING AND INVERTS OF MANHOLES
The open channel in the bottom of the manholes shall be formed in the benching
with half round of pipe. All side branches shall be connected to the main channel so
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Section 1103-5
Plumbing Specialties
that the discharge is in the direction of the flow in the main channel. The benching
shall be concrete and shall rise vertically from the edge of the channel pipe to a
height not less that the outgoing pipe and be sloped upwards from there to meet the
wall of the manhole at a gradient of about 1 in 6. Rendering to benching shall be
applied in a coat of cement mortar (1:1) to a final thickness of 20 mm trowelled to a
smooth hard finish in accordance with BS. CP301.
2.14
TEMPORARY COVERS FOR MANHOLES
Temporary covers shall be fitted and retained in position on all manholes from the
time the top access is formed or the concrete cover slab installed, until the
permanent cover is installed.
2.9
MANHOLE STEP IRONS
All manholes of depth greater than 1200 mm. shall be provided with galvanized steel
irons complying with BS. 1247. They shall be staggered in two vertical runs at
300mm. centers vertically and 225 mm horizontally.
The top iron shall be no more than 350 mm. below the underside of the manhole
cover slab and the lowest no more than 300 mm. above the benching. Manhole cover
frames shall be bedded in 1:3 soleplate resisting cement sand mortar.
2.16
FRAMES AND COVERS
The Contractor shall provide for each manhole cast iron frame and cover with a 600
mm diameter clear opening. the concrete masonry shall be neatly and accurately
brought to the dimensions of the base of the frame. the frame shall be thoroughly
embedded in mortar and frame and cover set level and to the proper grade.
All castings for frames and covers shall be of tough gray iron and shall be made
accurately to dimensions and machined to provide even bearing surfaces. Covers
shall fit the frames in any position and if found to rattle under traffic shall be
replaced. No plugging, burning in or filling to obtain tight covers will be allowed.
All castings shall be carefully coated inside and outside with coal tar pitch varnish of
approved quality.
All frames and covers shall comply with BS 497 of grads as indicated on the
manholes schedules.
All manholes covers shall be provided with at least two keyways.
All covers and frames shall have clearly cast thereon the number of BS., the
appropriate grade and the weight in kg.
2.17
TESTING OF DRAINS
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Section 1103-6
Plumbing Specialties
A.
B.
Unless more stringent requirements are stated in this specification, all testing shall
be carried out in accordance with BS8301.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary labor and equipment and include in his
Tender for testing and work to the requirements and satisfaction of the Engineer and
all relevant public authorities.
All drains and sewers shall be tested with air after being laid and jointed but before
surround and backfilling is commenced to ensure that the jointing is satisfactory.
The results of the test must be approved by the Engineer before connecting.
The air test shall be applied at a pressure equivalent to 100mm head of water shall be
held for 5 minutes without further pumping; with loss not exceeding 25mm for
satisfactory testing. Where gullies or other ground floor appliances are connected, a
50mm test should be applied with a maximum loss of 12mm over a 5-minute
period..
A gauge in the form of a glass 'U' tube shall be provided and connected to the drain
plug of the length of drain under test.
C.
A further water test shall be carried out after the completion of the backfilling and
manhole construction, the length tested being between manholes. Test shall be
carried out in the manner described in the following paragraph.
D.
To facilitate the general building program, tests shall be made of sections as the
work proceeds, such testing however will not absolve the Contractor from his
liability for any subsequent or final testing.
E.
Any defects that become apparent during these tests of any part or parts of the
installation shall be rectified at the Contractor's expense and the part, or parts,
retested to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the relevant public authorities.
F.
For a water test, the drain lines shall be subjected to test pressure of at least 900 mm.
head of water at the highest point of the section under test. Allowance should be
made for added water until absorption has ceased, after which the test proper should
be commenced and the water level be maintained for a minimum of 30 minutes
without the addition of further water.
The same diameter as the drain at end, shall be fitted temporarily, in the socket of
the last pipe laid the joints being made watertight. The length under test shall be
fitted with water. The length under test shall be filled with water and after allowing
for 2 hours absorption and topping up,. the water level in the pipe shall be observed
for 30 minutes. The test shall be regarded as satisfactory if the loss of water does
not exceed:
Pipe Diameter
Water Loss
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Section 1103-7
Plumbing Specialties
(liter per meter run)
.05
.08
.12
.9
(mm)
100
90
225
300
G.
Test for straightens and obstruction shall be made to the Engineer's satisfaction and
in accordance with the requirements of B.S.C.P. 301, Building Drainage.
H.
The whole of the installation shall be left clean and free from debris.
I.
The Contractor shall keep a record of the tests carried out on the drainage
installation throughout the Contract, recording date of test, by whom tested and the
result, one copy of the records shall be sent to the Engineer on completion of the
Contract.
2.18
TESTING OF MANHOLES
Manholes shall be subjected to a hydraulic test. Pipe stoppers shall be inserted into
all pipe ends and the manhole filled with water to a height of 900 mm above the
benching invert. This water shall stand for five minutes for absorption to take place
and then be topped up as necessary. The water shall then remain at this level for a
further two hours to satisfy the test. If the water level falls, then all defects shall be
made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and the test shall be repeated as many
times as may be necessary until the manhole is satisfactory.
PART 3 INSTALLATION
3.01
All floor drains and floor cleanouts shall be installed square to the building and
surrounding finishes. The Contractor shall ensure that floor drains are co-ordinated
with the tiling layout.
* END OF SECTION 2 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Section 1103-8
Plumbing Specialties
SECTION 1104
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical Specification establishes the quality of materials and workmanship to be
used in the supply and installation of plumbing fixtures.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 1000 Basic Mechanical Requirements
B.
Section 1100 Plumbing Piping
C.
Section 1101 Plumbing Valves
D.
Section 1102 Plumbing Supports, Hangers and Brackets
E.
Section 1103 Plumbing Specialties
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
a.
Co-ordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for proper co-ordination of the work of
all trades.
b.
Note, for actual specification of type of appliances in toilet areas refer to schedules.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of plumbing equipment and
fittings whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10
years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of plumbing works of a similar quality
and scope as this project for at least 5 years.
1.05
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The plumbing fixtures shall comply fully with the latest relevant British Standards or DIN
standards in all respects.
B.
The following are the most commonly used British Standards associated with plumbing
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Fixtures
1104-1
fixtures. However the contractor shall ensure that all applicable British Standards are
complied with, whether listed here or not.
1.06
A.
BS 1224
Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium.
BS 1254
WC seats (plastics)
BS 1329
Metal hand rinse basins
BS 3402
Quality of vitreous china sanitary appliances
BS 3457
Materials for water tap and stop valve seat washers
BS 5388
Spray taps
BS 5503
WC pans with horizontal outlets
BS 5506
Wash basins
BS 5572
Sanitary pipework
BS 5627
Plastic connectors for use with horizontal vitreous china WC pans.
BS 5779
Spray mixing taps
SUBMITTALS
Drawings - refer to Section 1000
B.
Products - submit full manufacturer data for every item.
C.
Provide samples of products where requested by Engineer.
1.07
OPERATION MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
1.08
Comply with Section 1000.
WARRANTY
A.
1.09
A.
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Comply with Section 1000
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Fixtures
1104-2
PART 2 PODUCTS
2.01
A.
GENERAL
All units and assemblies of sanitary ware shall be as shown on the Mechanical and
Architectural drawings, listed in schedules and as listed below.
B.
Unless approved or stated otherwise all sanitary fixtures shall be from one manufacturer.
C.
Each plumbing fixture shall be supplied and installed complete with all necessary fittings
for operational and maintenance requirements. All fittings exposed to view (i.e. not
concealed in chase, void, duct or buried in building structure) shall be heavily chrome
plated unless otherwise indicated in the specification schedules or on the drawings.
2.02
WATER CLOSET- WALL HUNG
White vitreous china, wall hung back outlet type, complete with the following trim and
accessories:
Solid plastic seat with cover and rubber washers and plastic screws and nuts.
A.
.
B.
6 liter cistern concealed type with stop valve 20mm dia, push button plate,chrome plated.
C.
Chrome plated angle valve with copper tube flexible connection and escutcheon.
D
WC plastic outlet connector
E.
WC bowl S-trap
2.03
WATER CLOSET- FLOOR MOUNTED
White vitreous china, floor mounted type, complete with the following trim and accessories:
Solid plastic seat with cover and rubber washers and plastic screws and nuts.
6 liter cistern and valve less fittings including siphon, side inlet ball valve, internal overflow,
and reversible chrome plated cistern lever and cistern support.
A.
B.
C.
Chrome plated angle valve with copper tube flexible connection and escutcheon.
D
WC plastic outlet connector
E.
WC bowl S-trap
2.04
WASH BASIN – SEMI-PEDESTAL TYPE
White vitreous china, semi-pedestal type, with one tap hole and overflow, complete with the
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Fixtures
1104-3
A.
following trim and accessories:
Single lever mixer with ceramic cartridge, mousseur variable adjustable volume and
temperature limiter
B.
Pop-up waste fitting
C.
Chrome plated trap 32mmdia.
D.
Two angle valves with escutcheon and copper tube flexible connections.
E.
Wall brackets.
2.05
WASH BASIN – COUTERTOP TYPE
White vitreous china, countertop type, with one tap hole and overflow, complete with the
following trim and accessories:
A.
Single lever mixer with ceramic cartridge, mousseur variable adjustable volume and
temperature limiter
B.
Pop-up waste fitting
C.
Chrome plated trap 32mmdia.
D.
Two angle valves with escutcheon and copper tube flexible connections.
2.06
A.
SHOWER TRAY
The shower tray shall be made of pressed steel 3.5mm thick coated with porcelain vitreous
enamel china, of dimensions 760x760 mm, with anti- slip base and 90mm wall height,
complete with the following trim and accessories:
Single- lever bath/ shower mixer 9mm dia , wall mounted.
B.
U-grip ceramic cartridge, automatic diverter bath/ shower mixer integrated non return
valve, mousseur, S- union, flow limiter, temperature limiter.
C.
Shower set consisting of shower rail 600mm long, with wall brackets, sliding piece and
swivel holder, hand shower, shower hose 900mm long, soap dish all of chrome plated.
2.07
URINAL
A.
Urinal shall be white vitreous china wall mounted type screwed to wall with hangers. The
urinal shall be complete with the following trim and accessories:
Chrome plated flush valve 20mm dia with spreader.
B.
Chrome plated domed outlet grating 40mm dia.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Fixtures
1104-4
C.
Chrome plated bottle trap 40mm dia.
D.
Bowel support.
2.08
BEDIT- FLOOR MOUNTED
A.
Bidet shall be white vitreous china floor mounted with one tap hole, of dimensions
370x390mm. The bidet shall be complete with the following trim and accessories:
One hole single lever mixer 9mm dia.
B.
Over rim supply pop-up waste fittings.
C.
Bidet trap 32mm dia.
D.
Two angle valves with escutcheon and copper tube flexible connections
2.09
HAND SPREY
Hand spray shall be complete with chrome plated angle valve, one meter flexible tube and
wall bracket.
2.10
SINK
The sink shall be made of 1.2mm stainless steel and of overall dimensions as shown on
Architectural drawings. The sink shall be complete with the following trim and
accessories:
A.
B.
Single lever sink mixer 9mm dia deck mounted with ceramic cartridge, swivelling
tubular spout, mousseur, with adjustable volume and temperature limiter.
Plastic bottle trap 40mm dia.
C.
Two angle valves with escutcheon and copper tube flexible connections.
2.11
SANITARY ACCESSORIES
All Sanitary accessories shall be as shown on the Architectural drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
STORAGE
All plumbing fixtures shall be stored in their original containers in a secure enclosed store.
Vitreous chinaware shall be stored out of direct sunlight. Accessories (Taps, mixers, etc.)
shall be stored in boxes or wrappings to prevent the ingress of dust to machined surfaces.
All storage areas shall have adequate artificial lighting to allow for inspection of the
equipment by the Engineer.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Fixtures
1104-5
3.02
A.
3.03
FIXINGS
All fixings (Screens, Bolts etc.) shall be as supplied and/or recommended by the
fitting/fixture manufacturer. The fixings shall be entirely suitable for the medium they are
fixing into and shall be chosen to prevent any electrolytic action between any of the
installation elements. All fixings exposed to view shall be stainless steel or where only the
heads are exposed shall have caps of the same colours as the item they are fixing.
INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A.
All preparation work (provision of holes, pipes etc.) shall be carried out in strict accordance
with the fixture manufacturers requirements and shall be arranged such that pipe fittings,
offsets & connections are kept to a minimum. All plumbing fixtures shall be securely fixed
to the structure or their support system and shall be plumb & level. The fixtures & their
plumbing connections shall be arranged to ensure the connections are not subject to any
strain or load from the fixtures.
B.
All fixtures shall be sealed to adjacent walls or other surface with white silicon sealant.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF FITTINGS
A.
All accessories shall be installed true & straight or where curved, shall follow the
manufacturer recommendations to produce a smooth, fair & continuous radius. Any
accessories exhibiting `tool working' or surface finish damage shall be replaced. When
positioning fixtures and accessories the contractor shall ensure that all items are central, or
where in a range, consistent and symmetrical about architectural finishes as indicated on the
Architectural drawings.
B.
Where accessories are concealed the contractor shall ensure that they are accessible for
maintenance without affecting the structure or finishes.
3.05
PROTECTION
A.
The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to protect fixtures and accessories during
construction. New equivalent units shall replace any damaged fixtures and accessories.
Repairing of damaged units shall not be accepted.
B.
All fixtures and accessories shall be finally cleaned and put into working order upon
completion of construction. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for maintaining these
items until the facility is finally handed over.
3.06
A.
TOOLS
The contractor shall supply any special wrenches or other devices necessary for servicing
and maintaining the fixtures and accessories.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Fixtures
1104-6
* END OF SECTION 1104 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Fixtures
1104-7
SECTION 1105
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the standard
of workmanship to be used in the supply and application of thermal insulation to
plumbing piping.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 1000 Basic Mechanical Requirements
B.
Section 1100 Plumbing Piping
C.
Section 1101 Plumbing Valves
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour, materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the supply and application of thermal insulation as specified
herein and where referred to on the Drawings.
B.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the work of
all trades.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of thermal insulation
materials whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not
less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the application of thermal insulation
materials with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar
nature.
1.05
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The thermal insulation products and all associated materials shall comply with the latest
relevant British Standards in all respects.
B.
The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards associated
with thermal insulation products and associated material. However, the Contractor shall
ensure that all applicable British Standards are complied with whether listed here or not.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping Insulation
1105-1
BS 476 Part 4
:
Non-combustibility Test for Materials.
BS 476 Part 7
:
Method for Classification of the Surface Spread of
Flame of Products
Method for Determination of the Fire
Resistance of
Elements of Construction.
BS 1485
:
Specification for Zinc Coated Hexagonal Steel Wire
Netting.
BS 3958 Part 3
:Metal Mesh Faced Man-made Mineral Fibre Mattresses.
BS 3958 Part 4
:Bonded Preformed Man-made Mineral Fibre Pipe Sections.
BS 3958 Part 5
:Specification for Bonded Man-made Mineral Fibre Slabs.
BS 5422
:
Specification for the use of Thermal Insulation Materials.
BS 5970
:
Code of Practice for Thermal Insulation of
Pipework and Equipment.
BS 476 Part 20
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
To comply with specifications
2.02
GENERAL
A.
For general applications the thermal insulation materials shall be made from materials
which will not burn, but materials which are not entirely non-combustible may be
accepted if they have self-extinguishing characteristics, the total mass of combustible
materials is small and combustion does not produce dense smoke or toxic fumes. All
material finishes shall conform to spread of flame classification class O. Such materials
shall only be used with the prior permission of the Engineer.
B.
Insulation shall be rotproof, odourless, non-hygroscopic, shall not sustain vermin and
shall not contribute to metal corrosion. Any finishes (or coverings) used shall not
deteriorate with age or the effects of solar heat.
C.
Thermal insulation materials and their finishes shall be asbestos free and be suitable for
continuous use throughout the range of operating temperatures and within the
environment indicated.
D.
All insulating materials and associated products, sealants, tapes, adhesives, securing
bands and protective cladding shall be as specified or equal and approved.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping Insulation
1105-2
2.03
A.
EXPOSED PLANT AND PIPEWORK INSULATION
Exposed thermal insulation shall be pre-formed rigid sections or slabs, the basic material
consisting of the following:
1.
Pre-formed glass fibre sections (density 48 Kg/m3).
The insulation shall be manufactured from long stranded mineral fibres, resin bonded to
form sections having uniform density and high compressibility. The preformed rigid
insulation outside surface shall be smooth, unbroken, uniform, concentric and firm.
B.
Pipework insulation shall be high-density rigid resin bonded preformed glass fibre
sections of the thickness specified. The insulation shall comprise of two half sections with
a factory applied reinforced aluminium foil covering hinging the two half mating sections
for ease of installation. The covering shall have a 50mm side overlap of reinforced
aluminium foil to enable the outside surface to be completely sealed.
C.
Where thermal insulation of plant is required the insulation shall be preformed rigid
sections or slab. The material shall consist of long fine fibres (free from shot and coarse
fibres) bonded with a temperature resistant resin. The density shall be a minimum of 48
Kg/m3 and the surface shall have a factory applied reinforced aluminium foil finish.
D.
Thickness of insulation shall be determined in accordance with the following tables for
the appropriate medium and the declared value of thermal conductivity of the insulation
material at the relevant temperature.
When selecting the insulation thermal conductivity, the space available for the installation
shall be thoroughly examined to ensure that the resultant thickness can be accommodated.
TABLE 1
THICKNESS OF INSULATION FOR HOT WATER SERVICES
_______________________________________________________________________
DECLARED THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY (W/moC)
_______________________________________________________________________
Size of Tube
Up to 0.040 0.041-0.055
0.056-0.070
_______________________________________________________________________
mm
Minimum thickness of insulation (mm)
_______________________________________________________________________
9 to 32
40 to 50
65 to 80
100
25
25
25
32
32
25
32
32
32
32
32
38
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping Insulation
1105-3
125
90
Flat Surface
32
38
44
38
44
44
44
44
44
2.04 CONCEALED PIPEWORK INSULATION
A.
Concealed pipework thermal insulation shall be pre-formed closed cell elastomeric nitrile
foam having a minimum density of 80 Kg/m3.
B.
Thickness of insulation shall be 13mm for pipe sizes upto and including 50mm diameter
and 19mm for pipe sizes above 50mm diameter.
C.
All joints between sections where insulation is split and joints in site made sections
around valves etc. care to be glued with insulation manufacturers recommended adhesive.
TABLE 2
THICKNESS OF INSULATION FOR COLD WATER SERVICES
_______________________________________________________________________
DECLARED THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY (W/moC)
_______________________________________________________________________
Pipework within Building
External Pipework
_______________________________________________________________________
Size of
tube
Up to 0.041 to 0.056 to Up to
0.040 0.055
0.070
0.040
0.041 to
0.050
0.056 to
0.070
_______________________________________________________________________
(mm)
Minimum thickness of insulation (mm)
_______________________________________________________________________
9 to 40
50 to 80
100 to 90
Flat Surfaces
32
25
19
19
50
32
25
25
75
50
38
38
38
25
25
25
63
44
32
32
100
63
50
50
PART 3 EXECUTION
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping Insulation
1105-4
3.01
A.
C.
STORAGE
All thermal insulation materials shall be stored in their original packaging in such a
manner as to prevent the ingress of dust or moisture. The height of the packages shall be
restricted to prevent any deformation of preformed rigid sections.
Flat sheet and rolled metal materials used for protective claddings shall be stored away
from the ground surface, adequately covered and protected in a manner to prevent damage
to the materials.
All storage areas shall have adequate lighting to allow for the inspection of all materials.
3.02
FIXINGS
B.
A.
3.03
All mechanical fixings (rivets, screws) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of
the material being fixed. All mechanical fixings, sealants, tapes and adhesives shall be
entirely suitable for the medium that they are being applied to and the application shall be
fully in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
PLANT AND PIPEWORK INSULATION
A.
Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in
accordance with this Specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework
prior to witnessing of the pipework pressure test and only then after a full inspection and
approval by the Engineer.
B.
Thermal insulation shall be applied to the following: 1.
All hot water pipework including flanges and bodies of valves on all sizes of
pipework.
2.
External distributing mains and fittings above ground and in ducts, chases and
trenches including all valve bodies and flanges.
3.
Cold water pipework (including valve bodies and flanges) run above ground
external to buildings and run in ducts, chases, roof spaces and elsewhere as
indicated, to prevent shedding of condensation.
4.
Buried pipework shall have special forms of insulation as indicated.
5.
Rainwater pipes where run horizontally in ceiling voids.
Insulation shall fit closely on pipework and other surfaces without gaps between.
C.
The following lines shall not be insulated:
1.
Pipe used solely for fire protection.
2.
Chromium-plated pipe to plumbing fixtures.
D.
All sections of the insulation shall be of the correct size and made for the type and grade
of piping to which it is fitted and shall form a tight fit on the pipework after application of
adhesive and lapping. Bends shall be formed by cutting a series of gussets in the preformed sections to form a continuous finish with the pipework. The valve bodies and
flanges in plantrooms and those components within the entire pipework system 65mm dia
and above shall be insulated with the same insulation as the accompanying pipework but
contained within a removable aluminium box. Where a vapour seal is incorporated into
the insulation, all joints shall be effectively sealed with approved sealing material and
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping Insulation
1105-5
securely fixed.
E.
Each pre-formed rigid insulation section shall be butt jointed to the next, the point being
fully sealed with 75 mm wide aluminium tape. The preformed sections on domestic hot
and cold water services shall be secured hard to the bracket where inserts are not used.
The reinforced aluminium side overlap shall be sealed with a suitable adhesive or 75 mm
wide aluminium tape. Outer coverings shall not come into contact with pipework and
attachments.
F.
Each section of pre-formed insulation shall be secured to the pipe by one of the following
means:
1.
Circumferential tie wires each formed from three turns of wire not less than 1 mm
thick, spaced not more than 450 mm apart.
2.
Circumferential bands of non-ferrous metal, plastic fibre or adhesive sheet.
3.
Rigid insulation applied to cylinders and flat surfaces shall be secured with nonferrous metal or plastic fixings.
4.
Nitrile rubber foam split joint with insulation manufacturers recommended
adhesive.
G.
Insulation on pipework exposed to view and within plantrooms shall be clad fully in a
pre-formed aluminium stucco finish cladding 0.8 mm thick held in place by means of
rivets or self tapping screws. All joints shall be sealed with a non-setting sealing
compound.
H.
Insulation on pipework exposed to the outside atmosphere shall be clad with a covering of
polyisobutylene sheet fixed with adhesive, lapped and solvent welded to form an
impervious seal. At entries into buildings, the weatherproof insulation shall extended not
less than 100 mm beyond the inner face of the wall and be sealed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
I.
Thermal insulation on pipework in concrete trenches shall be as that for insulation on
pipework exposed to the outside atmosphere.
3.04
PROTECTION
A.
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect the works during construction.
Any damaged sections of insulation shall be completely cut out and replaced with a new
section. The vapour seal shall be repaired to ensure continuity.
B.
All damaged sections shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense until the system is
accepted and finally handed over.
* END OF SECTION 1105*
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Piping Insulation
1105-6
SECTION 1106
WATER HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical Specification establishes the quality of materials and workmanship to
be used in the supply and installation of water heaters.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 1000 Basic Mechanical Requirements
B.
Section 1001 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
C.
Section 1100 Plumbing Piping
D.
Section 1102 Plumbing Valves
E.
Section 1107 Plumbing Pumps
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labor, materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the installation of the water heaters as specified herein
and shown on the drawings.
B.
The work includes testing of the water heaters.
C.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for full coordination of the work of
all trades.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of water heaters and
ancillary equipment and fittings whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of plumbing works of a similar
quality and scope as this project for at least 5 years.
1.05
A.
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The water heaters, and associated fittings and accessories shall comply fully with the
latest relevant British Standards or DIN standards in all respects.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________
Water Heaters
1106-1
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A.
Drawings - refer to Section 1000
B.
Products - submit full manufacturers data for every item.
1.07
A.
1.08
A.
OPERATION MAINTENANCE DATA
Comply with Section 1000.
WARRANTY
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A.
The electrical water storage heaters shall be capable of withstanding the static head
imposed from the water supply pressure mains, and the cylinders shall be capable of
withstanding a test pressure of 7 bar. Water heaters shall be provided with temperature
gauges, pressure/temperature relief valves, reverse flow prevention, stop cocks.
B.
The water heaters shall be manufactured of heavy gauge steel with glass lining and
high density magnesium anode protection rod, all suitable for the above working and
test pressures.
C.
All wall mounted units are to have factory fitted 3 cm thick polyurethane foam, or
equivalent thermal insulation with a thermal conductivity value not greater than
0.035W/m deg.C, protected by an outer stove enameled casing.
D.
The water heaters shall be suitable for use with the available electrical power supply.
E.
Water heaters shall be provided with one immersion heater banks controlled by
thermostats. A manual reset high limit thermostat shall also be incorporated.
Immersion heaters shall be highest quality mineral filled titanium heaters with
connection box for conduit/wiring entry.
F.
All water heaters shall have a thermometer calibrated in deg C mounted on the outer
casing of the heater.
G.
All wall mounted units less than shall have safety valves.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________
Water Heaters
1106-2
2.02
CALORIFIERS
A.
Calorifiers shall be high output, vertical, storage type with an in-built heat exchanger,
withdrawable U tube battery; integral bronze circulating pump and a load regulator.
B.
Calorifier shall be designed and manufactured for a working pressure of 10 bars.
C.
Calorifier shall be provided with approved thermal insulation protected by galvanised
mild steel casing finished in gloss enamel.
D.
The following fittings to be supplied as a minimum:1.
Temperature/pressure relief valve.
2.
Rigid stem dial thermometer.
3.
Water pressure gauge.
4.
Isolating valves on primary and secondary piping.
5.
Drain cock.
6.
Check valve on cold water make-up.
E.
All screwed connections shall be to BS 21.
F.
All flanged connections shall be to BS 4504.
2.03
A.
HOT WATER RETURN PUMPS
Hot water return pumps for hot water systems shall be constructed so that all parts in
contact with the water are in stainless steel or bronze and shall be capable of
circulating the volume and head indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 1107 –
Plumbing Pumps.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PIPEWORK CONNECTIONS
A.
All pipework connections to each water heater shall have a union disconnection point
between the heater and it's stop valve.
B.
All drain points, vent and safety valve discharge pipes shall be extended to discharge
over a tundish which shall be piped to the nearest floor drain.
C.
The Contractor shall ensure that all the pipe and electrical connections to each water
heater are easily accessible for maintenance and that the heater can be removed and
replaced with the minimum of disturbance to the system.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________
Water Heaters
1106-3
3.02
A.
INSPECTION, TESTING AND STERILISATION
All pipework shall be visibly examined and tested before being concealed or built into
the structure.
1.
All pipework and water heaters are to be pressure tested to twice the working
head whichever is the greater, without loss of pressure for 2 hours.
2.
On, satisfactory completion, the system shall be flushed out and refilled with
chlorinated water at a chlorine concentration of 50 mg/l free chlorine for 24
hours. The system is to be washed-out prior to acceptance until the free
chlorine at the outlets is no greater than that present in the water mains.
3.
The above tests are to be witnessed by representatives of the Engineer and
Contractor who will sign that the tests have been fully complied with.
* END OF SECTION 1106 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
________________________________________________________________________
Water Heaters
1106-4
SECTION 1107
PLUMBING PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the
standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Pumps.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 1000 Basic Mechanical Requirements
B.
Section 1001 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
C.
Section 1100 Plumbing Piping
D.
Section 1101 Plumbing Valves
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour, materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the supply and installation of Pumps as specified herein
and where referred to on the Drawings and Schedules.
B.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the
work of all trades.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of Pumps whose
products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not less than 10
years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Pumps with at
least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar nature.
1.05
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The Pumps, and all associated materials and workmanship shall comply fully with the
latest relevant British Standards and ISO Standards in all respects.
1.06
A.
SUBMITTALS
Drawings refer to 1000
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Pumps
1107-1
B.
C.
1.07
A.
1.08
A.
Calculations: Pump Head calculations shall be submitted for approval based on the
Contractors working drawings and pipeline equipment to be installed.
Products: Full certified manufacturer performance data and construction details.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Comply with 1000
WARRANTY
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
COLD WATER TRANSFER PUMPSET
A.
The design, construction, materials and finishes or all units shall be suitable for the
locations, climatic and operating conditions in this specification.
B.
The units shall be one piece, packaged fully locally assembled, piped, wired and
complete with operating and safety controls and all customary auxiliaries deemed
necessary by the manufacturer for the safe, controlled automatic operation of the
equipment.
C.
Packaged unit shall comprise: -
D.
E.
1.
Multi-stage, centrifugal pumps
2.
Valves and fittings
3.
System pipework connections.
4.
Pressure vessel
5.
Controls and instrumentation.
Pumps
1.
Provide pumps as schedules fitted with self-adjusting mechanical seals.
2.
Motors shall be TEFC to IP 54 squirrel cage type with class `F’ insulation and
of 1450 RPM motor. Specification section1 9171 also applies.
3.
All wetted parts shall be type 304 stainless steel; impellers shall be stainless
steel or bronze.
Valves and Fittings
1
Provide the following valves and fittings:
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Pumps
1107-2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
F.
G.
H.
Pump isolating gate valves on suction and discharge side.
Non return valves on discharge side.
Strainer on suction side.
Pressure gauges.
Flexible pipe connectors on suction line connected to the ground water
reservoir.
Pressure vessel of 50 liter capacity, 10 bar working pressure, with
diaphragm, safety valve, automatic air vent and isolating valve.
Control and Instrumentations
1.
The pumps shall operate under the control of pressure switch to transfer the
water from ground water reservoir to roof tanks.
2.
Provide the following controls and instrumentation:
a.
Pressure switches and transducer.
b.
Pressure gauges.
c.
Hand/off/auto switch for each pump.
d.
Duty selector switch.
h.
System under pressure alarm.
3.
Pre-wire all of the above items to a composite front accessible control panel
having power on light, run and trip lights, tank level lights, audible alarm with
mute facility, main isolator switch and terminal blocks suitable for field
services, interlocks to provide a complete packaged unit.
4.
The controls shall include for auto-alternating operation of pumps.
5.
The pump set shall have dry-running protection.
6.
All alarms and pumps functions shall be interfaced with BMS (if required).
Base Frame
1.
Mount all components onto a mild steel angle and hollow section frame.
2.
Prime and paint base with protective undercoat and hammer finish gloss.
Vibration Isolators
1.
Mount unit on anti vibration isolators.
2.
Provide non-ferrous braided flexible pressure connections in interfaces with
pipework system.
3.
Final electrical connections to be made with armoured flexible conduit.
2.02 HOT WATER RETURN PUMPS
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Pumps
1107-3
The pump shall be inline close coupled single suction centrifugal type. The pump
shall have suction and discharge flanges of the same diameter and on the same canter
line.
The pump motor shall be of squirrel cage induction type rated for continuous
operation at ambient temperature not less than 40°C.
The motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type with insulation class F and IP54
protection.
The pump construction shall be all stainless steel have a pressure rating not less than
10 bar.
Pipe connections including fittings, valves, instrumentations etc. shall be as shown on
the drawings.
2.03
SUMP PUMPS
A.
Sump pumps shall be duty and standby to the sizes shown on the project drawings or
schedules.
B.
Sump pumps shall be of the fully submersible type. Each pump shall be complete with
non –return valve and isolating gate valve on the pump discharge. These valves shall
be fitted above the normal highest liquid level and in a location accessible from the
surface.
C.
Pumps shall be supplied complete with control panel for automatic operation and auto
changeover of duty/standby pump. Control panel shall have visual/audible alarm.
D.
Mode of control shall be as follows: 1.
Low level pump stop float switch.
2.
Normal level pump start float switch.
3.
High level standby pump float switch.
4.
High level alarm float switch.
E.
Pump components shall be manufactured of the following materials: Motor
: 3 - phase or single phase, insulation class F, protection type IP68.
Pump housing : Grade 304 stainless steel or cast iron to BS1452 grade 20.
Impeller
: Grade 304 stainless steel.
Pump sleeve : Grade 316 stainless steel.
Shaft
: Grade 304 stainless steel.
Bearing
: Heavy-duty pre-lubricated ball bearings.
O-rings
:Neoprene rubber.
F. Discharge pipe within sump between pump and valves shall be heavy-duty reinforced
rubber hose.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Pumps
1107-4
G. Sum pump used for sewage (waste and soil drain) shall be explosion proof type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Carry out static checks on electrical wiring settings of all control and safety devices to
ensure conditions are safe prior to start up and running.
B.
Align and shim level units on prepared bases.
C.
Fix all units to bases.
D.
Ensure adequate space is available around the units to allow inspection and
maintenance of all components.
3.02
A.
INSTALLATION INSPECTIONS
Pre-installation Inspection:
1.
B.
Examine the areas and conditions under which the boosting units are to be
installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner suitable to the
Owner.
Post Installation Check:
1.
Provide the services of an experienced component and authorised
representative of manufacturer or supplier of the equipment to visit site to
inspect, check, adjust if necessary and approve installation of all booster units.
C.
Carry out necessary testing to ensure installations are in working order and acceptable
to Owner.
D.
Ensure that equipment supplier’s representative is present when equipment is placed
in operation.
3.03
A.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
COMMISSIONING
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Pumps
1107-5
1.
Carry out status checks on electrical wiring; settings of all control and safety
devices to ensure conditions are safe prior to start up and running.
2.
Operate equipment to ensure all control temperature pressure and safety
devices function as required and log settings of all control and safety devices
for tabulation and inclusion in submittal document required in accordance with
this specification. The equipment shall be left in safe and proper working order
for “Post Installation Check”.
* END OF SECTION 1107 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________________
Plumbing Pumps
1107-6
SECTION 1300
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF SECTION
A.
This technical Specification establishes the quality of materials and workmanship to
be used in the supply and installation of the Fire Protection systems and equipment
1.02
A.
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 1000 Basic Mechanical Requirements
B.
Section 1002Mechanical Identification.
C.
Section 1301 Fire Protection Piping
D.
Section 1302 Fire Pumps
E.
Section 1303Fire Protection Specialties
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Provisions of all labor, materials and the performance of all operations in connection
with the installation and testing fire protection systems within buildings as specified
herein and shown on the drawings.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for proper coordination of the
work of all trades and shall provide clear drawings where necessary.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of fire protection
systems and equipment fittings whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on
projects with fire protection schemes and equipment similar to that required for this
project.
1.
2
3.
Conform to the requirements of Civil Defense Department
All materials used for fire protection systems and shop drawings shall be
approved by the Civil Defense Department. The Contractor shall not place
any order or proceed with any installation, prior to obtain the approval from
the Civil Defense Department.
Special fire protection systems like FM200 shall be executed, only by
Contractors who have full experience for the execution of such systems.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Systems and Equipment
1300-1
1.05
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The fire protection systems and equipment shall comply fully with the latest relevant
British Standards and National Fire Protection Association standards in all respects.
B.
The following are the most applicable standards:
BS3506 part 1
BS3506 part 2
NFPA Codes
1.06
A.
SUBMITTALS
Drawings - refer to Section 1000
1. Submit product data, samples and shop drawings in accordance with the
following.
a) Manufacturer's printed brochures and catalogs along with write up of
selection criteria.
b) General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller that 1:100.
c) Equipment installation and piping layout double line drawings of plant
rooms, water storage tanks, etc. Clearly indicating all fittings, supports,
valves and control gear to a scale of 1:20. Submit sections and elevations as
required.
d) Builders work layout plans to a scale of 1:100 / 1:50 as above, along with
shaft detail plans to 1:10.
e) Installation details of:
(1) Assemblies like fire cabinets, fire brigade breaching inlets, fire
hydrants, control valves and items of similar nature to a scale of 1:10.
(2) Sprinklers, air release valves and items of similar nature to a scale of
1:10
(3) Sleeves and penetrations, equipment foundations etc. to a scale of 1:10.
(4) Electrical wiring diagrams (NTS) and panel installation details (1:20).
f) Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings.
g) Test and performance certificates of equipment, where required.
h) Printout of hydraulic calculations of sprinkler system piping executed
by an approved computer program, along with shop drawings.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Systems and Equipment
1300-2
2. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples to the Civil Defence Department
and obtain their approval, prior to execution of works at site.
3. Submit composite shop drawings for all congested services areas showing the
interrelationship of all services with each other and with the surrounding civil
and architectural work.
4. Submit project record drawings of all works installed under this section.
5. Submit project "as built" drawings prepared from the latest progress prints.
6. Submit FOUR (4) hard bound copies of "operation and maintenance manual"
with complete data for each piece of equipment installed, as detailed below:
a) The cover shall contain:
(1) Title: "Fire protection system operation and maintenance manual.
(2) Names of the Owner. The Consultant and the Contractor.
b) The manual shall contain:
(1) Table of contents.
(2) Fire protection materials and drawings submittal with the Engineer and
Civil Defence Department approval.
(3) Manufacturer's installation instructions.
(4) Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams.
(5) Manufacturer's assembly details.
(6) Replacements parts / materials, number listing and description.
(7) Preventive maintenance schedules listing frequency of service and or
replacement.
(8) Lubricants, commercial equivalents and schedules of use.
(9) Names and address of manufacturer's sales and service agencies and
local representative / distributor including telephone and telex numbers.
(10) Name and address of Contractor's maintenance department including
emergency contact telephone number.
c) Arrange the contents of the manual in sections with tags, grouping each
class of equipment as pumps; pump control panels; fire extinguishers; fire
cabinets; installation control valves; valves; fire protection specialties;
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Systems and Equipment
1300-3
monitoring and alarm systems etc.
d) Arrange contents of each section in sequence as listed above.
7. Be responsible for training the Employer's personnel , selected by the Owner , in
the correct operation, control and maintenance of the installations specified
herein. Training shall be carried out by qualified commissioning and operating
staff of the Contractor.
8. The foregoing Clauses are in addition to and in no way relieve the Contractor of
his liabilities and obligations under the Contract.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Comply with Section 1010.
1.08
WARRANTY
A.
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties and guarantees for products
furnished under this Section of the Specification. However, such guarantees shall be
in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturers and the
Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents.
C.
Any fault or failure due to defective or improper material, equipment, workmanship
or Contractor's design which may develop shall be made good forthwith, by and at
the expense of the Contractor, including all other damage done to areas, materials
and other systems resulting from such fault or failure.
D.
The Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the systems are of sufficient
capacity as in or implied by the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Use only those products specifically listed/approved for fire protection services by Civil
defense Department
2.02
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A.
All materials, equipment and procedures associated with the Fire Protection Systems
shall be in accordance with requirements of these specifications.
B.
Where operating or warning instructions are provided or specified they shall be
clearly denoted in Arabic and English.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Systems and Equipment
1300-4
The Contractor shall supply original authenticated certificates for each type of
material or equipment, confirming the standard they have been manufactured and
tested to.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL INSTALLATION
A.
All items shall be installed in the locations indicated on the drawings and strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B.
The installation shall comply fully with all applicable standards and codes listed in
Part 1.05.
3.02
LOCAL AUTHORITY APPROVAL
A.
The Contractor shall make all necessary submittals to Civil Defense Department and
gain all required approvals for the Fire Protection Systems.
3.03
COMPLETION
A.
On completion of the works and prior to handover the entire Fire Protection Systems
shall be tested and commissioned in strict accordance with the relevant requirements
of the NFPA, British Standards, and LPC Rules
* END OF SECTION 1300 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Systems and Equipment
1300-5
SECTION 1301
FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01. SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pipe and pipe fittings.
B.
Valves.
C.
Sprinkler system piping.
1.02APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
ASTM A53
Pipe, steel, Black and hot dipped, zinc coated welded and seamless.
BS: 1387
Galvanised steel medium and heavy duty.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's name, pressure rating and side shall be cast-on, on the valve body..
B.
For each product specified, provide from same manufacturer throughout, where
possible.
C.
Test certificates from approved independent laboratories or testing agencies shall be
furnished at no extra cost
D.
Maintain uniformity in respect of connection standards (threads, flanges etc.). Where
this is not practicable due to justifiable reasons, the Contractor shall ensure
compatibility by using appropriate adapters, conversion spools, mating counter
flanges etc.
1.04
A.
SUBMITTALS
Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 15010.
B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories and recommended
coating materials.
C.
Submit manufacturer's installation instruction or recommendations.
D. Submit copies of valve ordering schedules for approval prior to ordering valves.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site, store and protect .
B.
Store plastic and copper pipes on elevated racks only.
Royal Electro mechanical Eng.
Consulting Engineers
__________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Piping
1301-1
C.
Store plastic and rubber products out of direct sunlight.
D.
Keep ends of pipes closed with factory manufactured plugs to prevent entry of
foreign matter.
E.
Apply two coats of approved primer to all untreated ferrous pipes, prior to storage.
F.
Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
G.
Store plug/ball valves in open position and gate/globe valves in closed position to
prevent damages to seats. Retain flange protectors on the valves, until installation
to prevent damages to flange faces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPES AND FITTINGS
SERVICE
Sprinkler, landing valves,
and hose reels piping up to
50 mm nom. dia.
Sprinkler, landing valves,
hose reels and hydrants
piping 65mm nom. dia.
and larger.
Drainage piping
2.02
A.
B.
LOCATION
All
TYPE
ASTM A53 black steel,
schedule 40 seamless.
All
ASTM A53 Black,
steel, schedule 40,
seamless.
All
ASTM A53 galvanised
steel, schedule 40
seamless.
JOINTS
Black steel:
1.
50 mm (2") diameter and less: - Threaded, with Teflon tape
2.
65 mm dia. and above: - Mechanical welded
Galvanized steel:
1. 50 mm (2") diameter and less:
Threaded, with Teflon tape or joining compound (non-toxic) applied to pipe
threads.
C.
2.03
All joint shall be rated for 1035 kPa (150 psig) working water pressure at 121 deg. C
(250 deg. F).
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
Royal Electro mechanical Eng.
Consulting Engineers
__________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Piping
1301-2
A.
For pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and less.
1.
2.
B.
For pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) nom. dia. and over:
1.
C.
Black steel piping: - Malleable iron unions with bronze to iron seat, threaded
ends.
Galvanized steel piping: - Malleable iron unions with bronze to iron seat,
threaded ends..
Black steel piping: - welding
2.
Galvanized steel piping: -Galvanized malleable iron flanges with stiffening ribs,
threaded end
3.
Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some
angular deflection, contraction and expansion, "C" shape composition sealing
gasket; steel bolts, nuts and washers, galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe.
Dielectric connections:
1.
Use dielectric unions with one end malleable iron threaded and the other end
copper solder for pipe sixes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and less. Use dielectric
flanged fittings for pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) nom dia and above. Both
unions and flanges shall have water impervious isolation barrier certified to
withstand a minimum 600 volts on dry line with no flashover.
D. All flanges, unions and couplings shall be rated for 1035 kPa (150 psig) working water
pressure at 121 deg. C (250 deg. F).
2.04
VALVES - GENERAL
A.
Provide valves form same manufacturer throughout where possible.
B.
All valves shall be approved by Civil Defense Department
2.05
A.
GATE VALVES
Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size:
1.
B.
Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size:
1.
2.06
A.
Bronze body, rising stem and union bonnet, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends.
Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), rising stem, OS&Y, renewable seat, flanged
ends.
BALL VALVES
Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size:
1. Bronze body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box ring, lever
operation;threaded ends.
Royal Electro mechanical Eng.
Consulting Engineers
__________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Piping
1301-3
B.
Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size:
1. Cast steel body; stainless steel, full bore, floating; Teflon seat and stuffing box
seals; lever/key operation; flanged ends.
2.07
SILENT CHECK VALVES
A.
Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size:
1.
B.
Bronze body, in-line, resilient seat and disc, spring loaded, screwed ends.
Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size:
1. Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable composite disc andseat,flanged
ends.
C.
Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size:
1. Iron body, bronze trim, swing type with external lever and weight, renewable seat
and disc, flanged ends.
2.08
A.
2.10.
DRAIN VALVES
Bronze angle globe pattern, key operated, threaded inlet and hose connection outlet
with cap and chain.
PRESSURE RATINGS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated all valves shall be rated for 1724 kPa (250 psig)
working water pressure at 121 deg. C (250 deg. F).
B.
Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure rated valves to meet the valve
construction features.
VALVE OPERATORS
2.11
A.
Provide hand wheels/operating levers for valves as appropriate. Hand wheels for gate
and globe valves 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and smaller, shall be non-ferrous metal
(die cast zinc/aluminum alloy etc.)
B.
Provide one key/wrench of appropriate size per lever operated valve installed.
C.
Provide chain operated sheaves for valves located more than 2M (7 feet) above floor.
Extend chains to about 150 cm (5 feet) above floor and hook to clips in order to clear
walk ways and equipment.
D.
Provide geared operators for valves 8 inches and larger in size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
Royal Electro mechanical Eng.
Consulting Engineers
__________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Piping
1301-4
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B.
Remove weld splatter, scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain proper gradient.
B.
Install piping in a way that conserves building space and does not interfere with use of
space.
C.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
D.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe joints or
connected equipment.
E.
Install exposed piping parallel or at right angles to the building walls, except where
otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.
F.
Where changes in pipe sizes occur, install tapered reducer fittings. Use of bushings is
not permitted. Install eccentric reducing fittings with level crown.
G.
Where changes in pipe direction occur install factory manufactured fittings. Bending
or forming of piping is not permitted without Project Manager's written permission.
H.
Provide adequate clearance for installation of fittings, insulation etc. and access to
valves and fittings.
I.
Provide minimum clearance between piping covered by this section and other services.
J.
Provide access doors of suitable and adequate sizes where valves and fittings are not
exposed.
K.
Slope sprinkler piping and arrange to drain at installation control valves. Provide
additional drain valves at undrainable segments of piping.
L.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
M.
During progress of work keep the ends of all piping closed with factory manufactured
plugs or blind flanges to prevent entry of foreign matters. Ensure the removal of such
plugs or flanges on completion of the works. All blind flanges shall have integral
indicating flags.
N.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
O.
All valves shall be same size as pipeline except if otherwise note on the Contract
Drawings.
P.
Padlock all valves in open or closed position with leather strap, as required.
Q.
Provide couplings/unions on horizontal pipe runs at spacing not exceeding 18.0 M (60
feet).
3.03 APPLICATION
Royal Electro mechanical Eng.
Consulting Engineers
__________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Piping
1301-5
A.
Install unions or flanges downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus
connections.
B.
Install dielectric unions or flanged fittings wherever joining dissimilar metals.
C.
Install drain valves at system low points and at each riser base.
D.
Install gate valves for shutoff and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical
risers.
E.
Install flap type check valves on the Fire Brigade Breaching line.
F.
Select appropriate valve gland packing, sealing and gasket materials for the
temperature and pressure encountered.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Give the following protective coatings/wrappings to piping.
1.
(a)
(b)
Exposed, black steel piping:
Two coats of red oxide primer.
Two coats of enamel paint, as coded or to match with the surrounding
architectural finish schedule.
2.
(a)
(b)
Concealed (in shafts) black steel piping:
Two coats or red oxide primer.
Two coats of enamel paint as coded.
3.
(a)
(b)
Exposed galvanized iron piping:
Two coats of zinc chromate primer.
Two coats of enamel paint as coded or to match with the surrounding
Architectural finishes (in areas exposed to view).
4.
(a)
(b)
Concealed (in shafts) galvanized iron piping:
Two coats of zinc chromate primer.
Two coats of enamel paint as coded.
5.
(a)
(b)
Buried (external to the building and embedded in concrete structure) ductile
piping
Two coats of coal and tar.
Wrapping with an anti-corrosion tape.
3.05. TESTING OF PRESSURIZED PIPING
A.
The pipes shall be jointed, plugged and shall have been in position for at least 24
hours, AND FLUSHED AND CLEAN before the tests are carried out.
B.
The piping shall be tested for line, gradient and water tightness. Furnish all labor, and
necessary testing instruments such as gauges, pumps etc. as directed by the Project
Manager. A minimum of two (2) nos. identical pressure gauges shall be installed at
extremities of the piping circuit to be tested.
C.
Fill the piping with clean fresh water starting at the lowest point and leaving all high
points open to allow for purging of air.
Royal Electro mechanical Eng.
Consulting Engineers
__________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Piping
1301-6
D.
Pressure test the system using manual pumps in increments of 25 percent of the test
pressure. Allow a standing period of 10 minutes after each pressure increment.
Pressure testing using motor driven pump is not permitted.
E.
Do not over pressurize the system under any circumstances. If the test pressure is close
to the maximum permissible working pressure of any of the system components,
install calibrated pressure relief valves in the tested circuit.
F.
Prior to testing keep all valves and control devices in open position. After completion
of pressure test, close each valve one at time starting from the pressure release end, so
as to ensure tightness of the above.
G.
The piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure of 1550 kPa (225 Psig) or 1.5
times the system working pressure which ever is greater but limited to 1724 kPa (250
psig). The pressure shall be maintained for at least 4 hours. Allow for pressure
fluctuations due to ambient temperature variation. Record the circuit temperature
along with the pressure readings.
H.
Check for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure to the order of 10 kPa
(1.5 psig) per hour shall be considered as acceptable.
I.
Do not subject sprinklers to the test pressure.
J.
Piping shall be tested in segments during the progress of the work. Maintain an official
log book for recording the test carried out on sections of piping, including test
pressure, date of test and approval signature of Engineer representative witnessing the
test.
* END OF SECTION 1301*
Royal Electro mechanical Eng.
Consulting Engineers
__________________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Piping
1301-7
SECTION 1302
FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01. SCOPE
A .The contractor shall provide and install a fire pump set.
1.02. RELATED WORKS
A. SECTION 1300 Fire protection systems.
B. SECTION 1301 Fire protection piping.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use only those products specifically listed/approved for fire protection services
by Civil Defense Department
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, samples and installation details as specified.
B. Submit selection criteria and ordering schedule, listing types against use and
location.
1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site store and protect under provision of Sections 9000.
B. Keep factory packed items in shipping cartons, until time of installation.
C. Store factory calibrated items, which are dropped or subjected to shock
otherwise in separate containers with appropriate labels, till completion of
works. Keep a record of the same for inspection by the Project Manager.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Use only those products specifically listed/approved for fire protection services
by Civil Defense Department
2.02 PUMPS
A. The fire pumps shall be of end suction centrifugal design. The pump shall
comply with ULFM and factory assembled.PACKAGED
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Fire Pumps1302-1
B. Duty
1. The pumps shall be designed to operate at a maximum of 2900RPM.
C. Casing:
1. Cast iron.
2. Replaceable, lock on bronze wearing rings.
D. Ratings
1. Pressure: Minimum 16 bar.
2. Connections: 8.6 bar inlet and 40 bar discharge flanged.
E. Impellers:
1.
Fully enclosed, bronze, key to the shaft.
2.
Replaceable bronze wearing rings to match casing rings, seal against
internal recirculation, lock on.
F. Shaft:
1.
Stainless steel, ground smooth.
G. Shaft Sleeves:
1.
Bronze, lock on the shaft and seal against air or water leakage.
2.
Sleeves shall extend from the impeller through the stuffing boxes.
H. Stuffing Boxes:
1.
Multiple layers of packing rings in stuffing boxes, water lubricate by
copper tubing connections to casing.
2.
Provide bronze lantern rings when operating at suction pressures of 9
psig or less.
I.
Bearings:
1
Heavy duty ball type, oil or grease lubricate, capable of handling radial
and thrust loads; mount outboard in sealed housings with lubricant
reservoirs and fittings for adding lubricant and flushing.
2.
Protect from water by slinger rings on shaft.
J.
The pump unit and accessories shall meet all the requirements of local code.
2.03 Fire Pump Controller
A. The fire pump controller shall meet the requirements of ULFM and shall be
ULFM listed and completely assembled, wire and test the motor equipment at
the factory.
1. The assembly shall be specifically approved for fire pump purposes.
2. Mark the controller "Fire Pump Controller".
3. Enclose all equipment in one or more approved grip tight enclosures.
4. The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic across the
line type incorporating all required accessories for a complete system.
B. Securely mount the following components on a single non combustible, non
moisture absorbing, non conducting panel suitable for temperatures up to 200
degrees F within the enclosure:
1. Main line externally operated circuit breaker of the automatic type having
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Fire Pumps1302-2
one pole in each ungrounded conductor to isolate the motor control from
the line in event of a short circuit; interrupting capacity not less than
65,000 amperes.
2. Motor starter of the heavy-duty magnetic clapper type with double break
contact in each conductor.
3. Power failure alarm relay, which shall drop open on voltage failure or if the
circuit breaker is opened.
4. Auxiliary contact on starter to operate a remote pump running alarm.
Contact to open when pumps run.
5. Pressure regulator of the Bourdon tube type; provide with adjustable cut in
and cut out points.
6. Pilot light to indicate power available.
7. Pilot light to indicate that motor has been started manually and must be
shut down manually.
8. Selector switch marked "Automatic and Non Automatic" with no "off"
position.
9. Externally operated handle for manual starting.
10. Terminal block for terminating remote alarm circuits.
11. Minimum running timer.
12. Suction and discharge pressure gauges.
2.04 Jockey Pump
A. The jockey pump shall be designed to deliver the rated capacity at the rated.
head. The pump will be a vertical multistage stage centrifugal type, close
coupled to an open drip proof motor.
2.05 Jockey Pump Controller
A Completely assemble, wire and test at the factory and enclose in steel enclosure
incorporating the following:
1. Fused disconnect switch.
2. Across-the-line motor starter.
3. Manual-Off-Automatic switch.
4. Pressure regulator set to cut on and off at pressures as indicated.
2.06 Repeater Panel
A. A fire pumps repeater panel shall be provided to indicate the following status of
all fire pumps.
1. Pump start.
1. Pump stopped.
2. Pump failure to start.
3. Power supply.
4. Stand by power supply.
5.
It shall be linked with the Building Management System (if required)
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Fire Pumps1302-3
6. The panel will be located in the operator room as required.
7.
It shall sound an alarm in the event that a fire pump fails to start.
2.07 Assembled Package
A. All of the above equipment will be mounted on an open structural steel base
plate.
1 .All piping, pressure sensing lines, pump by-pass, if required, shut off
valves, stuff box and casing relief valve drains will be firmly anchored to
the steel base by means of structural steel supports.
2 .All electrical connections and wiring will be completed and tested prior to
delivery to the jobsite.
2.08 Testing
A
Field acceptance testing of the unit will be performed by the pump supplier.
B
All equipment will be factory tested in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 20
* END OF SECTION 1302 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_______________________________________________________________________
Fire Pumps1302-4
SECTION 1303
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Zone alarm valves
B. Alarm control valve
C. Sprinklers.
D. Sprinkler line testers.
E. Fire hose cabinets.
G. Siamese connection.
H. Landing valves
I. Fire hydrants
J. Portable fire extinguishers.
K. Flow switches.
L. Automatic air relief valves.
1.02 RELATED WORKS
A .SECTION 1300
Fire protection systems.
B .SECTION 1301
Fire protection piping.
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use only those products specifically listed/approved for fire protection services by
Civil Defense Department
1.04. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, samples and installation details under provisions of Section
9000.
B.
Submit selection criteria and ordering schedule, listing types against use and
location.
1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A .Deliver products to site, store and protect under provision of section 1010.
B. Keep factory packed items in shipping cartons, until time of installation.
C. Store factory calibrated items which are dropped or subjected to shock otherwise in
separate containers with appropriate labels, till completion of works. Keep a record
of the same for inspection by the Project Manager.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
______________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Specialties
1303-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
CONTROL VALVES
A .System Isolation Valve:
1. Iron body, bronze mounted, outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) construction with solid
wedge and flanged ends.
B. Alarm Check Valve :
1. Flap type construction with flanged ends, metered bypass with ball valve for
pressure maintenance flow, test and alarm trimmings, bolted access cover, pressure
gauges (as specified elsewhere) at inlet and outlet.
C Test And Drain Valve:
1. All bronze, angle valve with screwed ends complete with metering orifice,
discharge tundish etc.
D. Alarm Test Valve:
1. All bronze multiport plug valve with screwed ends, operating lever,
engravedposition indicator attached to body.
E. Strainer:
1. All bronze, y type strainer with screwed ends, screwed cover and 30 mesh stainless
steel screen for alarm supply line.
F. Water Motor Alarm:
1. All bronze construction of through the wall type with threaded inlet and outlet
connections, wall sleeve, drive shaft and bell.
G. Retarding Chamber
1. All installation control valves shall have a retarding chamber in order to avoid false
alarms.
H. Pressure Switch
1. Pressure switch shall be provided and linked with the fire alarm control panel.
2.02
SPRINKLERS
A. All sprinklers shall be the frangible glass bulb type, rated at 79°C. All sprinklers shall
be U.L, listed.
B.
Sprinkler Heads
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
______________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Specialties
1303-2
1. Pendant Type Sprinklers
Water spray type, bulb type, concealed type, white plate in.
C. Upright Type Sprinkler:
1. Shall be with bronze/brass finish.
D. All sprinklers:
1. Shall be located in accordance with NFPA requirements .
2. The Contractor's attention is drawn to table 4-5.4.6 (NFPA 13) "Position of
Deflector when located above bottom of beam", this clause being applicable to the
location of upright sprinklers and other ceiling sprinklers.
2.03
SPRINKLER LINE TESTERS
A. Forged Brass fitting with 25 mm (1 inch) female threaded inlet, 9mm (1/2 inch
nominal) threaded sprinkler outlet and 25 mm (1 inch nominal) male hose threaded,
drain outlet with cap and chain.
B. The drain valve shall be wrench operated.
2.04
A.
FIRE HOSE REELS
Fire hose reels shall be provided as shown on the drawings. The hose shall be of 25
mm diameter 30.0 m long, wound on a swing type automatic reel with textile hose.
B. The hose shall be made of reinforced non-kink rubber. The flow rate at each hose
nozzle shall not be less than 23 liters per minute (6 gpm) with an effective jet of 6
meters
C. The hose reel shall be housed in a cabinet that contains also globe valve, a portable fire
extinguisher powder of 6.0 kg capacity. The cabinet shall be recessed type.(80*120)
D. The fire hose cabinet shall be of dimensions sufficient to include the hose reel, the
globe valve and the fire extinguisher and to fit with the available space as shown on
the Drawings.it also includes the landing valve
2.05
LANDING VALVES
Landing valves shall be installed on the wet risers for the use of Fire Brigade
inside buildings as shown on the Drawings.
Landing valve shall be gunmetal globe valves, high pressure type to BS. 5041
with 65 mm. dia. bore fitted with 65 mm. instantaneous female coupling to
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
______________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Specialties
1303-3
conform to BS 336 and a brass blank cap secured by a suitable length of
chain. The landing valve shall have 65 mm. dia flanged inlet for attachment
to the wet riser.
The valve shall be equipped with spindle not less than 22.2 m dia. and fitted
with a gunmetal hand wheel of about 90 mm. dia. marked with OPEN and
CLOSED directions. Opening shall be anti-clockwise.
The whole valve fittings shall be sound construction and hydraulically tested
to a pressure of 20.7 bar before being connected to the dry riser.
The valve shall be installed about 760 mm. above finished floor level. The
valve shall be finished with red colour paint.
Fire hose rack cabinet according to requirements of CDD, installed of staircase
entrance.
2.7 FIRE HYDRANTS
Pedestal fire hydrant shall be constructed of cast iron castings to BS. 1452
complete with 100 mm dia. flange inlet and two 65 mm dia. valves with
instantaneous outlets to BS.336 and with brass male couplings protected with cap
secured by a suitable length of chain.
The fire hydrant shall be sound construction and hydraulically tested to a pressure
of 20.7 bar before being connected to the fire fighting network.
The fire hydrant shall be installed about 760 mm above ground level and finished
with red colour paint.
The fire hydrant shall be provided with an isolating valve installed underground
complete with extension tube, operating key and cover.
A fire hose unit shall be installed to serve each fire hydrant, it shall comprise 65mm
dia. textile fire hose 30 m long with male and female couplings, nozzle jet and spray
with male coupling, and cabinet
2.06 SIAMESE CONNECTION
A Siamese connection assembly shall be installed for the use of Fire Brigade, as
shown o n the Drawings.
S. Siamese connection assembly shall be gunmetal with two inlets. Each inlet shall
consist of a 65 mm. instantaneous male coupling and a non-return valve and
protected with a cap secured by a suitable length of chain. The coupling shall
conform to B.S. 336.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
______________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Specialties
1303-4
C. Siamese connection assembly shall have 2-way inlet breeching and drain valve.
D. Siamese connection assembly shall have 100 mm. dia flanged outlet for
attachment to the dry riser or wet main.
E. Siamese connection assembly shall be finished with red colour paint.
F Siamese connection assembly shall be located 760 mm. above ground level.
2.07
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. All portable extinguishers shall have welded steel/light alloy shells with floor stand
(injection moulded plastic shells shall be considered for approval, when contents are
not stored under pressure - i.e. those with pressure cartridges) internal lining of
polypropylene or similar material and external enamel finish over rust proofing.
1. Color of finishing shall be coded as follows:
Carbon Dioxide
Black
Water
Red
Dry Powder
Blue
B. Operation instructions:
1 Operating and safety precautions in English and Arabic along with appropriate
graphics, shall be provided on all extinguishers.
2. All extinguishers shall have labels attached, which state the date of last
inspection, next due date and the name and address of the inspection agency.
C. Pressurized Water Extinguishers:
1. Pressurized water extinguishers shall be of 9 liters capacity with an effective jet
length of 10 meters.
2. The continuous duration of operation shall be not less than ninety (90) seconds.
The temperature rating shall be up to 60° C ambient.
3. The body shall be mild steel to BS 1449.
4. The neck ring shall be steel welded internally to the body.
5 The head cap shall be all metal with squeeze grip action with controlled
discharge facility.
6. The hose shall be terylene reinforced P.V.C. tubing and the hose nozzle shall
be moulded in high density polythene.
7. The gas cartridge shall be a standard fitting 55 gram plastic coated cartridge
and the gas cartridge piercing spindle shall be made from stainless steel.
8. The body shall contain a polythene lining to give complete protection against
corrosion.
D. Dry Powder Extinguishers:
1. Dry Powder Extinguishers shall contain 6.0 kg of type ABC (standard) dry
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
______________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Specialties
1303-5
powder pressurised with nitrogen or CO2. .
2. The container shall have a chrome-molybdenum steel or aluminium alloy
body tested at 25 bar.
E. CO2 Extinguishers:
1. CO2. Extinguishers shall consist of a 6 kg capacity extinguisher with a
chrome-molybdenum steel or aluminium alloy body tested at 250 bar.
2. The unit shall be complete with a 940 mm hose and snow horn.
2.08
FLOW SWITCHES
A. Provide vane type flow switches with volt free, normally open contacts rated for 5
amps at 240 volts A/C (max) and enclosure with tapped conduit entry.
B. The flow switch shall be adjustable, to give contact and signal at any water flow
equal to that of one sprinkler.
C. The electrical signal shall be transmitted and give alarm at the remote fire indicator
panel.
D. The unit shall be complete with pipe size saddle, clamp, sealing gasket etc.
2.09
AUTOMATIC AIR RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body with non-ferrous float and internal working parts.
B. Construction shall be take apart type for easy maintenance.
C. Outlet shall be tapped for connection to drain line.
2.10
PROTECTIVE WRAPPING
A. All fire protection pipework buried external to the building and embedded in the
concrete structure without sleeving shall be protected by wrapping with an
anticorrosion tape.
B. The tape shall be manually applied (50%) overlapping) after testing the piping for
water tightness.
C
2.11
The anticorrosion tape shall consist of a non woven fabric carrier free from
chemical impurities, fully impregnated and coated on both sides with a neutral
compound based on saturated petroleum hydrocarbons with inert siliceous
fillers.
SUPERVISORY SWITCH
A. Provide a supervisory Switch attached to each O. S. & Y indicated gate valve
scheduled under "Remote Fire Indicator Panel".
B. The supervisory switch shall signal valve tampering and an electrical signal shall
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
______________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Specialties
1303-6
be transmitted to give alarm at the remote fire indicator panel.
C. The switch shall consist of a single-pole, double throw switch with a roller type
switch actuator and a spring loaded plunger.
2.12
FLOW METER
A. Provide venturi type flow meter test pipes as indicated on Drawings.
B. The flow element shall be a venturi tube; fiberglass reinforced polyester
plastic body with stainless steel connections.
C. The flow indicator shall be well type mercury manometer suitable for the
closed valve pressure of the system.
D. Provide all necessary trimmings (i. e., over scale fluid check valve, three
way manifold, vent plugs, shut off valves, etc.).
E. Allow for at least five (5) diameters of straight pipe upstream and
downstream of the venturi tube flanges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01.
SPRINKLERS
A. Do not install sprinklers, until after the complete system has been flushed.
B. Do not install sprinklers which are contaminated with paints or similar
coatings, or that were once installed and removed for any reason and those
which were dropped or have visible physical damage.
C. Use only wrenches, supplied by the sprinkler manufacturer for installing the
sprinklers.
D. Use adjustable return drops with threaded fittings for installing sprinklers in
areas with false ceiling.
E. Do not exceed 30 cm length for standpipes or drop pipes for installing
sprinklers, where so required.
F. Install guards on sprinklers prone to mechanical damage.
G. Install sheet metal water shields on sprinklers located near electrical or
other equipment prone to damage from water.
H. Provide additional sprinklers at the underside of HVAC ducts wider than 80
cms.
I.
Spare Sprinkler Heads:
1. Provide a set of spare sprinkler heads in an approved steel cabinet with
hinged door and latch along with a sprinkler wrench.
2. Include spares for each type and rating installed.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
______________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Specialties
1303-7
3.
3.02.
3.03.
Finish cabinets in red enamel with white letters on door reading "Spare
Sprinkler Heads"; wall mount where directed by Architect.
SPRINKLER LINE TESTERS
A. Provide one for every distribution main in the sprinkler system, for testing
purposes, in accessible locations. Provide this fitting for the last sprinkler in
all the ranges, which are not drainable from the zone control valve.
SIAMESE CONNECTION PIPE
A. The Siamese pipe connection shall be connected to the fire protection piping
upstream of the alarm control valve
3.04.
FLOW SWITCHES
A. Install on sprinkler supply mains or cross mains covering areas requiring
separate indication of sprinkler operation and where indicated in drawings.
B. Coordinate with the electrical works and ensure their connection with the
building fire alarm system.
* END OF SECTION 1303 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
______________________________________________________________________
Fire Protection Specialties
1303-8
SECTION 1401
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE OF SECTION
A.
HVAC scope
B.
Basis of design
C.
Systems descriptions
1.02
HVAC SCOPE
A.
The Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning shall include the following systems
and all systems and components shown of the drawings and in the schedules.
B.
HVAC systems to all areas of the Residence.
C.
Complete ductwork installation.
D.
Complete chilled water installation, including the roof top chiller plant.
E.
Automatic Controls.
F.
Complete hot water heating system installation including boilers, pumps, pipes and
radiators.
G.
Chemical Water Treatment.
H.
Provision of all acoustic sound and vibration control system and employment of an
Acoustic Specialist.
I.
Complete setting to work, testing, regulating and commissioning of all systems.
J.
Production of all operating and maintenance manuals, record documentation, and
provision of an electronic software based planned preventative maintenance regime
complete with all initial data input.
K.
Training of Clients staff.
L.
Maintenance of the complete installation for the period as directed in the Contract
Documents.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
___________________________________________________________________________
Heating, Ventilation and
Conditioning
1401-1
1.03
A.
BASIS OF DESIGN
DESIGN CRITERIA USED FOR HVAC CALCULATIONS
1.
External ambient design conditions
Summer
36oC dry bulb
selections
36oC dry bulb
22oC wet bulb
0oC dry bulb
Summer Design Dry Bulb Temp. @ 2.5%
Summer Design Wet Bulb Temp. @ 2.5%
Winter design dry Bulb Temp. @ 1%
Site location:
2.
for
chillers
Palestine - HEBRON
Internal Conditions
The design room temperatures are in general: 23º C DB/17ºC WB for cooling;
and 21ºC for heating.
3.
Noise Criteria
Space
1.04
A.
NC Level
Offices
40
Shops
40
Multipurpose halls
40
Apartments
35
Lobby
40
Storage Area
45
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
General Description
The building is basically divided into individual zones, these zones shall be supplied
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
___________________________________________________________________________
Heating, Ventilation and
Conditioning
1401-2
using an air system includes, air handling units to serve the different zones.
Fan coil units will be provided to serve the required rooms as shown on the drawings.
Temperature shall be controlled by a temperature sensor suitably located in the return
duct; where full fresh air units are used, room thermostat will control the temperatures.
Cooled air shall be supplied to each room via ceiling mounted diffusers; the type of air
terminals shall be selected to suit the arrangement of interior design. Return air shall be
collected in the ceiling void and taken by a main return air duct connected to the air
handling unit mixing box.
B.
Toilets Ventilation
Individual extract air system shall be provided to serve the toilets, extract air from toilets
shall be ducted to a ceiling fan. Make up air shall be provided by transferring air through
door louvers or transfer grilles from adjacent spaces
C.
Noise and Vibration
The following measures shall be provided to control the noise and vibration generated
by the HVAC equipment within the allowable limits under noise criteria table 4.
D.
·
Sound attenuators shall be specified for the supply and return air ducts near the
air handling units.
·
Internal acoustic lining shall be specified for the supply and return air ducts near
the fan coil units.
·
Careful selection of air outlets.
·
HVAC equipment shall rest on concrete foundations of suitable mass.
·
Vibration isolators of ample deflection characteristics shall be specified between
the units and concrete foundation.
·
Flexible connectors shall be specified for duct connections to air handling units
and fan coil units.
·
Spring type isolators shall be specified for fan/motor frame and compressors.
Chiller Plant
A.
The building shall be served by air cooled water chillers located on the roof.
B.
Chilled water shall be circulated through the chillers via constant speed
circulating pumps.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
___________________________________________________________________________
Heating, Ventilation and
Conditioning
1401-3
C.
E.
Chillers shall all run in normal mode. .
Heating System
The heating system shall include, boilers, water distribution systems (pumps, pipes).
Low temperature water system shall be used to serve the whole building, the
allowable working pressure of the boilers shall not exceed 4 bar while the hot water
supply temperature shall not exceed 82º C and the temperature difference of supply
and return water shall not exceed 11º C.
End suction centrifugal pumps shall be used to circulate the water within the system. A
closed type expansion tank shall be provided to pressurize the system and provide make
up water to the network.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
___________________________________________________________________________
Heating, Ventilation and
Conditioning
1401-4
SECTION 1402
HVAC THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the standard
of workmanship to be used in the supply and application of thermal insulation for
HVAC items.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour, materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the supply and application of thermal insulation as
specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings.
B.
Coordination : The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the work
of all trades.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of thermal insulation
materials whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not
less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the application of thermal insulation
materials with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar
nature.
C.
No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework and ductwork services until the
installations have been inspected and approved by the Engineer and tested in accordance
with the relevant sections of this specification.
1.04
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The thermal insulation products and all associated materials shall comply with the latest
relevant British Standards in all respects.
B.
The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards associated
with thermal insulation products and associated material. However, the Contractor shall
ensure that all applicable British Standards are complied with whether listed here or not.
BS 476 Part 4: Non-combustibility Test for Materials.
BS 476 Part 7: Method for Classification of the Surface Spread of Flame of Products
BS 476 Part 20
Method for Determination of the Fire Resistance of Elements
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-1
Construction.
1.05
BS 1485:
Specification for Zinc Coated Hexagonal Steel Wire Netting.
BS 3958 Part 3:
Metal Mesh Faced Man-made Mineral Fibre Mattresses.
BS 3958 Part 4:
Bonded Preformed Man-made Mineral Fiber Pipe Sections.
BS 3958 Part 5:
Specification for Bonded Man-made Mineral Fiber Slabs.
BS 5422:
Specification for the use of Thermal Insulation Materials.
BS 5970:
Code of Practice for Thermal Insulation of Pipe work and
Equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Drawings refer to 1000
B.
Products: Full manufacturers data confirming type and composition of all products
including thermal characteristics.
C.
Samples - Section of insulated duct
- Section of insulated pipe
Both showing detail of resilient spacer at bracket location.
D.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
Samples of aluminum cladding to pipes and ducts-bends, tees, branches, valve boxes,
cut-outs for field located control devices to ensure acceptable workmanship standards.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Comply with 1000
WARRANTY
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
To comply with the specifications.
2.02
GENERAL
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-2
A.
For general applications the thermal insulation materials shall be made from materials
which will not burn, but materials which are not entirely non-combustible may be
accepted if they have self-extinguishing characteristics, the total mass of combustible
materials is small and combustion does not produce dense smoke or toxic fumes. All
material finishes shall conform to spread of flame classification class O. Such materials
shall only be used with the prior permission of the Engineer.
B.
Insulation shall be rot proof, odorless, non-hydroscopic, shall not sustain vermin and
shall not contribute to metal corrosion. Any finishes (or coverings) used shall not
deteriorate with age or the effects of solar heat.
C.
Thermal insulation materials and their finishes shall be asbestos free and be suitable for
continuous use throughout the range of operating temperatures and within the
environment indicated.
D.
All insulating materials and associated products, sealants, tapes, adhesives, securing
bands and protective cladding shall be as specified or equal and approved.
2.03
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
Thermal insulation of rectangular ductwork inside building shall blanket type glass fibre
consisting of long fine fibres (free from short and coarse fibres) bonded with a
temperature resistant resin. The density shall be a minimum of 24 Kg/m3. Where
ductwork is installed outdoor exposed to a troposphere, thermal insulation shall be rigid
glass fibre of 48 Kg/m3 density.
B.
Thermal insulation of circular ductwork shall be flexible mineral fibre material
consisting of long fine fibres (free from short and coarse fibres) made up in mat form.
The density shall be a minimum of 32 Kg/m3.
C.
Thermal insulation on ductwork etc. inside buildings generally shall be at least 25mm
thick where its declared value of thermal conductivity at the relevant temperature is
equal to or less than 0.04 W/m deg. C or at least 38mm thick where the declared value
of thermal conductivity is between 0.04 and 0.06 W/m deg. C. In the open air, in plant
rooms and in large unconditioned open areas of buildings, the thermal insulation shall be
at least 50mm thick where the thermal conductivity is less than or equal to 0.04 W/m
deg. C or at least 63mm thick where the thermal conductivity is between 0.04 and 0.06
W/m deg. C.
For ductwork carrying chilled air, the insulation shall cover the flanges either by means
of flange boxes or by increasing the general thickness of insulation to give at least 6mm
covers at the flanges.
D.
All ductwork thermal insulation shall be complete with a reinforced aluminium foil
applied to one side during the manufacturing process.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-3
E.
Where integral or surface reinforcement is called for, or required in connection with
insulation materials, it shall be one or other of the following:
i. Galvanized wire netting of not less than 0.914mm. diameter and 22mm mesh size.
ii.
Galvanized wire, either 0.914mm diameter spirally wound at approximately
75mm pitch or 1.219mm diameter when used in single strands at right angles to
the axis of duct (or pipe).
iii.
Aluminium bands 20mm wide by 0.51mm thick, with galvanized wire end
loops.
iv.
Aluminium or galvanized steel edge reinforcement strips secured to the
insulation with adhesive.
F.
Where there is a requirement to prevent noise transmission through the walls of the
ductwork, either in the form of noise breakout prior to an attenuator, noise break-in on
the attenuated side, acoustic insulation shall be applied to the external surface of the
ductwork to the Acoustic Specialists requirements. The acoustic insulation shall be of an
approved noise control barrier with a minimum density of 50 Kg/m3. The acoustic
insulation shall be at least 50mm thick and the thermal conductivity less than or equal to
0.04 W/m oC.
2.04
PLANT AND PIPEWORK INSULATION
A.
Thermal insulation shall be pre-formed rigid sections or slabs, the basic material
consisting of the following:
*
Glass fibre (density 110-160 Kg/m3).
*
Thermal conductivity 0.040 w/m deg C.
The insulation shall be manufactured from long stranded mineral fibres, resin bonded to
form sections having uniform density and high compressibility. The preformed rigid
insulation outside surface shall be smooth, unbroken, uniform, concentric and firm.
B.
Pipework insulation shall be high density rigid resin bonded preformed glass fibre
sections of the thickness specified. The insulation shall comprise of two half sections
with a factory applied reinforced aluminium foil covering hinging the two half mating
sections for ease of installation. The covering shall have a 50mm side overlap of
reinforced aluminium foil to enable the outside surface to be completely sealed.
C.
Where thermal insulation of plant is required the insulation shall be preformed rigid
sections or slab. The material shall consist of long fine fibres (free from short and coarse
fibres) bonded with a temperature resistant resin. The density shall be a minimum of 48
Kg/m3 and the surface shall have a factory applied reinforced aluminium foil finish.
D.
Thickness of insulation shall be determined in accordance with the following tables for
the appropriate medium and the declared value of thermal conductivity of the insulation
material at the relevant temperature.
When selecting the insulation thermal conductivity, the space available for the
installation shall be thoroughly examined to ensure that the resultant thickness can be
accommodated.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-4
TABLE 1
THICKNESS OF INSULATION FOR CHILLED WATER AND CONDENSATE
DRAINAGE PIPEWORK
______________________________________________________________________
____
DECLARED THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY W/m deg. C
______________________________________________________________________
PIPEWORK WITHIN CONDITIONED SPACES
SIZE OF TUBE (mm)
UP TO 0.040 W/m deg C
Minimum Thickness of Insulation (mm)
______________________________________________________________________
9 to 20
25 to 50
65 to 300
Flat Surfaces
32
38
50
50
TABLE 2
THICKNESS OF INSULATION FOR CHILLED WATER AND CONDENSATE
DRAINAGE PIPEWORK
______________________________________________________________________
DECLARED THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY W/m dig’s
______________________________________________________________________
PIPEWORK WITHIN UNCONDITIONED SPACES, PLANT ROOMS AND OPEN
AIR
SIZE OF TUBE (mm)
UP TO 0.040 W/m deg. C
Minimum Thickness of Insulation (mm)
______________________________________________________________________
9 to 20
25 to 50
65 to 100
125 to 300
Flat Surfaces
38
50
63
75
50
2.05REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK INSULATION
A.
Thermal insulation shall be preformed un-slit foamed Class 1 plastic material to suit the
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-5
size of the pipe. The vapour barrier shall be an integral part of the material. The
insulation shall have a thermal conductivity of 0.0375 W/moC and shall be satisfactory
for a temperature range of 0oC to 104oC without deformation or deterioration. The
minimum thickness of the insulation shall be 25mm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
STORAGE
A.
All thermal insulation materials shall be stored in their original packaging in such a
manner as to prevent the ingress of dust or moisture. The height of the packages shall be
restricted to prevent any deformation of preformed rigid sections.
B.
Flat sheet and rolled metal materials used for protective claddings shall be stored away
from the ground surface, adequately covered and protected in a manner to prevent
damage to the materials.
C.
All storage areas shall have adequate lighting to allow for the inspection of all materials.
D.
Refer to Division (1)
3.02
A.
3.03
FIXINGS
All mechanical fixings (rivets, screws) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of
the material being fixed. All mechanical fixings, sealants, tapes and adhesives shall be
entirely suitable for the medium that they are being applied to and the application shall
be fully in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
Thermal insulation to ductwork shall be carried out neatly and to a high-grade quality by
skilled workers experienced in the trade, and strictly in accordance with this
Specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to any ductwork prior to
completion of any air leakage testing required and only then after a full inspection and
approval by the Engineer.
B.
Thermal insulation shall be applied to all supply and return ductwork carrying
conditioned air through unconditioned areas including plant rooms. Thermal insulation
shall not be installed on the sections of return air ductwork covered with fire resistant
cladding.
Supply ductwork carrying conditioned air through conditioned areas shall be insulated,
whereas return ductwork passing through conditioned areas shall not be insulated unless
otherwise stated.
All ductwork exposed to the atmosphere shall be insulated. All ductwork in plant rooms
shall be insulated except return ductwork covered with fire resistant cladding.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-6
C.
All rectangular ductwork shall be insulated with rigid slab, cut to fit so that the top and
bottom pieces overlap the sides, bonded to the ductwork with adhesive applied in
100mm bands at 300mm intervals. On ductwork where the width exceeds 900mm,
stickpins shall be used on the underside and sides to prevent any excessive sagging.
D.
All circular ductwork shall be insulated with mineral fibre mat bonded to the ductwork
with adhesive applied in 100 mm bands at 300 mm intervals.
E.
All joints in the thermal insulation shall be fully sealed to maintain a continuous vapour
barrier throughout by the use of 75 mm wide aluminium tape.
F.
Load bearing inserts of hardwood complete with factory applied vapour seal shall be
used at support positions. The inserts shall be of the same thickness as the insulating
material and cut such that 50 mm protrudes either side of the support. The rigid slab
shall be butt jointed to the insert and the joint fully sealed with 75 mm wide aluminium
tape to maintain the vapour seal. The vapour seal shall not be pierced or fouled by the
supports, and shall be continuous.
G.
All insulation on ductwork carrying conditioned air shall have a continuous vapour seal.
H.
The insulation on ductwork exposed to view and within plant rooms shall be clad totally
in an aluminium stucco finish cladding 0.8mm thick with folded and cleared joints and
corners and held in place by means of rivets. Self-tapping screws shall not be used. All
joints shall be sealed with a non-setting sealing compound.
J.
All ductwork exposed to the outside atmosphere shall be insulated and clad as for plant
rooms.
K.
Where ductwork passes through masonry walls, floors and roofs a sheet metal sleeve
shall be installed and the gap, equal to the insulation thickness, shall be packed with a
load-bearing insert with integral vapour seal. The thermal insulation shall be butt jointed
to the insert and the joint sealed by the use of 75 mm wide aluminium tape. All openings
through external walls and roofs shall be fitted with a flashing fixed to ensure water will
not enter the insulated space between the ductwork and the cladding.
L.
Where the insulation is 50 mm thick or more (except for insulation which is sprayed or
molded in site) the insulation shall be fixed in two layers with joints staggered. For air
heaters using media at high temperature the thermal insulation material shall be suitable
for use at those temperatures.
M.
All joints, surfaces, edges and overlaps shall be neatly finished and where possible
overlaps shall be arranged on the `blind' side. Overlaps shall be even and parallel to the
circumferential and longitudinal joints. Insulation shall be neatly shaped around flanged
joints; access openings etc., irregular joints, surfaces, edges and the Engineer in any
circumstances will not accept overlaps.
Until final acceptance of the installation by the Engineer, the Contractor shall make
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-7
good any damage to insulation at his own expense, so that the installation is handed over
in a perfect conditioned.
N.
3.04
All attenuators and diffuser plenums shall be insulated and vapour sealed to the same
specification as the ductwork connecting to them.
PLANT AND PIPEWORK INSULATION
A.
Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in
accordance with this Specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework
prior to witnessing of the pipework pressure test and only then after a full inspection and
approval by the Engineer.
B.
Thermal insulation shall be applied to the following: (i)
All pipework carrying chilled fluids in circulation including flanges and bodies
of valves on all sizes of pipework.
(ii)
External distributing mains and fittings above ground and in ducts, chases and
trenches including all valve bodies and flanges.
(iii)
Feed and expansion vessels and vent pipework in roof spaces and elsewhere, as
indicated, to prevent the shedding of condensation.
(iv)
Buried pipework shall have special forms of insulation as indicated.
(vi)
All chilled water pipework (including valve bodies, specialties and flanges) shall
be insulated.
(vii) All condensate drainage pipework to prevent shedding of condensation.
Insulation shall fit closely on pipework and other surfaces without gaps between.
C.
All sections of the insulation shall be of the correct size and made for the type and grade
of piping to which it is fitted and shall form a tight fit on the pipework after application
of adhesive and lapping. Bends shall be formed by cutting a series of gussets in the preformed sections to form a continuous finish with the pipework. The valve bodies and
flanges in plant rooms and those components within the entire pipework system 65mm
dia and above shall be insulated with the same insulation as the accompanying pipework
but contained within a removable aluminium box. Where a vapour seal is incorporated
into the insulation, all joints shall be effectively sealed with approved sealing material
and securely fixed.
D.
Load bearing inserts of hardwood complete with a factory applied vapour seal shall be
used at support positions on chilled water pipework. The insert shall be of the same
thickness as the insulating material and cut such that 50 mm protrudes either side of the
support. The pre-formed insulation section shall be butt jointed to the insert and the joint
fully sealed with 75 mm wide aluminium tape to maintain the vapour seal.
At flanges, expansion joints and anchor points, particular attention shall be paid to
sealing the insulation against water vapour ingress.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-8
E.
Each pre-formed rigid insulation section shall be butt jointed to the next, the point being
fully sealed with 75 mm wide aluminium tape. The preformed sections on domestic hot
and cold-water services shall be secured hard to the bracket where inserts are not used.
The reinforced aluminium side overlap shall be sealed with a suitable adhesive or 75
mm wide aluminium tape. Outer coverings shall not come into contact with pipework
and attachments.
F.
Each section of pre-formed insulation shall be secured to the pipe by one of the
following means:
*
Circumferential tie wires each formed from three turns of wire not less than 1
mm thick, spaced not more than 450 mm apart.
*
Circumferential bands of non-ferrous metal, plastic fibre or adhesive sheet.
*
Rigid insulation applied to cylinders and flat surfaces shall be secured with nonferrous metal or plastic fixings.
G.
The insulation on pipework concealed from view within buildings will not require
further protective cladding.
H.
Insulation on pipework exposed to view and within plant rooms and external to the
building shall be clad fully in a pre-formed aluminium stucco finish cladding 0.8 mm
thick held in place by means of rivets or self tapping screws. All joints shall be sealed
with a non-setting sealing compound. The Contractor shall take extreme care to ensure
that the application of the metal cladding does not destroy the continuity of the vapour
barrier.
I.
Valves, flanges and specialties shall be fitted with insulated removable boxes formed in
0.8mm thick aluminium stucco cladding. Boxes shall be in two sections hinged and
secured by lift-lock latches.
J.
At all instrument points or tapings on pipework or ductwork the insulation shall be cut
away and the edges neatly finished and sealed with the aluminum cladding as for
adjacent finishes allowing access for the instrument.
3.05
REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK INSULATION
A.
The suction line from the evaporator to the compressor shall be insulated with foamed
plastic as specified previously and shall be protected by a vapour barrier which shall not
be broken between joints of sectional material or at discontinuities of valves or brackets.
B.
Where possible the insulation shall be sleeved on the pipes before they are fitted. At all
junctions, elbows, valves, and the like, it shall be carefully cut and fitted to the method
recommended by the manufacturer.
C.
All open edges, joints and the like, shall be sealed with an adhesive as recommended by
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-9
the insulation manufacturer.
3.06
A.
PROTECTION
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect the works during
construction. Any damaged sections of insulation shall be completely cut out and
replaced with a new section. The vapour seal shall be repaired to ensure continuity.
All damaged sections shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense until the system is
accepted and finally handed over.
* END OF SECTION 1402 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________
HVAC Thermal Insulation
1402-10
SECTION 1403
DUCTWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the
standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Metal Ductwork.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour, materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the supply and installation of metal and plastic
ductwork as specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings.
B.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the
work of all trades.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the factory fabrication of Metal and
Plastic Ductwork whose products have been in satisfactory use in a similar application
for not less than 10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Metal and
Plastic Ductwork with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of
a similar nature.
1.04
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The Metal and Plastic Ductwork and all associated materials and workmanship shall
comply fully with the latest relevant standards in all respects.
B.
The following are the most commonly used and relevant British, American and other
Standards for Metal Ductwork and associated materials. However, the Contractor
shall ensure that all applicable standards are complied with whether listed here or not.
1.
Specification for sheet metal ductwork No. DW 142 and Addendum "A" 1988
for low, medium and high pressure / velocity air systems published by
Heating, Ventilating Contractors Association (HVCA) UK.
2.
A practical guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing DW/143 published by HVCA
UK.
3.
Specification for Plastic Ductwork DW/91.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Ductwork
1403-1
1.05
4.
Guide to Good Practice – Internal Cleanliness of New Ductwork Installation.
5.
The SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association, Inc.) duct manual and sheet metal construction for ventilating and
air conditioning systems
6.
Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, 5th ed. (SMACNA).
7.
Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. (SMACNA)
8.
The ASHRAE handbook published by the American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc. - Duct Construction
9.
ASTM Standard A525 : Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel Sheets
10.
Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
(National Fire Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA 90A-93).
11.
Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
(National Fire Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA 90A-93).
12.
Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems (National Fire Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA 90B-93).
13.
Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock
and Vapor Removal or Conveying (National Fire Protection Association,
ANSI/NFPA 91-92).
14.
Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and
Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment. (National Fire
Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA 96-94).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Drawings refer to 1000
B.
Calculations - refer to 1000
Fan static head calculations shall be submitted to the engineer for approval based on
Contractor ductwork working drawings.
C.
Products - Typical duct section and fittings to demonstrate integrity of construction.
D.
Full details of air test procedures.
1.06
A.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Comply with 1000
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Ductwork
1403-2
1.07
A.
WARRANTY .
Provide warranty in accordance with the contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
All figure numbers referred to throughout this ductwork specification relate to those
contained in DW 142.
B.
All ductwork shall be manufactured from hot-dip galvanised steel sheets to BS 2989
grade Z2 coating type or equal in accordance with DW 142 specification for low,
medium and high pressure / velocity air systems.
C.
Ductwork shall be manufactured to the sizes detailed on the drawings, however where
ductwork is to be internally lined the ductwork size shall be increased to compensate
for the lining thickness.
D.
The interior surfaces of all ductwork shall be smooth. No sheet metal parts, tabs,
angles, or similar shall project into the air stream for any reason unless specified to do
so. All seams and joints shall be external.
E.
The minimum nominal sheet thickness for any ductwork shall be 0.8 mm for internal
systems with the longer duct size up to 1000mm. Where the longer duct size exceeds
1000 mm the nominal sheet thickness shall be 1.0 mm.
F.
The Contractor shall ensure that the choice of gauge thickness for ductwork and the
stiffening provision is such that the ductwork installation does not drum or vibrate.
Single stiffeners shall be used as illustrated in figures 44-49 inclusive of DW 142.
G.
Ductwork performance standards shall be as follows:-
Ductwork system
Pressure/Velocity
classification
Air Leakage
Air conditioning supply air Low
duct
Class "B"
Air conditioning return air Low
duct
Class "B"
Toilet extract ventilation
ductwork
Class "B"
Low
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Ductwork
1403-3
H.
All ductwork operating at pressures classified as "Low" and "Medium" pressure in the
table above shall be tested to establish conformity with leakage limits set out in DW
142 and in accordance with procedures described in DW 143.
Additionally samples of straight duct beads and tees on low, medium and high
velocity ductwork systems should be selected and pressure tested during erection to
demonstrate the adequacy of jointing methods.
I.
All jointing and construction methods shall be approved by the Engineer.
J.
Approved sealant shall be used on all ductwork longitudinal seams. The sealant can
be included in the seam during manufacture and applied as an edge sealant.
K.
Button punch snap lock longitudinal joints shall not be used.
L.
Particular attention shall be given to ensuring that cross jointing methods are suitable
for the specified pressure rating. Cross joints shall generally be flanged and corner
treatment shall be such that corners pull-up true and square and do not leak. An
approved liquid or mastic sealant shall be used on all cross joints.
M.
Longitudinal joints on rectangular ductwork shall be seamed as illustrated in Figures
1-4 inclusive DW 142.
Seams illustrated in figures 5, 6 and 7 shall not be used.
N.
Aerofoil section turning varies shall be used on all 90° square bends. Turning vanes
shall be securely attached at each end either to the duct or to internal runners and the
runners fastened to the duct by mechanically-closed rivets or bolts at 90mm maximum
spacing. Turning vanes in twin bends in which the widths of the straight section and
branch differ shall be set so that the leading and the trailing edges of the turning vanes
are parallel to the duct axis.
O.
Change shapes that maintain the cross-sectional area shall have sides where the slope
does not exceed 22.5o on any side. Should it be necessary to reduce the cross
sectional area the slope shall not exceed 9o on any side and the reduction in area shall
not exceed 20%. In this instance the approval of the Engineer shall be sought prior to
manufacture.
P.
The slope of expansions and contractions shall not exceed 22.5o on any side unless it
is unavoidable, in which case splitters shall be provided to bisect the angle between
the sloping side and the centre line of the duct.
Ductwork connections to plant and equipment (eg. cooling coils,) shall, in the case of
bolted flanges, be provided with matching flanges of similar size and thickness. Sheet
metal returned flanges shall not be permitted.
Q.
R.
Construction requirements for circular ducts shall be in accordance with DW 142 and
DW 91. Circular plastic shall be used for fume cupboard and microbiological safety
cabinets.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Ductwork
1403-4
The grooved seam of spiral seamed ducts shall be tightly formed to produce a rigid
duct and as such shall be accepted as an airtight joint without the use of sealant. The
longitudinal seam for straight seamed ducts shall be a grooved seam continued to the
extreme end of the duct and sealed during manufacture. Plastic ducts shall be solvent
welded throughout the whole length of the system with bolted flanges to equipment
for disconnection.
S.
The ductwork sizes indicated on the drawings are nominal, therefore for socket and
spigot joints the actual dimensions of ductwork and fittings shall be correctly related
so that when installed the joint shall be effectively sealed.
T.
Bends shall be either segmented with swaged ends, or in the case of ductwork 400mm
diameter and below, pressed bends of the long radiussed type shall be acceptable.
U.
Tapers of the concentric type shall be manufactured with an angle not exceeding 9o.
Tapers of the eccentric type shall have angles not exceeding 30o.
V.
Hangers and supports for ductwork systems shall generally comply with DW 142 Part
6. Primary fixings into the building structure shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer.
W.
Ductwork hangers and supports shall be adjustable for height, spaced to ensure
adequate support and where practicable, fitted at each ductwork joint or spaced at not
more than the maximum centres in Tables 24, 25 and 26 for rectangular, circular and
flat oval horizontal ducting. Securing of formed brackets to corners of ductwork as a
means of suspension shall not be permitted.
X.
Supports for vertical ductwork in buildings shall be generally located at each floor
slab but subject to a maximum spacing of 4 metres.
Y.
All ductwork shall be securely supported from the building structure but inert packing
material shall be provided between ducts and supports to prevent direct contact of the
ducting with the structure.
Z.
Thermal insulators shall be installed between sheet metal ductwork carrying
conditioned air and the support steelwork as described in this specification and as
shown on the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
STORAGE
Ductwork shall be either stored on purpose made racks of welded construction, or in a
dry open area stored clear of the ground.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Ductwork
1403-5
B.
All open ends of ductwork shall be sealed with polythene sheeting to prevent the
ingress of dirt.
C.
Small ductwork sections shall not be stored within larger sections except in the case
of circular ducts.
D.
Ductwork shall not be stacked in a manner that will result in damage to or
deformation of the sections will occur.
E.
All ductwork shall be stored with an identification label indicating the piece number,
size and location in which it is to be installed.
F.
Comply with Division (1)
3.02
FIXINGS
A.
Mechanically closed rivets shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations with regard to use, size and clearance drill size.
B.
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be used for flanged sections of ductwork and shall be of
mild steel protected by electro galvanizing, cadmium plating or a similar approved
finish.
C.
Self tapping screws shall only be used subject to the approval of the Engineer, in
instances where other types of fixing is not practical.
D.
Welding shall not be permitted on galvanized sheet steel materials.
3.03
GENERAL INSTALLATION
A.
Ductwork shall be installed generally as indicated on the drawings subject to full
coordination and fully in accordance with the HVCA DW 142 manual referred to in
Part 2.0 and HVCA DW 91.
B.
Where sets and final plant connections are required site measurements shall be taken
to establish dimensions prior to manufacture.
C.
All ductwork joints shall be fitted with the recommended minimum number of
fixings, cleats or clamps. Sealants shall be used at all joints.
D.
E.
Branches shall be installed off straight sections of ductwork and not off taper sections.
Ductwork expansions shall be made upstream of a branch connection and
contractions downstream of a branch connection.
F.
Concentric tapers on circular ductwork shall be used in preference to eccentric tapers.
The latter shall be used only where it is necessary to offset the ductwork centre line.
G.
Particular regard must be paid to the preventation of duct movement, with consequent
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Ductwork
1403-6
noise, potential leakage and strain upon flexible connections.
H.
Attention shall be given to the installation of long runs of air ducts to the direction of
expansion or contraction movement due to thermal change, towards flexible inserts
provided for the purpose of absorbing such movement.
I
Test holes shall be provided in all main ducts and branches floor airflow measuring.
Test holes shall be neatly formed and fitted with removable type airtight plastic plugs.
J.
Care shall be exercised to ensure that no edges protrude into the airways, and that all
spigots (especially on high velocity systems) are well matched so that a smooth
airflow is achieved throughout the length of the ducting. Any section of ductwork
causing noise due to poor construction shall be removed and reinstated at the
Contractor's expense.
K.
Due consideration shall be given to the space required for all other services and
allowance made for the thickness of thermal insulation.
L.
Air-leakage testing shall be carried out progressively, to the requirements for the
particular pressure classification of the system in accordance with DW/142
Appendices A + B.
M.
All testing, balancing and commissioning shall be in accordance with the relevant
section of this specification (section 9996).
* END OF SECTION 1403 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Ductwork
1403-7
SECTION 1404
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This Technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the
standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Ductwork
Accessories.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour, materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the supply and installation of Ductwork Accessories as
specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings.
B.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the
work of all trades.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Ductwork Accessories
whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not less than
10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Ductwork
Accessories with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of
similar nature.
1.04
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
The Ductwork Accessories and all associated materials and workmanship shall
comply fully with the latest relevant British Standards HVCA DW/142 specification
for sheet metal ductwork and other applicable codes and standards in all respects.
B.
The following are the most commonly used relevant British Standards and other
applicable codes and standards associated with Ductwork Accessories and associated
materials. However, the Contractor shall ensure that all applicable standards are
complied with whether listed here or not.
BS 476
(Part 7)
-
Method for Classification of the Surface Spread of Flame of
Products.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-1
1.05
BS 476
(Part 8)
-
BS 6821
-
BS 8233
-
Test Methods and Criteria for the Fire Resistance of Elements
of Building Construction.
Methods for Aerodynamic Testing of Dampers and Valves.
Code of Practice for Sound Insulation and Noise Reduction for
Buildings.
HVCA DW142 -
Specification for sheet metal ductwork.
HVCA DW 91 -
Specification for plastic ductwork.
CP 413
-
Code of Practice for Ducts for Building Services.
NFPA 90A
-
National Fire Protection Association - Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
SMACNA
-
All related codes and publications.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Drawings refer to 1000
B.
Products: Samples of access doors, volume control dampers, fire dampers, attenuators,
flexible connections sealants to be submitted for approval.
C.
Calculations demonstrating attenuator performance and selection.
D.
Manufacturers data for every component to be submitted for approval.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Comply with 1000
WARRANTY
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
All dampers shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent fluttering. Unless otherwise
indicated the air leakage past dampers in the fully closed position shall not exceed 5%
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-2
B.
C.
of the maximum design air flow in the duct.
All duct volume control dampers shall be fitted with locking devices and position
indicators.
Manual and motorised dampers shall be provided for the proper balancing control and
isolation of the ductwork system.
These shall be of the multi-leaf opposed blade type each damper comprising narrow
width low profile aerofoil blades.
D.
Each leaf of a multi leaf damper shall comprise of a low profile aspect ratio aerofoil
galvanised steel blade. The blades shall be provided with a totally enclosed galvanised
steel reinforced locking rod. Each blade shall be connected to low pressure angle
toothed gears in galvanised steel with brass bearings. The gear drive assembly shall be
positioned totally out of the air stream in a totally enclosed galvanised steel dustproof
control box which shall be externally mounted. The frame shall comprise of a
galvanised steel formed inner frame and a roll-formed zintec steel outer frame having
integral flanges, pre-punched with elongated holes for connection to the adjoining
ductwork.
Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die-cast aluminium with the words
`OPEN' and `SHUT' cast on the quadrant. Quadrants shall be securely fixed and the
damper spindles shall be close fitting in the quadrant hubs to prevent any damper
movement when the damper levers are locked.
E.
2.02
Motorised control dampers shall be incorporated into air handling units where
practicable. The selection of motorised control dampers shall be made by the controls
specialist.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Fire dampers shall conform in their entirety with NFPA 90A and shall meet the fire
damper standard detailed in the manual of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors, National Association Inc. (SMACNA).
B.
Each fire damper shall have at least the same standard of fire resistance as the wall or
floor through which the duct passes or where applicable, the fire rating of fire-clad
ductwork abutting it. Unless otherwise indicated it shall have a fire resistance rating
of 2 hours. When a fire resistance rating of 4 hours is required either 2 dampers,
mechanically connected or a single damper having a fire resistance rating of 4 hours
shall be provided.
All dampers except where indicated for solenoid and motorised actuation shall have
the blades housed in an enclosure located out of the air stream cross section.
Connection shall suit the particular duct size with spigot or flanged ends as
determined by the operating pressure/velocity and physical dimensions of the
associated system ducting.
C.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-3
D.
E.
Provide fire dampers of 16 gauge stainless steel with 100% interlocking joints to form
a continuous steel curtain when closed.
The damper shall be housed in a corrosion-resistant casing constructed to avoid
distortion due to stress in fire conditions. Provision shall be made to accommodate
expansion of the damper blades within the casing in fire conditions. A fire damper
shall also incorporate provision for expansion in the form of an installation frame
within the surrounding structure together with lugs for building into the structure.
F.
Provide out of the air stream positive closure stainless steel constant tension springs
on all fire dampers.
G.
Each fire damper casing shall be clearly marked with a permanent indication of the
correct fixing attitude of dampers, the direction of air flow and the side at which the
access/maintenance opening shall be located.
H.
Each fire damper shall be held in the open position by a releasing device consisting of
a fusible link and either a stranded wire or a steel strap. Alternatively the damper
blade may be released by a fusible phial in a cartridge housing. The fusible element
shall operate at 70oC.
I.
Fire dampers which are solenoid or motorised operated shall be of the stainless steel
interlocking aerofoil blade pivot type complete with continuous twin trailing edge
double metal seal located in the air stream. The blades shall be interlinked and the
mechanism shall be arranged to enable solenoid operation for instantaneous closure
and or motor operation for opening or closure as required. The dampers shall be
activated by the fire detection system.
J.
For dampers with blades out of the air stream, the resistance to air flow shall not
exceed 5Pa. For the aerofoil blade pivot type, the resistance to air flow shall not
exceed 5Pa.
K.
Fire dampers which are solenoid or motorised shall be activated and reset by the fire
control panel.
L.
Fire dampers shall subject to the approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
M.
Smoke dampers shall be manufactured in stainless steel, with aerofoil type blades
permanently in the air stream. A control assembly shall be mounted on the extended
section of the smoke damper. This control assembly shall house the spring release
mechanism and motor drive for shutting and opening the smoke damper.
2.03
A.
ACCESS DOORS
All access openings shall be rigidly framed, with airtight covers designed so that they
can be speedily removed and refixed. Multiple set screws and self-tapping screws are
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-4
B.
not acceptable, as a method of fixing.
Covers shall be pre-insulated "sandwiched" construction to match thermal/vapour seal
performance of surrounding ductwork insulation.
C.
Subject to the restrictions imposed by duct dimensions, openings for access should not
be smaller than 375 x 300mm or larger than 450 x 375mm, and openings for
inspection should have a minimum diameter of 100mm.
D.
Where ducts are to be thermally insulated the frame of the access door or cover shall
be extended beyond the face of the duct by a measurement equal to the thickness of
the insulation and be so arranged that the insulation and finish can be "dressed" into
the frame, thereby ensuring that the opening is not concealed and the edges of the
insulation are protected from accidental damage.
2.04
DUCTWORK ATTENUATORS
A.
Rectangular duct attenuators shall have their outer casing manufactured from
galvanised sheet metal of not less than 20 gauge with all joints lock formed and
mastic sealed. All attenuators shall have galvanised angle flanges at each end, being
secured to the casing by sealed bolts or spot welding. Attenuators measuring up to
1200mm x 1200mm shall be fitted with galvanised angle flanges 40mm x 40mm x
5mm. Attenuators with one side in excess of 1200mm shall be fitted with galvanised
single flanges 50mm x 50mm x 10mm. All galvanised angle flanges shall be drilled
with a slotted hole 12mm wide.
B.
All acoustic splitters shall comprise inert, non-combustible non-hygroscopic and
vermin proof mineral wool packed to a density of not less than 50 Kg/m3. Each
splitted infill shall be protected by a glass cloth to prevent particle migration and
finally covered with galvanised steel, perforated and fitted with light aero dynamically
shaped leading and trailing edges. Square ends shall not be acceptable. The perforated
galvanised sheet steel shall not be less than 26 gauge. In the case of attenuators for use
in ductwork for clinical areas, a protective, hygienic lining suitable for sterilisation by
air borne treatments shall be used.
C.
Circular attenuators shall be manufactured to the same standards as rectangular
attenuators and diameters of 1.5m shall not be exceeded. Each circular silencer shall
include an acoustic infill aero dynamically shaped centre pod. The pod shall be
treated in the same manner as all other acoustic infill, i.e. protected by a layer of glass
cloth to prevent particle migration and covered with 26 gauge galvanised mild steel
perforated sheet.
D.
All attenuator performance shall be determined in a duct to reverberant room test
facility which provides for air flow through the attenuators. The tests procedures shall
eliminate end reflection, directivity , flanking transmission, standing waves and test
chamber sound absorption. The attenuator performance shall be tabled indicating
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-5
dynamic insertion loss and self noise levels at various case velocities for air flow in
both directions.
E.
The static pressure loss from each attenuator shall not exceed 60Pa.
F.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the attenuator selection data
indicating the calculated required insertion loss together with the performance of the
selected attenuator. The approved attenuator shall be incorporated onto the working
drawings prior to submittal for approval.
2.05
FLEXIBLE JOINTS
A.
The material for flexible joints shall have good acoustic absorption performance and
shall satisfy the conditions of temperature, air pressure and fire resistance specified,
and shall comply with the standard of airtightness specified for the rest of the
ductwork system of which it forms part.
B.
Flexible joints shall be kept as short as practicable above a minimum effective length
of 50mm. In no case shall the flexible joint exceed 250mm in length.
C.
The flexible materials flange shall be backed by an angle or flat iron flange and the
flexible joint shall be securely held between the metal flanges.
D.
Flexible joints shall be made from, or protected by, material having a fire penetration
time of at least fifteen minutes, when tested in accordance with BS 476, Part 8. The
material shall be of the glass fibre cloth type.
2.06
A.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
The flexible duct shall have a liner and a cover of tough tear-resistant fabric equal in
durability and flexibility to glass fibre fabric and shall be impregnated and coated with
plastic. It shall be reinforced with a bonded galvanised spring steel wire helix
between the liner and the cover and an outer helix of glass fibre cord or equal shall be
bonded to the cover to ensure regular convolutions.
Alternatively, the flexible duct shall consist of a flexible corrugated metal tubing of
stainless steel, aluminium, tinplated steel or aluminium coated steel. The metal may
be lined on the inside or the outside or both with plastic material.
B.
The frictional resistance to air flow per unit length of the flexible duct shall not
exceed 50% more than the frictional resistance per unit length of galvanised steel
ducts of equivalent diameter.
C.
The leakage from any section of flexible duct shall not exceed 1% of the design air
flow rate at the static operating pressure.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-6
D.
Flexible ducts shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of -18oC to 120oC
and the pressure range of the system. Flexible duct shall comply with BS 476 Part 7
(Class 1 : Surface of very low flame spread).
E.
F.
Flexible ducts of more than 0.5 metre length shall not be permitted.
Flexible ducts shall be either pre-insulated at the works, or alternatively insulated as
for circular supply ducts.
2.07
SEALANTS, GASKETS AND TAPES
A.
All materials including liquid and mastic sealants shall, when used in connection with
ductwork jointing, permanently retain adhesion and elasticity through a temperature
range of 0oC to 70oC and pressure range applicable to the system.
B.
Gaskets shall be of a pre-formed roll, sheet or strip. Gaskets shall not be less than
3mm thick for rectangular ducts up to 900mm (longest side) or circular ducts up to
1250mm diameter. For larger ducts, the gaskets shall not be less than 4mm thick.
2.09 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX (VAV) (NOT APPLICABLE)
A.
The VAV terminal box shall comprise of:1. A Supply air volume controller unit
2. Inside terminal box Sound attenuator
3. Single or multiple outlet plenums
4. Microprocessor Application Specific Controller (ASC).
B.
The air terminal shall be of the independent pressure type, single duct with ARI
Certified performance data. The air terminal shall be constructed of coated steel of
minimum 1mm thickness suitably stiffened to prevent drumming and shall be
internally insulated with non inflammable, non -toxic and face with neoprene to
prevent erosion by air stream.
C.
The box shall have circular spigot connection and shall provide a minimum lapped
joint of 38mm. The inlet shall have a round (or oval) damper operating within a round
(or oval) chamber enclosed by an insulated sheet metal casing.
D.
The damper seal shall be provided by a flexible gasket mounted in the damper blade
without adhesives. The damper shall be a double thickness of 24-gauge steel and
leakage around the damper shall be less than 1% of maximum flow at 3” static
pressure
E.
Construction to be minimum 24 gauge steel for the Air Terminal casing and inlet plate.
The universal control mounting panel and damper cylinder shall be constructed of
minimum 20 gauge steel. The VAV box shall be insulated with 1" minimum thick
1.5 pcf density fibrous glass, lined with neoprene to prevent air erosion up to 6000
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-7
FPM surface velocity. All raw edges shall be coated with adhesive to seal loose
fibers. Insulation, adhesive and gasket materials shall meet NFPA90A.
F.
The air terminal shall be provided with control linkage design that allows the damper
to be repositioned without the use of tools so that damper can be switched from
normally open to normally closed, or vice versa, without removing or relocating the
damper actuator. The air terminal with the multi port velocity sensor and flow sensing
device shall be provided with a quick release access door to permit damper inspection
and removal of the air flow sensor. Each air terminal shall have a control wiring
diagram specific to that air terminal affixed to the control mounting panel and shall be
marked with specific setting and location tagging.
G.
The electric or electronic actuator shall be fitted with an end switch which shall be
connected to the BMS (Building Management System) to indicate the position of the
damper.
H. Attenuators: Where the selected terminal unit has at NC level which does not conform to
that specified for the area under consideration, a terminal box attenuator shall be
employed to reduce the unit noise level even further.
I.
The differential pressure sensor, the pressure shall be measured at the pressure sensor
and sent to BMS via a controller to the multi-controller.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
STORAGE
A.
All materials shall be stored on purpose made compartmented racks or shelving within
a well lit storage container and suitably covered to prevent the ingress of dirt.
B.
Larger items shall be covered and stored clear of the ground in an area where they are
not susceptible to damage.
C.
All items shall be separated by their type and size, laid out in an orderly fashion and
clearly marked for ease of identification.
D.
Comply with Division (1).
3.02
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Dampers shall be installed in the positions shown on the Drawings and where
branches or sub-branches leave the main distribution ducts. Sufficient dampers shall
be provided to regulate and balance the systems.
B.
Dampers shall be positioned to enable full access to operating handles, and such that
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-8
position indicators are clearly visible.
C.
Dampers shall be positioned in sufficient length of straight ductwork to enable access
doors to be mounted adjacent to the damper.
D.
Dampers shall be installed as remote as possible from terminal devices and ductwork
open ends, to prevent regenerated noise being transmitted to the occupied space.
3.03
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Fire dampers shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings and in all positions
where air passages or ducts pass through fire compartments and ceiling smoke barriers
and at the termination point of fire-clad ductwork.
B.
In large section ducts where single units of sufficient size cannot be incorporated
multi-section units shall be fitted.
C.
Fire dampers shall be installed to enable full access to linkages, and in such manner
that position indicators are clearly visible.
D.
The Contractor shall include for the full testing of all fire dampers and for resetting
after testing.
E.
Fire dampers shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions, with particular attention to the maximum number and diameter of bends
on solenoid operating cables.
3.04
ACCESS DOORS
A.
Access doors shall be installed in all positions indicated on the Drawings and where
required to gain full access to all duct mounted items.
B.
Access doors shall be installed adjacent to all fire dampers in such a manner that full
access is available to both the damper and fusible link.
C.
Access doors shall be provided adjacent to all balancing dampers.
D.
Should adequate access not be achieved due to the physical restrictions of the duct
size then one access door shall be positioned either side of the fire dampers or volume
control damper.
3.05
A.
DUCTWORK ATTENUATORS
Attenuators shall be installed in all positions indicated on the Drawings and strictly in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-9
B.
3.06
All attenuators shall be independently supported from adjacent ductwork plant items.
FLEXIBLE JOINTS
A.
Flexible joints shall be fitted at inlet and outlet connections to all fans and air handling
units, and where ducts cross building expansion joints. Any other required locations
shall be indicated on the design drawings. Care should be taken to maintain
alignment between the fan and the duct connection.
B.
With flanged rectangular connections the flexible material shall be held in placed with
flat bar strips attached to a mating flange. For spigot connections the flexible material
shall be held in place with flat bar strips. Flat bar strips shall be used with proprietary
flexible material having sheet metal attached along the edges. Flat bar strips shall be
not less than 2 mm thick.
C.
Adaptors shall be used to provide plain circular ends for spirally-wound ducts. A
sealant, in accordance with the requirements of the Specification, shall be used
between the duct and the flexible joint and the joint secured by clip bands with
adjustable screw or toggle fittings.
3.07
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A.
Flexible connections shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and selected to
suit the spigot size of the relevant duct or item of equipment.
B.
Flexible connections shall be secured to spigots with bandclips of a proprietary
manufacture.
C.
The use of flexible duct between rigid sections of sheet metal ductwork to change
direction or plane will not be permitted except where indicated or expressly authorised
by the Engineer.
D.
Radius bends in flexible duct shall not be permitted and sets shall be of such a nature
that a reduction in the cross sectional area shall not occur.
3.08
SEALANTS, GASKETS AND TAPES
A.
The manufacturer's recommendations and precautions relating to use of sealants,
gaskets and tapes shall be strictly complied with.
B.
Sealants, gaskets and tapes shall be applied to the mating surfaces of a joint and joint
pulled together such that the form of sealing is under compression. Sealants applied
over a joint shall not be permitted.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-10
C.
3.09
Self-adhesive tape shall not be permitted as a primary sealant.
TEST HOLES
Where test holes are cut at works or drilled on site at time of commissioning, all holes
shall be plugged, using effective removable plastic airtight sealing plugs. Samples of
these plugs shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
* END OF SECTION 1404 *
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
_____________________________________________________________________
Duct work Accessories
1404-11
SECTION 1405
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SCOPE OF SECTION
This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the
standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Air Outlets and
Inlets or Air Terminal Devices.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the provision of all labour, materials and the performance of all
operations in connection with the supply and installation of air terminal devices as
specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings and Schedules.
B.
Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the
work of all trades.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of air terminal devices
whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not less than
10 years.
B.
Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of air terminal
devices with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar
nature.
1.04
A.
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The air terminal devices and all associated materials and workmanship shall comply
fully with the latest relevant British Standards and ISO Standards in all respects.
The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards and ISO
standards associated with air terminal devices and associated materials. However, the
Contractor shall ensure that all applicable British Standards and ISO Standards are
complied with whether listed here or not.
BS:
4773
:
Methods for testing and rating air terminal devices for air
distribution systems: Part 1, Aerodynamic testing.
ISO:
5219
:
Air distribution and air diffusion: Laboratory aerodynamic
testing and rating of air terminal devices.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Air Outlets & Inlet
1405-1
1.05
A.
1.06
A.
1.07
A.
SUBMITTALS
Drawings refer to 1000
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Comply with 1000
WARRANTY
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01
GRILLES
A.
Grilles shall be of aluminum extrusion of the types and sizes indicated on the
drawings and in the schedules and be of the concealed fixing type. Where the size is
not indicated, the grilles shall be selected for the air volume flow rates indicated in the
schedules to achieve the required throw, and be within the relevant noise level for the
area being served.
B.
All grilles shall be provided with an aluminum opposed blade multi leaf damper, with
loose key to allow adjustment of the concealed adjuster from the face of the grille.
One loose key for every 20 grilles shall be provided.
C.
Each supply grille shall have two sets of individually adjustable aluminum blades, one
set horizontal the other vertical.
D.
Extract grilles shall be as indicated on the drawings, and in the schedules.
E.
All grilles shall be powder coated to the color approved by the Engineer.
2.02
A.
B.
C.
DIFFUSERS
Air diffusers shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the duties, sizes and
locations shown on the drawings.
Square diffusers for both supply and return air shall be manufactured from extruded
aluminum and shall be supplied complete with opposed blade volume control
dampers. Both dampers and grilles shall have concealed screw type fixings. Spring
clip fixings shall not be permitted.
Where a supply diffuser is directly connected to a stub duct which has a straight of
less than two diameters or equivalent diameters, then an equalizing grid or deflector
shall be used.
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Air Outlets & Inlet
1405-2
D.
The frames of all diffusers shall be provided with positive seals with the except of
those mounted on exposed ductwork. Frames shall be of a type compatible with the
ceiling type or wall finish.
E.
Linear slot diffusers where required shall be constructed from extruded aluminum and
shall be supplied complete with pattern control element. Linear slot diffusers shall
have mitered flanges end caps and concealed fixing straps. Spring clip fixing shall not
be permitted. Where linear slot diffusers cross partition locations closure plates shall
be provided to give a neat termination line either side of the partition.
F.
All return air square diffusers shall be identical to the supply air diffusers within each
conditioned zone.
G.
All diffusers shall be supplied with a stove enamel paint finish to a colour as approved
by the Architect.
H.
The schedules provided indicate volume flows, throws, maximum noise levels and
maximum pressure drops. The Contractor shall ensure that the grille and diffuser
manufacturer shall assess the data and confirms that his selections comply with the
stated parameters.
I.
Special radiussed continuous slot diffusers shall be manufactured from site
dimensions to ensure full co-ordination with the ceiling.
J.
All diffusers shall be powder coated to the color approved by the Engineer.
2.03
LOUVRES
A.
Air intakes and discharges associated with air handling plant shall consist of ducted
connections made to flanged openings formed in the galvanised sheet steel blanking
plates fixed to the rear of the building weather louvres. The blanking plates shall be
used to cover over un-used areas of the weather louvres, and shall be provided under
Division 9.
B.
Sand trap louvres shall be incorporated into the air intake ductwork sections where
indicated.
C.
The sand collection efficiency of the sand trap at a face velocity of 0.6 m/s shall not be
less than 80% with a sand consistency of 92% of particles falling within the 90 to 425
microns range. The pressure loss shall not exceed 30 Pa.
D.
Louvres not forming part of the building cladding are scheduled in Division 9.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
STORAGE
All air terminal devices shall be stored within a well lit container on purpose made
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Air Outlets & Inlet
1405-3
shelving. The devices shall be stored in their original packaging to prevent damage to
the finish.
3.02
GENERAL INSTALLATION
A.
The air terminal devices shall be identified by reference number as to their final
location. Plenum boxes shall be similarly numbered to reduce the risk of incorrect
matching.
B.
Grilles, diffusers and plenum boxes shall be supported independently from the
building structure unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. Grilles diffusers and
plenums shall not be supported from the ceiling grid.
C.
All volume control dampers shall be left in the fully open position.
D.
Diffusers shall be securely fixed to plenum boxes by means of concealed adjustable
mounting brackets.
E.
Side wall grilles shall be fixed to grille plenum boxes or direct ductwall as indicated
on the drawings.
F.
During construction the Contractor shall ensure that the location and fixing of all
grilles and diffusers is fully coordinated between the relevant trades.
G.
Continuous slot diffusers shall have hairline butt joints and shall have provision for
alignment to ensure an unbroken visual line. Make up pieces shall be site measured
and factory cut. Site cutting of diffusers will not be permitted.
* END OF SECTION 1405*
Royal Electromechanical Eng.
Consultant Engineers
Air Outlets & Inlet
1405-4
LIST OF MANUFACTURERS - MECHANICAL WORKS
DRAINAGE AND RAIN WATER SYSTEM
No. Item
(1)
(2)
(3)
1.
Soil, waste, rain water
pipes,
fittings
UAP(Taken)
Holuit((Taken)
2.
Floor Drains, Roof
Drains
Floor Cleanouts and
Flower
Bed Drain (UPVC)
Key Terrain Ltd
(UK)
REDI
(Italy)
Hepworth
(UK)
3.
Floor Drain in Garage
Area
(cast iron)
Zurn
(USA)
Wade
(UK)
Smith
(USA)
4.
Sanitary fixtures
Ideal Standard
(San Remo)
Jacobdelafon
(Odion)
Roca
(Meridian)
14
POTABLE WATER SYSTEM
No.
Item
(1)
(2)
(3)
1.
Cold and hot water pipes
insulation
Armaflex
(UK)
Kaimann
Flex
(Germany)
Clima
Flex
(Belgium)
2.
Cold and hot water pipes
valves
Crane
(UK)
kIM
3.
Pressure, booster pump set
included valves, headers,
control system
Grundfos
salmsong
4.
Electric Water Heater
Local made
5.
Copper monifold
Giacomomini Toma
(Italy)
(Italy)
15
ITTlowara
Tiemme
(Italy)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
No.
1.
Item
Hot/chilled water pipes
insulation
(1)
Armaflex
(UK)
2.
Diffusers, Grills
METALPRESS
3.
Fans
Woods
(UK)
16
(2)
Kaimannflex
(Germany)
(3)
Climaflex
(Belgium)
‫ﺑﻴﺖ اﻻردن‬
Rosenberg(German)
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
No. Item
1.
.Fire fighting pipes
(1)
Silcotub
(Romania)
(2)
(3)
2.
Fire fighting pump set
included valves, headers,
control system
Armstrong
Aurora
ITT
3.
Fire fighting cabinets
Thorn Norsen
(UK)
Angus
(UK)
Total Walther
(Germany)
4.
Portable fire extinguishers
Thorn Norsen
(UK)
Angus
(UK)
Total Walther
(Germany)
FOUNTAIN SYSTEM
No.
1.
Item
Filter
(1)
Hayward
(2)
Astral
(3)
Kripsol
2.
Pumps
Hayward
Astral
Kripsol
3.
Chlorinator
Hayward
Astral
Kripsol
* Notes:
1. Given list of manufactures is intended only to be used as a guideline for
materials/equipment quality objective.
2. Contractors can provide equal or better quality of that stated, and as per engineer
approval.
17
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement